



r^//^o Ed/t/on 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 



Shelf :T6..^._^ 

UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 



Typewriter Ribbons, 



CALIGRAPH 
RIBBONS. 







ALL KINDS 



Typewriter 



* ^ 



New York, Chicago, Toronto. 



SEND F=OR CKTTSI-OGUE, 



^mington 



I^TPSwriter. 



QnginaWty 

OF DESIGN, 

Durability 

OF CONSTRUCTION, 

progress 

IN inPROVEHENTS, 




[ngenuity 



OF DEVICES, 



Simplicity 



OF MECHANISM, 



^ Adaptability 

TO ALL KINDS OF WORK. 



LEADERSHIP means superiority. Continued leadership implies progress. 
Tacitly acknowledged leadership over many competitors shows undeniable 
merit. A pioneer may win reputation by novelty. For a day — for a year, 
it may be — a new thing may command attention. Enduring success must be 
founded upon intrinsic worth. Reputation does not long survive the qualities 
upon which it was founded. The REMINGTON STANDARD TYPE- 
WRITER was the pioneer of practical writing machines. Alone it demonstrated 
that writing by machinery was possible — was economical of time and labor. It 
opened a new field of industry for thousands. At first ridiculed, then tolerated, 
it is now demanded. It is an indispensable factor in the work of the world to-day. 

The success of the REMINGTON is phenomenal. Its reputation is world- 
wide. The demand increases from year to year with unexampled rapidity. The 
reputation originally won by its novelty and ingenuity now rests upon a solid basis 
of practical merit. Thorough integrity of construction and untiring enterprise in 
improvement have made its supremacy unquestionable. It is the standard of 
comparison in its line. The latest model REMINGTON is everywhere looked 
upon as the acme of progress. It embodies the experience of twenty years of 
practical usage — not untried principles or hastily devised experiments. 



ILLUSTRATED CATALOGUE SENT ON APPLICATION. 



WYCKOFF, SEAMAN5 & BENEDICT, 

327 BROADWAY, NEW YORK. 



PRflCTICflL TYPEWRITING; 



All-Finger Method. Which Leads to Operation by Touch. 



ARRANGED FOR 



Se!f=Instruction and School Use. 



THIRD EDITION. 



BATES TORREY, ^ '' 

Author of "Instruction in Practical Shorthand. ' 



NEW YORK: 

FOWLER & WELLS CO., Publishers, 

37 East 21st Street. 



■„^''Mn- 



K. 



A 



%'\'^ 



BATES TOEREY. 
Copyright, 1894, 

BY 

BATES TORHEY. 



PREFACE TO THIRD EDITION, 



It is gratifying to an author to write under the above caption. We are not insen- 
sible to the situation, and cordially thank typewriters everywhere for making the event 
possible. 

There are fifty makes of writing machines to-day where there was one in 1873. 
Method in typewriting has likewise gained currency, and the writer by accident hesitates 
to make himself known. A speed of two hundred words a minute shows what the 
machine is -capable of, and the fact that this was attained by use of all the fingers puts 
to rest all doubt of the efficiency of that style of procedure. 

The Bureau of Education states that from July 1, 1S89, to June 30, 1891, over sixty 
thousand persons were taught shorthand in the United States, and it is presumed a large 
proportion of that number studied typewriting. These are the statistics for about two 
years. It is a suggestive record. 

The widespread use of shorthand in business has made necessary the introduction of 
a vast number of writing machines, which accounts for the enormous demand for both 
stenographers and typewriters. The machine has also extended in many other directions, 
and the movement has not yet reached a limit. We can all be prophets, or the future 
may be judged by the past. 

The present volume contains a few improvements, principally toward making the 
priaiary study of typewriting more interesting. Touch writing is given more specific 
instruction, and more material for practice is furnished. The essential features of the 
method are unaltered. 

Bates Torrey. 



INTRODUCTORY. 



Two hundred thousand stenographers are to be found in this countiy. and far more 
than that number undoubtedly operate the typewriter. Writing na ichines that are a 
marvel of ingenuity issue at least a hundred a day from great plants of mechanical 
completeness. What a wonderful development from the crude contrivance which 
first exhibited a semblance of practical utility twenty years ago. 

Our introductory remarks in the first edition were somewhat apologetic, because 
while the typewriter as an invention was being perfected, a technique of its manipula- 
tion seemed to be unthought of, and a long period elapsed before that received popular 
consideration. Then the all-finger method made an appeal for favor, and in an astonish- 
ingly brief time its merits became known. As a method it has superseded all others, 
and Practical Typeturiting has contributed its share to the reformation. 

That typewritei's are a success goes without saying, and in the shadow of their 
exceeding utility and popularity the all-finger method has advanced too far to admit of 
a backward movement. The workers of the world bend before the machine which Puck 
parodies as being "more puissant than the Gatling gun," and eagerly acknowledge its 
power. Commerce, the law, science, literature, art, business everywhere, education in 
manifold aspects — one and all, go to the little machine for some measure of assistance, 
and no branch of physical or intellectual labor comes away unsatisfied. 

Man's life is quickened and lengthened by the tireless activity of the writing ma- 
chine. Its incessant click beats marching time to every forward movement, and makes 
progress more progressive. Men turn from Aveary toil to find labor lightened by an 
agreeable succession of manual gymnastics ; and brain and heart throb with sympathetic 
zeal when the fingers begin their saltatory movements. 

A new profession has opened to the gentler sex, and all welcome her to a place in 
affairs. Educators are not indifferent to the signs of the times, and the schools are 
receiving an impulse from no less an agency than the writing machine. 

Hardly since the dawn of the present era of civilization has an invention or dis- 
covery worked greater wonders ; never, we think, has a single mechanical device con- 
tributed so widely and so variously to the welfare of man. The pen is indeed mighty, 



INTRODUCTORY. 

but the steel corrodes. The tongue is silvery with speech, btit the rhythmic keys speed 
language on its mission. The mind is pregnant with fertile thoughts, but ease and 
speed of writing makes the human intellect ten times more prolific. Commerce expands 
Avith the peopling of the continents, and the natural growth of prosperity on land and 
sea ; but prominent among the activities of the world the typewriter already occupies 
an important place — busy where business is liveliest, making man's intercourse with 
man readier and closer, and contributing more or less directly to the success of almost 
every human achievement. 



Practical Typewriting. 



(1.) THE MACHINE. 

Upon beginning to write with the typewriter the inquirer should first understand 
somewhat concerning the machine. The tyiiewriter is not a comphcated example of 
mechanics. It can be easily understood, only it were well for the learner to be impressed 




by the absurdity of sitting down and pounding out words upon the keys before knowing 
the necessary and simple things the doing of which will not only promote the comfort 
of the writer, but preserve the machine from harm. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(2.) THE CARRIAGE. The movable frame above the type-basket is the carriage, 
so called, because it carries the paper back and forth over the writing point. The car- 
riage properly demands notice before the keyboard, because it holds the paper, which is 
inserted by laying the sheet upon the paper shelf (F*) with the lower edge lightly rest- 
ing between tlie wooden and rubber rollers, taking care that the right-hand edge of the 
paper does not project beyond the rubber coating of the cylinder (platen). Turn the 
platen by hand from you to roll the paper in until it shall appear above the platen scale. 
This will be seen upon raising the carriage by the nickeled handle at the left. If the page 
is not parallel with the scale, adjust by both hands, pulling one or the other of the cor- 
ners as the case may require. When the paper is thus squared continue to roll it for- 
ward until it passes under the paper guide (or envelope-holder) (68*) and the writing may 
begin. 

(3.) The printing will occupy a line parallel to the scale, about half an inch above 
it ; and a top margin of an inch and a half above the scale will be ample. 

Lower the carriage and move it to the right by the left hand until the pointer (94) 
sets at "0 " of the front scale (87). Having proceeded thus far it is apparent the paper 
is in position, and the carriage adjusted for action, but repressing all eagerness to write, 
it were better to understand still more about the process. 

The carriage pointer can be freely moved to any graduation of the scale by depress- 
ing the release (14-0^) ; never use the long lever at the right front for this purpose. 

Do not allow the paper to wrinkle as it enters the roller ; have it start properly, and 
do not rearrange or touch it until the time for removal from the machine. If the paper 
has to be advanced very much, or reversed for any reason, do it by manipulation of 
either the platen itself, or the line-space lever (170). The platen may be reversed by the 
fingers if the pawl (47) be depressed, and the extent of the reverse may be measured by 
the notches dropped by the cylinder-stop spring (71), remembering that two notches con- 
stitute whole space between the lines, and one notch half space. The expert writer 
measures the extent of the reverse by the number of clicks heard, a click for every tooth 
on the ratchet end of the roller. 

(4 ) RETURNING THE CARRIAGE. With the carriage pointer at "0" suppose 
a line of writing to have begun, and presently finished, the pointer having traversed the 
whole extent of the scale. The adjustment for the next line is the next subject of 
inquiry. 

(5.) The right-hand level' noiv comes into use. To return the carriage to begin a 
new line, pull the carriage lever (170) toward you with a slight effort, but not enough to 
lift the front wheel off the track ; then move toward the right, conveying the whole car- 
riage to point of beginning. The forward pull revolves the platen, thereby feeding 
the paper forward one or two notches, according as the line-space gauge (95) is lowered 
or raised. The movement to the right is limited by the stop-collar (N), and when it is 
adjusted at the extreme right of the back-rod the longest line can be written. If the 
stop-collar be moved to the left, a wider left margin will be the result. 

* Letters or figures refer to plate, page vil. 



PRACTICAL TYl'EWEITIKG. 

(6.) NEVER lift the carriage by the line-space lever to observe the writing. Use 
the nickeled handle at the left for this purpose. When writing the first line, the tinkle 
of a hell is heard as the pointer journeys between 50 and 60. This tells that the end of 
the line is near, and is a warning to be vigilant, more than a command to stop 
immediately. The bell strikes enough in advance of the end so that long -words may be 
divided into syllables by the hyphen, and it is also a caution for the writer to pause and 
plan, lest the characters pile upon another in an unsightly smutch. 

(7.) THE EIBBON MOVEMENT. When the carriage moves from right to left 
the ribbon is made to move, being wound from one spool to the other. When one 
spool is exhausted a difficulty will be noticed in the action of the keys (if the faintness 
of the writing has escaped attention), and it is time to reverse the ribbon. This is done 
by lifting the latch near the left spool from the slot in the crank shaft and letting it pass 
into the other slot, moving the shaft the way the ribbon should go to permit this. It is 
wise to start the ribbon a little in the new direction by turning the crank a few times. 
thereby making sure the latch is in the slot. 

i^^ The Ribbon, the Line-spacing and the suggestions of the Bell are three impor- 
tant features for the beginner to become acquainted with. Therefore read the foregoing 
carefully. 

(8.) A lateral motion to the ribbon may be given by the handle (165) at the right of 
the carriage frame, moving it forward or back so as to present the entire surface of the 
ribbon to the types as the pigment may become exhausted. The front edge of the ribbon 
should be first used, adjusting the same so that the types shall print along the margin 
in an economical manner. Use the farther edge when it is needed. 

(9.) TO CLEAN THE TYPES. With the best of ribbons the types occasionally 
fill. The cleanest and quickest way is to brush them as they lie in the basket, tapping 
the brush gently upon the faces until all dirt is removed. The letters e, a, g, o, s and 
c are the greatest offenders in this regard. It is wise to brush the keys before beginning 
to write, and frequently during the progi-ess of writing, in order to insure positively 
clear work. 

(10.) THE KEYBOARD. All the above has been stated with hardly a mention of 
the keyboard — that all-important subject in typewriting. However, let it be said that 
every key represents two types, either of which can be printed (under certain conditions) 
by the same key. When the machine is in its normal condition the lower-case or small 
letters are operative, but the capitals appear when the key marked " Upper-case " is de- 
pressed, it being necessary to hold this key firmly down all the time upper-case charac- 
ters are in use. Those keys on the machine marked with two characters produce the 
lower one when the machine writes regularly lower-case, and the upper when it is set for 
capitals. 

When the platen is shifted to produce capitals, it may be kept in that position by 
setting the Shifter (149), simply raising it and leaving it so lifted until the writing of cap- 
itals is ended, when it may be dropped l)y a quick movement. The long wooden bar at 
the bottom and front of the keys is the space-bar, which is struck for the spaces between 
words, after punctuation— and indeed for all gaps of limited extent. For long blanks it 
is better to move the carriage, having depressed the left-hand release key. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(11.) USINGr THE SCALES. Inasmuch as early writing is likely to be productive 
of some errors, it is important that the scales should be then understood, in order that 
corrections may be easily made. 

In the first jjlace, the edge of the platen scale defines the bottom of the letters, 
and each graduation of the scale marks the position of a character. It is well to re- 
member this when filling blanks, or using paper that has a heading or a line to be 
written upon. At the same time the tyj^es strike the paper half way between the scale 
and the paper-guide, or, rather, on a line three-fourths of an inch above the scale. This 
position is attained by turning the platen and paper forward two notches of its cogged 
wheel. Arranging the paper for this position, or turning the platen as may be 
necessary, are movements described in the foregoing text. Thus far the scale referred 
to is that seen when the carriage is raised ; but when the carriage is down the front scale 
(87) marks the situation, and the pointer (9i) shows the place of any character. This 
pointer is set to any position by movement of the carriage, either by the release-key with 
the left hand, or the lever with the right, as previously described. It is requisite that 
the beginner be guided by the scales. In truth, he will have to be, as haphazard cor- 
recting will be unsatisfactory. 

(12.) Possibilities for scale practice are the following : 

Unfinished line. Move the pointer to the number where the line breaks off, as 
indicated by the platen scale, make one space and continue the writing. 

Omitted letter. Note the number on the platen scale over which the gap stands ; 
set the front pointer at the same number, and strike the desired letter. 

A special heading, addy-ess, or title. Calculate (par. 89, p. 35) the point of begin- 
ning, and set the front pointer accordingly. 

Figure tabulation (par. 50). The regularity of the columns depends wholly upon a 
clever use of the scales. 

When a sheet that has been taken out is returned to the machine. Make the last or 
longest written line even with the platen scale, having all letters like t, I, i or /vertical 
and even with the graduations. Turn the platen two notches (or clicks), and begin to 
write with the pointer at the place of beginning desired. 

When an omitted tvord or letter is to be inserted between the lines. Reverse the 
paper by movement of the platen until the blank space to be filled is reached, then turn 
the platen two notches and write with the pointer at the space desired. 

(13.) (a) KEEP THE MACHINE CLEAN. Too much stress cannot be laid upon 
keeping the typewriter clean at all times. It must be kept free from dust, and a 
rubber or cloth cover should be conveniently at hand to throw over the machine when 
not in use. (See, also, par. 121.) 

If left exposed the rods and bearings will be most affected, and when the parts are 
again set in motion the dust grinds upon the rods, cogs and axles, adhering to them, 
ultimately impeding the motion of the machine, and so impairing the quality of its 
work. No typewriter will do its duty under an accumulation of dust or foreign 
matter. All the parts suffer, but more particularly the carriage and related move- 
ments. 

{b) OILING. Lubricate lightly all bearings, i. e., wearing parts, but only \vheu 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

reminded so to do by a squeak. Have the front carriage rod (IIS^) always oily ; like- 
wise the toothed spacing-rack at the rear, so that the spacing-dogs will disengage easily- 

Keep the back carriage-rod (2) free from oil, and brightly poUshed. Wipe off aU 
superfluous oil from any part. 

The entire ribbon movement mechanism, the nickeled guard over the said spacing- 
rack, and the springs of the fulcrum bearing of the key levers at the extreme back, 
beneath the iron frame, need special attention occasionally. (See par. 9i, p. 36.) 

(c) CARBON DUPLICATES : Place the impression paper between the white paper 
hlack side down. Feed into machine with black side next to black roller. Never hurry 
this for fear of Avrinkling. 

Also never correct upon the surface of manifold copy, without running the written 
line to top of roller, and sliding a paper between the carbon and the outside sheet. 
Unless this is done every mark made upon the outside communicates to every duplicate. 

Handle carbon carefully, for if wrinkled it is practically ruined for further use. 
With fairly thin paper four or five duplicates can be taken ; with specially thin paper, as 
many as ten. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



(U) THE OPERATOR. 



Before considering the way to ■write, the foregoing pages relating to the structure 
and management of the machine should be studied very carefully, takmg particular 
note of the carriage motions. In a word, become entirely familiar with the directions 
which relate to the easier mechanics of typewriting. 



■ 


■ 






k 






m: 


9 






m 






Im 


mgk 










^,4 


w. 




1 ■> .1- 


^H 








^^^^ffm^ 








i 


-:.:^ 


:1 








:::..m 





Correct Attitude when Writing. 



2 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(15.) The first requisite toward acquiring a method of keyboard manipulation is to 
sit erect at the middle front of the keys, with the finger tips over the disks, and the 
fore and upper arm at right angles, or nearly so — a trifling slope of the fore arm down- 
ward toward the manual being desirable. An erect attitude may as well be cultivated 
from the beginning, as it is generally conceded that the body will maintain a perpen- 
dicular position with less fatigue than if inclined either forward or back. 

(16.) HAND POSITION is best secured by dropping the fourth (little) fingers upon 
P and Q, and making the other fingers to fall naturally upon the next letters in their 
order, namely, POIU for the right hand, and QWER for the left. Then place the right 
thumb on the space-bar, and if the elbows are close to the body, though a little foi-ward 
of the trunk, good hand position is accomplished. It cannot be too often reiterated 
that correct hand position is the foundation of method in typewriting. 

(17.) TOUCH is the next important feature. In order to begin well, the writer 
should have a clear idea of the proper touch, namely, that it is a nervous (in distinction 
from muscular) staccato blow, consisting of a sharp attack upon the keys, followed by 
a rapid and entire withdrawal of the finger tips between each successive stroke. Never 
strike two letters at the same time. Inasmuch as the appearance of typewriting depends 
upon the strength of the blow, the impression being dark in color, or light, according to 
the force exerted, it will be understood that just the right Imprint must be the result 
of care and skill in finger action. Such action can be readily acquired by the first and 
second fingers, but the third,* anatomically considered, is different from the others, and 
the little finger is not always strong. Stiff fingers, too, are a decided drawback, but 
they can be rendered pliable by exercises in movementsf such as piano players often 
practice. Well-directed discipline, however, balances the hand in its action, and the 
uneven strength of the fingers is soon turned into equal agility. 

Be appreciative of the fact that the typewriter is a more or less delicate contrivance. 
It must not be abused. Have respect for its mechanical difficulties, and be determined 
to master not only the technique of the manual, but to trace ingenious effects to the 
proper cause. At the same time be considerate of the helplessness of the machine, and 
while inspired with the spirit of investigation, nevertheless let your prying into the 
reason for things be tempered with discretion. 

(18.) THE KEYBOAED. 
The letters of the alphabet are arranged upon the keyboard in the following order : 
LEFT HAND. RIGHT HAND. 




* Pianists deplore the incapacity of this finger, and some musicians resort to a surgical operation, called 
douVe tenotomy, to free the finger from the impediment to action. 

f Hand Culture bas become a recognized branch of piano instruction. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 3 

Memorize the letters in the order of the rows shown by the arrows, both horizontal 
and vertical, and note the division by the double lines which indicate right- and left-hand 
territory. Form a picture in tlie mind of just the letters to be covered by each hand, 
and the relative positi<ins they hold. 

(19.) Having memorized the keyboard — and not until then — it is proper to learn the 
special duty of each finger. The diagram below exliibits the letters in the same order as 
above, but surmounted by the figures 1, 2, 3, 4, which are xot the figures of the key- 
board, but are to specify the fingers to be used, and are so placed over the slanting 
rows of letters as to show which letter it is proper for each finger to attack. Figure 1 
stands for the fii'st or index finger of tlie right hand, and knowing this, 2, 3, and -? need 
no explanation. The light-face figures stand for the left-hand fingers. 

Remember that the right thumb strikes the space-bar, and tliat the left thumb is 
not employed. 



LEFT HAND 
FINGERS 



RIGHT HAND 

FINGERS 




By this Diagram the full scope of the all-finger method may be demonstrated. 
Adopting the procedure previously described for obtaining hand position, namely, to 
place the right fourth finger on P, and the left fourth on Q, and dropping the remain- 
ing fingers upon the top row (bank) of letters, the simple office of the five fingers will 
be made clear when the index fingers reach R and U, and the right thumb drops to the 
space-bar. This same spanning of the fingers carried to the next bank below, and on to 
the next, will show how nearly all the letters are to be depressed. 

But it will be discovered that the oblique rows YHN and TGB are not reached, be- 
cause in each bank there are inore letters than fingers to operate them. YHN and TGB 
are provided for by simply shifting the whole hand toward the center, which brings the 



4 PRACTICAL TYPEVfRlTlNG. 

strong iudex fingers upon these letters, and thereupon the second fingers strike UJM* and 
EFV. At the same time the scope of the third and fourth fingers is not increased — their 
duty remains the same — because they are weak members as compared witli the others. 

(20.) The following lessons are to drill the student in the details of methodic pro- 
cedure ; and at the outset it may be remarked that the results of method are worth the 
seeking, being grace of motion, harmonious and healthy cultivation of the powers, 
accuracy, proficiency quickly attained, and without undue fatigue. Therefore, know- 
ing perfectly well how to insert the paper, how to operate the carriage and ribbon, and 
appreciating the suggestions of the bell— writing may begin. Attend strictly to the busi- 
ness of these exercises, however fascinating may be the allurement of word and sentence 
writing. 



LESSON I. 

(21.) FOUR-FINGER STUDIES. 



Next below are the four-finger studies of typewriting. Note particularly that the 
"figures stand for the fingers to be exercised, and that the province of eacli finger is 
clearly shown by the Diagram. For instance, ill means that the first finger of the 
Tight hand must strike a key three times, and the diagram indicates what letter it is 
"proper for that finger to attack. Between each group of figures strike the space-bar 
once with the right thumb — never the left. 

The next figure group, 111, means the first finger of the left hand, and so on. 

till, 111, 323,222, 333,333, 444, lil, 13,12, 33,23, 34,3-1, 43,43, 
33, 32, 3!, 21, 13, 13, 133, 123, 321, 321, 1334, 1234, 4331, 4321,- 
1331, 1324. 

Continue the same alternation of hands, taking the cue from the groups above, and 
passing from one bank of keys to another until the scope of the manual is exhausted, 
and all possible fingerings have been rendered. 

131, 132, 234, 243, 242, 41, 21, 42, 1234, 4321, 421, 134, 1213, 1324, 2414, 
412, 413, 423, 3121, 4213, 1424, 4121, 124, 214, 341, 314, 2134, 1432, 4113, 2221, 
2114, 3322, 4411, 4444, 3334, 22-33, 1312, 1113, 2224, 3331, 4443, 1133, 4114. 

(21-.) 

1 1 

u u u (space) j j j m m m u j m m j u r r r f f f v v v r fv 

2 2 3 

fvr iii kkk ,,, i k , eee ddd ccc e d c cde ooo 111 

4 3 4 

/ / / o I . p p p ; ; ; p ; www s s s x x x w s x q q q a a a 

1 11 

zzz qa z zaq aqz yyy hhh nnn y h n ttt ggg bbb 

* The optional fiugeriug of the iuner rows of letters by either the first or second finger is best illustrated by the 
miiiiiicr of writing the initial combinations er dr fr gr im un. 

f Heavy-Face Type— Right hand ; Light-Face— Left hand. 



PRACTICAL TYPE IVRITING. 5 

11 1 11 1234 1334 4321 4 3 21 4231 4231 

t gb n h y b g t u i o p r e w q p o I u q w e )• p i o u q e ^^• r 

13 34 1234 12 3 4 4231 4131 4 1 32 4 1 3 2 

r w e q y i o p t e w q 1> i o y q i- w t p p u u o o i i q q r r av av e e 

4321 4321 1234 12 3 4 4 12:1 1433 2314 2341 3 2 1 4 

a s df ;lkj f d s a j k 1 ; ; j k 1 f a s d k 1 j ; d s a f s s d d f f a a 

1231 432312 32 1 2 3 123414 12 3 234 13124 13231 

j k 1 1 j a s d s f d 1 k j j k 1 f d s a f a j k 1 k 1 ; g s f d a h 1 k 1 j 

1413 1213 4321 3212 1 4231 1324 4 2 3 1 

gafs hkjl zxcv /,ni,inn zcxv vxcz zzzcccxxxvvv 

124 21 1 23 1 2123 14131211 14 

bczzcb mmmnnn,,,... nni.m,. bzbxbcbv bzbzbzbzbz 



LESSON II. 

(23.) WORD DEVELOPMENT. 



Have a method of typewriting ; do not pound the keys aimlessly. Pay particular 
attention to the carriage and its functions. Practice the following, which is another 
way of developing a knowledge of the keyboard. 



I 


1 4 


1 3 


2 3 


24 34 


1 


14 12 


12 3 


121 


1 


u u u 


up 


n 


i 


ip op 


r r r 


r q re 


r e w 


ret 


ttt 


12 


12 


12 1 


12 


13 121 


J 1 ] 2 


1123 i: 


I 1 2 


12 1 


1 


tr 


tre 


ter 


te 


t w yet 


tyre 


tyro t 


r u e 


try 


y y y- 


1 2 


1 3 


i 4 


1 2 


13 1 


4 4 


1 a 1 


4 2 


4 3 


4 3 21 


yi 


yo 


yp 


y u 


you 


V p p p y p ^^ 


pi 


po 


poet 


4 3 2 


12 1 


4 3 1 2 


1 1 


4 3 3 2 1 


3 


3 2 3 2 3 


2 S 


! 3 2 1 


3 2 1 


p e 


t r y 


p o 1 1 e 


r y 


p o w e r 


AV W W 


w 6 \\- e 1 


•e e 


1 w e r 


w e t 


3 2 


4 3 


2 4 1 


1 


13 1312 13 


3 12 2 4 


1 22 4 


2 2 


21 


AV" V. 6 


p w 


e p t 


tt t 


to to 


re t w 


o t r i p 


trip 


e i i 


i i t 


212 


1212 


13 4 


13 3 2 1 


134 2 1 


1 1 2 


1 3 


14 


124 


ire 


tire 


top 


t o w e r 


toper 


h h h h k 


hi 


h; 


h i ]3 


121 


12 1 


14 3 


1 


4 2 14 1 


1 


12 13 


1 4 


1 4 3 


3 4 2 


hit 


h e r 


has 


h 


ad hag 


ggg 


g d gs 


g a 


gas 


sad 


14 2 


1 4 


2 1 4 


1 


24 1 


2 14 1 


1 1 


2 


2 1 


2 4 1 


gad 


f a- 


d gaff 


daft 


draft 


n n n n m 


m n 


m a n 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



243 2 43 1422 2412 
mass 111 a d ii a m e mane 


1 

bbb 


13 133 142 
bx bos bad 


14 1 1 
bag j j j 


141 141 121 124 134 

jag jam j i m j i p j o p p 


4 3 

a 111 


34 3 13 43 

lass glass 


3 4 2 4 3 4 2 
lad p 1 ad 



Make no effort for speed at the beginning. Be painstaking and accurate. Heed 
the bell. After the bell rings, complete the group of letters it' there is sufficient space ; 
otherwise begin a new line. The right margin cannot be even like the left, but be sure 
and leave no large gaps. Grasp the line-space-lever firmly, and actually move the paper 
forward, when returning the carriage to j^oint of beginning. 

Observe the progressive passage from letters to words, but write only the simple 
words given. Restrain the desire to wander over the keyboard in an expedition of 
discovery. 

Do not let the ribbon run out. Brush the types occasionally. Lift the carriage as 
seldom as possible, and refrain from pulling the paper into place if it becomes disar- 
ranged. Make the paper even before beginning to write, and after that adjust it by 
management of the lever or platen. When removing the sheet entirely from the 
machine use both hands, and draw forth steadily. 



(24.) 



Frequent letter sequences 



1 1 

th 



2 1 

i 11 



41 
a n 



31 
of 



13 
re 



21 
ei 



32 

ou 



2 I 

e n 



23 
i s 



4 1 
at 



3 1 

or 



23 

e s 



33 

s e 



ed 



13 

to 



41 
ar 



43 2 1 

as it 



43 

al 



3 I 

on 



Less frequent : 



2 1 
ch 



3 3 
O W 



3 1 

St 



3 1 

w h 



23 
Cl 



43 

Pl 



13 

bl 



1 1 

br 



1 2 



4 1 

pr 



4 1 

q u 



13 
f 1 



13 

tr 



13 
f r 



21 
c r 



Syllabic combinations 



41 
a b 



4 2 
a c 



3 

de 



3 3 
e X 



1 1 



2 1 

i m 



1 2 
be 



34 

op 



3 I 

ob 



1 4 

up 



2 1 

u n 



31 

ly 



1 1 

ty 



2 1 

ry 



11 

th 



U 3 

the 



113 

three 



113 3 
threw 



1 I 312 

there 



1141 
that 



1 1 

thy 



1123 

this 



1 13 3 3 

those 



12 

re 



12 4 1 
rear 



12 4 2 

read 



1231 
rest 



1212 12 
retire 



12 13 4 1 
retreat 



2 

ed 



3 21 
edit 



2 2133 
editor 



4 3 

a s 



3 4 3 
was 



3 4 3 1 
w a s t 



3 4 3 12 
waste 



3 4121 
water 



2 1 
dr 



2 1 I 

dry 



313 3 
drew 



2 12 4 2 
dread 



3 13 3 
dress 



13 13 3 
r e d r e s 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. ^ 

"•^ ^f' -^f^' -^341 43412 43421 12 12 41 412 

^^ 1^^^' I'^^^J' plat plate plait gr great agree 

'' , ''-''l I' 12 1 12 3. 3 141 3,212 

gieed grief fr fret free wh what where 

'f^-* ''\-* 3>» 2 31332 3121121 41 4,21 

whop whip whole whose whether qu quit 

^^^/^ ^^^ 1 41212 41221 41212 41312 13 13432 

quip queer quite quiet quire quote fl flask 

V''' ;;f 3' 31 31 2 1 13 3 31224 312242 21 

flag flash St street strew strip stripe ch 

2 144 214 1 2 1244 2 1241 4 1 4143 2 4121 2 1 2121 

Chap chat cheap cheat ab abase abet ev ever 

21211 21211 212121 13 13431 1342 13 4 2 <> 3 

every event everett bl blast blade black e'x 

2321 232 3 21 2123 21123 211 2323 21442 

exert excess cr crew cruel cry cress crape 

*' ^'i^l 2113 21121 213131 21 214 21430i 

^" '''^'' i"to i'lfei- insult im imp import 

214332 214,12 2, 2,231 21123 211222 1 og 

impose impute un union until untried 50 ij 

2i* 33 321 21 21 1 i 1,2 ,33 

3S 2 9 2 34 3i5 456 5 67 6 78 78 9 



LESSON III. 

(25.) HAND ALTERNATION. 



In the following practice keep all the fingers hovering over the keys according to 

he instructions previously given for correct hand position. Write each word many 

times, and after the first careful " picking out" of the exact fingering look awav from 

the manual, and trust to a recollection of the fingers and the relative locations of the 

letters. (See Touch Writing, Lesson V. ) 



42 1 
art 


2 4 3 2 
ease 




32 3 

oil 


12121 
refer 


2 4 12 1 
caret 


12 3 121 
fester 


13 1 

J oy 


4 2 121 

a d V e r 


t 


3 4 12 3 

wages 


2 12 1 

k inky 


13 1231 

homily 


14 12 
rate 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITIKG. 



32 4 1 


4 3 1 2 4 


4 212 


2 4 121 


12 14 12 




14 3 1 


seat 


plum p 


acted 


caterer 


regard 




fact 


43 1 


3 4 3 


1 23 


12 32 


2 3 2 14 1 


3 


323 


ply 


■\v a X 


mill 


hulk 


6 X e c r a t 


e 


189 1 


3 4 3 


4 3 13 1 


2 4 13 


3 3 12 13 


3 12 4 14 




13 4 


sad 


aster 


cafe 


secrets 


strata 




mop 


4 134 


4 2 3 


3 3 4 1 


423 


13 12 4 1 




4 1 2 1 4 1 S 


pulp 


pul 1 


w e a r 


pi 11 


retreat 




average 



11243 121231 1323 131 1212 121 2131 

*B with right hand :bread bunion boil boy bunk buy knob 

121131 131 1 41413 1421 4131 

B with left hand : nimbly nobby abate barb abet 

42134 141 141 2 
zebra bat barge 

wed moon punk west ohio 1879 pomp scarf verge monk sacred zest 

state waft limp graves pump aware onion lion vex care afterward 186T 

case reader tract hunk philip noun milk fades imply dead trace hull 



LESSON IV. 

(26.) THE COMMON WORDS. 



The Capital is now introduced, which is obtained by depressing the key marked 
" Upper Case " with the left fourth finger, and holding it down while the capital is being 
made. 

The fingering of capitals under the right hand will be the same as for lower-case ; 
but in case of the left hand, the fourth finger being engaged upon the shift, the 
fingers at liberty will execute as consistent a rendering of the all-finger idea as may be 
expedient. For instance, while holding the shift down with the left fourth, strike the 
letters in that division as follows : 

3 2 2 11 

Q A Z W S X E D C REV T G B 

As the tAvo movements for a capital are almost simultaneous, the hand is immedi- 
ately free to proceed with systematic fingei'ing. 

Do not indulge the left little finger. If not strong at first, it will develop by practice. 
Never fear but it will eventually do the work. 

*This letter being so neai' the oeoter, it is available foi- either haad ia the event of a complication. 



PRACTICAL TYPE WRITISG. 



The figured words of this lesson comprise more than half of any discourse not 
technical, and their value for practice material is so great that they may be termed the 
scales of typeivriting. 

(27.) 



3 3 


3 


3 S 


1 23 


13 3 


3 3 1 


2 4 3 


All 


As 


Do 


His 


Now 


w n 


Was 


3 2 


3 1 


1 32 


2 1 


1 3 


3 11 


2 23 


A m 


At 


For 


In 


No 


Our 


Will 


3 1 


] 2 


112 


2 1 


13 1 


2 12 


2 13 


An 


Be 


Had 


It 


Not 


She 


Who 


3 12 


1 1 


1 2 


23 


31 


23 


2 1* 


And 


By 


He 


Is 


Of 


So 


Why 


3 1* 


12 1 


1 2 1 


2 11 


3 1 


1 1 2 


12 1 


Any 


But 


Her 


]M a y 


Or 


The 


Yet 


313 


2 4 1 


12 1 


2 I 


3 11 


1 3 


13 1 


Are 


Can 


Him 


My 


Out 


To 


You 




1 2 1 


3 3 3 


2 2 


3 1 


1 3 3 






Did 


How 


Me 


On 


T wo 





Write each word many times, and Avhen familiar with the procedure look away 
from the keyboard — which is Touch writing. (See Lesson V. ) 

(28.) SENTENCES. 

Begin each sentence with a capital, and end with the period, the latter being made 
by shifting to upper-case. After striking the period continue to hold down the shift 
Avhile making three depressions of the space-bar (for the customary space between sen- 
tences), so that the capital of the succeeding sentence may be written without superfluous- 
motion. Strike the period very lightly. 

When the comma follows a word, make one space after it. If a phrase is not finished 
on one line, continue upon the next ; or divide a long word into its syllables by th& 
hyphen, if justifying (equalizing) the lines demands it. 

He was there. Are you true I Will be free. You have addressed him. Had not- 
seen him. Can do it quite well. AVhy not state the truth ? Our own boy. He did not 
care. She can be queer. The two of you are at war. How can it be so I He saw his 
own caterer in the cafe. Will you buy red wax '{ Why not say so, if you can not get it ? 
On the way to the fair. He was the one referred to. The man in the moon. PuU out 
of the way. The State of Ohio is in the West. 

* See Lesson VIII. 



jQ PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(29.) 



3 3 121 


2 12 1 


'2 4 2 


3 2 2 1 


2 113 


After 


E V e r 


Made 


Such 


Unto 


12 1 


2 3 3 1 


2 3 12 


3 4 2 2 


2 211 


Been 


Most 


More 


Same 


W i t h 


2 3 2 2 


2 4 1 


3 2 121 


114 1 


2 14 1 


C m e 


Many 


Often 


That 


What 


2 S I 2 


14 22 


2 3 2 2 


14 3 1 


2 13 2 


D 11 


M a k e 


Some 


Upon 


Whom 



From Have Here Into Might Much Mine Never Only Over Then This 
Than Thus They Were When Your. 

(30.) SENTENCES. 

In sentence writing strive to attain a fluent action of the fingers, writing each char- 
acter with even touch in an uninterrupted movement from the beginning to the end of 
the phrase. Above all things, avoid a jerky style of manipulation. 

They might have been tired. Either of them may have been regarded as quite busy. 
When were you here ? We have much to do this week. What was the red flag for ? 
When will she wed ? The zebra was striped black and white. Jonah went down to 
Joppa. We never make more than this. Did you have the caret right ? His was a 
sacred homily. Everett was very weary. What have you done upon this great theme ? 
Were you there, and did you see me ? What will you do about it ? Much can be done 
by anyone. Say, when were mine made ? Many might liave easily been imposed upon. 



(31.) 

31321 121212 31121 21212 21323 

About Behind Other Where Unless 

333413 23132 2212 21332 312 1 

AlAvays Could Since Whose Under 



PRACTICAL TYrEWKITlXG. 



1 J 1 4 1 3 3 


2 2 112 1 


2 14 3 


2 12 2 1 


2 2 113 11 


Because 


E i t ]i e r 


S li a 1 1 


"\^^ h i c li 


Without 


1 2 1 :i 1 2 


2 12 11 


112 1 


2 2 1 12 1 


2 3 13 2 


B e f o re 


Ever y 


There 


^^' i t li i u 


^^' o u 1 d 


12 13 12 


12 2 112 1 


112 3 2 


2 12 112 1 


2 1 2 1 C 


Beyond 


N e i t li e r 


These 


Whether 


Whence 



Begin Care Far Feel Fill Full God Give Gi-eat Heaven Hope Just 

Knew Kind Life Like Little Lord Love Man Near People Part Quite 

Right See Send Tell Thank Thing Think Told Truth Time Use Usual 
Way Went Wish Word World Work Whole. 

(32.) SENTENCES. 

Where were the otlier two ? Come over here when you can. What will you have ? 
Before j^ou made this. Can that he so I About every one can see it. What shall we 
do ? Now, then, here Ave are again. They were beyond youi' power. How can they 
do the woik so well ? Some of them were too little to give away. How do you feel 
about doing the work ? From Avhence do you come ? We will ahvays thank God for 
the work we can do. The}' sent far and near for him. Life is full of truth and hope. 
Work always with a Avill. It is now time to go. The Lord is near unto them that love 
him. She did not know whether to tell him or not. We thank you very much for the 
good time we have had. Neither of them told the whole truth. They think they do not 
care to take part in the work. Do unto others as you would that they should do to you. 
We have not seen you since that time. He knew they would come at the usual time. 
All men do not think alike. Thou shalt love the Lord thy God with all thy heart, and 
with all thy soul, and with all thy strength, and with all thy mind, and thy neighbor 
as thyself. 



12 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

LESSON V. 
(33.) TOUCH WRITING. 

Aftei- the foregoing words can be readily written according to the instruction given, 
the operator should practice them by Touch. 

TOUCH is the term coined by the author to describe writing without looking upon 
the keys, and typewriting by Touch is a natural outcome of the all-finger method, being 
entirely practicable as the result of correct hand position, precise finger attack and dili- 
gent practice. 

Touch writing, iii an exact sense, requires a high degree of expertness, and except 
for exhibition purposes is hardly desirable. On the other hand, a more reasonable defi- 
nition of the term TOUCH is to typewrite with only an occasional and flitting glance 
upon the keys, and facility of such writing is quickly attained. For the all-round Avriter 
this liberal interpretation of the word Touch is more popular than the other. 

At the outset a few essentials merit attention. There must be a perfect familiarity 
with the letter manual, and an unerring sense of the location of every character. The 
duty of each finger must be understood, and a correct hand position absolutely main- 
tained. 

(Si.) HELPS TO TOUCH WRITING. 

Presupposing a thorough knowledge of the keyboard and a dextei'ous control of all 
the fingers, there are a few helps which may be suggested to promote Touch writing ; 
that is to say, there are strategic points on the manual which serve as guides to position 
and direction. In the maintenance of hand position the outside letters P and A mark 
one boundary, and the rows UJM and EFV define the inside limit. This is primary 
hand position. Shift the hands toward the center, and the rows YHN and TGB mark 
the inside limit of what may be called secondary hand position. 

The letters P and A" represent fixed places of agreeable location, which may serve 
as guide keys, and easy progressions from them are OL and WSX, because the latter are 
subject to a fixed fingering by the third fingers. 

For striking intervals the long and strong fingers are best able to overcome the diffi- 
culties of the interior of the keyboard. The writer by Touch will have the greatest diffi- 
culty in locating the inner keys ; the outer rows will rarely be missed. Therefore it is 
apparent that the variations of distance from the guides (P and A), taken as centers of 
action, call for nice calculation on the part of the first and second fingers. 

If, by reason of raising the right hand to return the carriage, hand position be mo- 
mentarily lost, a command of the keyboard can be recovered by assistance of the left 
hand, which should remain in place. All the finger tips may fall softly upon the keys, 
when a pause is made to establish position ; and, if necessary, the thumbs or index fin- 
gers can be made to interfere, if secondary position be sought ; while a tenure upon the 
guide keys should be always possible, to the extent of keeping the hands within bounds. 

When writing by Touch it is necessary the hands should brood over the keyboard, 
the fingers resting upon the disks lightly, and ready to attack any letter without very 

* A ib selected rather tuan Q, because the lormer is a higlier averag'e Jelter. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



13 



much movement of the hauds to one side or the other. Certain intervals will be found 
more difficnlt to span than others, and some Avords will prove troublesome at first 
because of awkwai-d sequences of letters. Below are illustrated a few of the more 
difficult intervals on the standard keyboard, together with words that will illustrate a 
sinijile phase of Toucli Writing. 

3 4 








average behave 



referred monopoly 





jeopardy 



technical 







(35.) INTERVALS AND HOW SPANNED. 

From examination of the above it will be seen how nearly all the letters are located 
by sliding stretches fi'om the guides P and A taken as pivotal j^oints. Certain intervals 
are of quite common occurrence, like AT, AG, A.B, or ET, EG, EV, and the method of 
striking them with accuracy is cleaiiy suggested. The letters closely adjoining P or A 
are so easily located as to require no mention. 

When a capital in the left-hand division is to be written, it were best to locate the 
letter, and then depress the Shift without losing the bearings. Many capitals had best 



14 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

he -written by setting the macliine to upper-case. The figures may be cautiously made, 
being guided by a sense of location of the top bank of letters. 

Let it be understood that all this instruction is for the hesitating and not over-con- 
fident learner, but as the method becomes more familiar there will develop that almost 
intuitive sense which will make the writing proceed as if worded direction and mne- 
monic helps had not been a part of tlie learning process. 

(36.) THE ADVANTAGES OF TOUCH WRITING. 

The operator, according to no particular design, will learn to perform many move- 
ments unconsciously, and because of the simplicity of the process of machine writing 
attain to considerable speed, even though grace be lacking, and strength stand for skill. 
But, on the other hand, having a superior method at command, the situations where the 
attention may relax become far more numerous, common words and common material 
of words will be written with hardly a glance upon the manual, the fingers simply drop- 
ping upon the keys almost Avithoufc volition, and acting with steady, constant move- 
ment, leaving the mind free to grapple with the perplexities of the text. 

Such manipulation of the writing machine puts itself on a high level as a manual 
-art, and sets the seal of approval upon the typewriter as exemplifying a system of writ- 
ing, because the action and development of Vciq fingers is as comislete as the mechanical 
ingenuity of the device is notable. 





LESSON 


VI. 






(37.) WORDS 


FOR PRACTICE. 




3 1221 


12 21 




3 2 211 


3 2 4 112 


Quiet 


Hurt 




Query 


League 


4 3 11 


12 12 




4 12 1 


4 114 3 2 


Pout 


G e r m 




Prey 


Phrase 


4 32 1 


] 2 2 111 




2 2 1 1 


3 4 2 14 


Port 


F r e i g h t 




Witty 


Opera 


2 122 . 


3 4 3 1 




4 2 12 


1 334 21 


Eerie 


A p p 1 y 




Pure 


Helper 


3 13 12 


12 4 3 2 1 




12 111 


3 4 434 1 2 


Quote 


Report 




Night 


Lapland 


2 1 3 1 


14312 




14 3 1 


4 3 4 1 12 


E r r r 


Value 




G a s h 


Plague 


2 1212 1 


13 12 




23 4 2 


122111 


Writer 


Note 




Clad 


Fright 


12 3 1 


2 2 4 11 




2 4 2 2 


3 424 13 


Troy 


Weary 




Sack 


Opiate 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITIXG. 15 



2 3 1 1 


2 Jl 1 2 -1 


12 12 1 


3 12 3 


W o r r y 


Equip 


French 


Quill 


4 12 1 1 


4 3 4 13 4 1 


12211 


2 I I 2 1 1 


Pretty 


P o p u 1 a r 


B r i n g 


I 111 p u g n 



Imminent Debt Divine inS-t Inquiry Ships Success Intent Right Cause 

Usual ]\Iistake Dusty Common Sufficient August Sleigh Queen Jamb 

Neigh Shekel Coal Liable Zealous Xanthus Teach Afraid Reason Delay 
Margin Duty Manage Favor E(]nal Letter Honest Govern Happy 

(3S.) SEXTENCES. 

It is a good rule in typewriting to adopt one way of writing a word, and adhere to 
that way without wavering. If the eight fingers and right thumb are carefully trained 
to write in methodic fashion, the act is next performed without volition, and the intent 
of this manual is to dire(;t to just such meclianical action in machine writing. 

Philip will value the report. The query makes the boy pout. Errors in lier 
work iilague the pretty typewriter. The Frenchman will liriug freight from Lapland. 
Bring the child some jiure milk. Xerxes retreated quietly after sacking the port. It 
was the wish of the governor to abate the bank tax. All agree that the monk was clad 
in a black sack. Nothing we can do shall help or hurt you. The State debt has faded 
away. We note the intent of your inquiry. Shall ^ve know when he comes ? We are 
here for only a few hours. Replying to your query, would say the estate is for sale. 
What witty phrase was he reading from the letter I Our ships of war go to almost everj- 
part of the world. Where we are aware of a fact your words won't be worth much. He 
was far behind us on the road to Troy. Everyone says the opera is going to be a success. 
Zealous in the canse of duty. The coal was found in the right strata. We went many 
a long league that night. '' Of all the saws I ever saw saw, I never saw a saw saw as 
that saw saws." 



LESSON A'll. 

(39.) THE COMJIOX PREFIXES AXD AFFIXES. 

Prefixes. Employ capitals a portion of the time, and memorize the fingering, as 
these elements of word structure will not be figured in the words for practice given 
further on. Practice also by Touch. 

32 32 31 3 1 3 3 31 3 4 3 31 3 1 12 
Ac Ad A f A g A 1 An A p As A r At Be 



16 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

12 221212 23 23 2 31 231 231 23S124 231123 23 2 1121 

Bi Circum Co Col Con Com Cog Contra Contro Counter 

3 22 22 1 223 22 21 23 132 1421 23 21 

de di dif dis em en ex for hyper il im 

21 21121 2 1123 123 12 131 31 32 31 34 311 

i 11 inter i n t r o mis n e n o n o b o c of op out 

3121 431 4331 421 412 413 121 413 12 3212 321 

over poly post per pre p r e t e r pro re semi sub 

312 311 -3 1421 312 31 12413 21 2121 

sue s u f super s y m s y n trans u n under 

Other Preiixes : — arabi amphi ana ante . anti apo arch bio cata dia dys epi 
equi fore homo hetero ig intra juxta meta mal micro mon mult neo para peri 
retro sine subter sug sur sus. 









(40.) AFFIXES. El 


iiploy no 


capitals. 






4 13 2 


4 2 1 


4 12 


4 3 


4 12 


41 


411 411 132 


23 2 


able 


acy 


age 


al 


a n c e 


a r 


a r y ant b 1 e 


c 1 e 


2 13 2 


2 


23 


2 11 


2 12 


231 113 11 


13 3 


12 4 2 


c u 1 e 


ed 


el 


e n t 


e n c e 


est f 


ul fy 


gross 


head 


13 2 


21 3 


2 22 


212 


21 1 


23 1 


23 1 


2 31 2 3 1 


23 2 


hood 


ibl 


6 ice 


i n € 


; ing 


i n 


i r 


i s t i s h 


i s k 


23 1 


21 1 


212 


32 3 


32 2 


3 11 


22 11 


2 G S 


12 3 


ism 


ity 


i V e 


less 


like 


iogy 


m e n t 


m n y 


n 6 s s 


3 1 


1 1 


3 124 


1231 


112 


1 1 


3 4 13 


3 4 1 


3 23 3 


o r 


ry 


ship 


t i n 


t u d e 


ty 


w a r d 


way 


wise 


Other Affixes :— ane 


aceous 


ade ancy 


ard ate 


dom ern 


ese esque etb 


I ia ile 


ide ite 


ize kind ledge 


lite ly 


ode oid 


sion ster 


stress teen ure. 





— Neither will the Affixes be figured when compounded. But it must be remem- 
bered that the last letter of the Prefix, or the first of the Affix, is likely to be influenced 
by the fingering of the adjacent letter. 



LESSON VIII. 

(41.) LESS REGULAR FINGER PROGRESSIONS. 

Before proceeding to miscellaneous words and general writing, a class of words is 
presented below which are less easy to execute. They are, for the most part, instances 
of the occurrence of consecutive letters fingered the same, but the gliding movement 
from one to the other requires more nicety of calculation (particularly by Touch) than 
the ordinary progression from key to key. 



PEACriCAL TYPEWRITING. 17 

It has been said that acconliiig to the all-finger method all words can lie written 
with equal facility. This is true if the letters scatter over the luanual, but words 
■wherein the letters are bunched are a trifle more difficult to write, and those which 
immediately follow deserve special pi'actice. 



12 3 2 1 2 




4321 


12 B 22 43 


3 2 4 3 13 


13 3 




Reserve 




Pliny 


Technical 


Zealous 


G r e w 




4 113 




4 12 1 


3 2 11 


1 2 4 1 


4 13 


2 1 


a z u r e 




affect 


looking 


n y m p h 


a n s w 


e r 


4 1 4 122 




1 12 2 


3 3 13 


12 12 2 1 2 


3 4 4 




a 4 u a t i c 




h y 1) r i d 


wedge 


m i n i m u ni 


s w a p 




2 3 1343 


I 


2 3 


2 13 


12 4 1 


4 2 12 


21 2 


m n p o 1 


y 


kill 


kind 


h u m a 11 


p e r c e 


i V 6 



Trader aqueous dear great whole exploit Aztec retire sway excerjit eject 
alert tether Xyanza biter craze subject molest omniscient junk exact minimize 
hump umbrageous exegetic folks destniy ecstasy folio sweet police hominy 
numb iminu_)eded sword humbly execute recondite jump imitate yolk eclogue 
recoi'd hypnotize polo oligarchy hymnology loiter 

On the other hand, when Touch writing is not the particular aim, and a more legato 
style is preferred, a fasliion of writing awkward combinations, as indicated below, may 
be adopted : 

23 34 21 21 2 3 1212 3 2 
SW AQ HY NY OL DECE LO 

These letter sequences are pairs fingered the same on the diagram, Init the privilege 
of using the next best finger is granted any writer. With a good sense of hand and 
finger position a lapse like this upon rare occasion need not be condemned, though if the 
IXOORRECT (or exceptional) fingering precedes the correct, the caution is — be careful. 

(42.) SENTENCES. 

The polo pony jumped nimbly over the hedge. The whole police reserve was forced 
to retire. The sacred lotus grows on the African Xyanza. They perceived that the sub- 
ject was hypnotized, not killed. Hominy is regarded a sweet cereal. The oligarchy holds 
sway over humble humanity. Umbrageous shade concealed the aquatic nymphs. The 



18 PRACTICAL TYPEWBITIXG. 

trader witnessed gi-eat exploits in Aztec warfare. Dear Oliver, I liumbly record your 
exact answer. Why imitate that recondite eclogue? It was biter cold in December. 
The police eject those who loiter among the flowers. The crazy zealot made excerpts 
from the hymnology of his creed. Pliny was able to hold sway with the sword, though 
his force was sadly decimated. The hybrid grew in aqueous-looking soil. No decent 
or discernmg student will practice deceit. 



LESSON IX. 

(43.) THE NUMERALS. 



The numerals occupy the upper bank of keys, and are fingered with less regard for 
method, though it is expected that all the fingers shall be employed, and hand position 
maintained. 

(44.) Lower case 1 is the proper character for figure one. Never use the letter I for 
a figure, except in Roman notation like II, IV, VTI, XLI. 

(45.) The capital stands for the cipher upon most machines. 

(46.) Fractions are represented by use of the / (shilling mark) when the machine has 
no fractional type like i, \. A hyphen is sometimes preferred, as 3-4, 5-S, 11-12. 

(47.) Point off large sums into groups of three figures each by the comma, as 
937, 480, 2 J 8, YlO. Employ the period for the decimal point, as .07. Strike the period 
very lightly at all times, on account of its relatively small face. The marks of punctua- 
tion located among the letters have systematic finger attack, but those in the upper bank 
are fingered less regularly. 

(48.) To lift a letter or figure a trifle above the line, push back the front carriage- 
rod the least bit with the left hand, and hold firmly in the unnatural position while 
striking the key. In this way may be produced such effects as i, 6',- 3'*, 4"', 12'", 417% 
90°, H'SO*, M', V" Winkle. This can also be made a makeshift to supply omissions when 
scant space is granted ; as, Thes° men, or Th^se men. 

(49.) In tabular work it is wise to begin the columns of figures on multiples of some 
number decided upon, as 5, 10, 15, or 3, 6, 9, 12, etc. This obviates much caj'riage- 
hfting, and assists the memory in placing ditto-marks, if any are needed. 

When planning tabulation, write the longest line first, or estimate from it. It is 
sometimes of advantage to insert a title after the column it is to head has been arranged. 
To accomplish this, the platen must be reversed with nice calculation. (See Par. 3.) 



PRACTICAL TYFEWRITING. 



19 



For examples of tabular writing, see pages 63, (U and C>."), and other specimens of 
the fac-simile. The beginner should practice the simple tabular forms in order to acquire 
a familiarity with the range of the scale and its bearing upon such work ; also experi- 
ment with head lines, titles, etc. (see Par. 89) ia order to attain skill in arrangement, 
and a quick perception of the relations of space and text which should characterize 
the page. 

(50.) Write each of the following examples several times. Remember the scale 
number where a word or figure group to be underscored begins, adjust the carriage- 
pointer to that mark Avithout turning the platen, and make the underscore by shifting 
to upper-case and striking the middle key of the upper bank. Also Avatch the scale 
carefully when Av^riting processions of figures, in order that the units may fall under 
units, tens under tens, etc. 



(a) 



{h) 



•1 ) 8 8 , S 8 8 
2 ,ii , 2 2 2 



12 3,456 

9 8 7 , f, .5 4 



(c) 



8 9 
■J 1 



1,111,111,110 



18)58,925(3,273 "/.s 

-t 9 
36 
13 2 
1 ii 6 

6 5 
5J 
1 1 



{d) $50,000, 3i, 5i, £7. (The L crossed by the hyphen stands for =£,) M crossed 
by three hyphens = l.uOO ; a crossed by shilling-mark = at (see Par. 125) ; c crossed by 
shilling-mark = ctnt. 



(e) 



Quantity. 




Price. 


Amount. 


Discount. 


10 M lbs. 


a 


5c 


§500 


Z-i 


8 '•• " 


a 


7c 


560 


1% 


12 " " 


a 


IrC 


480 


4-; 


30,000 lbs. 






81,540 





(/) 



Year. 



1852 
1862 

1872 
1882 



Rea^enue. 



£27,158 

98,086 

180,498 

496,783 



EXPENDITUKE. 



£24,876 

83,886 

132,978 

489,113 



20 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITIXG. 



(9) 
Hour Angle 
Apparent Time 
Equation 
Mean Time . 
Longitude 

Greenwich Mean Time 
Chronometer No. 1 . 
Chronometer fast 





Morn 


ING. 




Afternoon. 


'2-' 


0"' 


OS 


ih 


59'" 38.88 


. 10 












— 


2 


44 


—0 


2 47.4 


10 


57 


16 


1 


56 51.4 


— 


53 


31.3 





53 31.3 


9 


3 


44.7 


1 


3 20.1 


9 


43 


15.5 


1 


42 51.2 



39 30. S 



39 



31.1 



LESSON X. 

(51.) COMMERCIAL TERMS. 

The fingering of the prefixes and afiixes has already been given, and will not be 
repeated- in this exercise. Write each word many times, until every word can be 
executed without the least hesitation. The same woi'd should always be fingered in the 
same way. 



3 14 2 12 
Over charge 

2 11 
De murr age 

2 12 13 

S t e r 1 i n g 

23132 



123 22122 12 

Com mis s i o n Dividend 



2 4 14 
Equa tion 

412 1 

Prim age 

2 14 1 



En dorse ment Draft 



123 
pro miss ory 

12 11 
de bent ure 

123 34 2 

bill'lad ing 

4 1 2 4 3 

semi-annual 

32 3 

as sess ment 

4 121224 

princip al 



23211 
dis count 

23 14 31 

coupon 

121 
in t e r est 

4 12 12 12 

p r e m i u m 

132 2 
in voice 

4 1221 
audit e d 



2 14 112 

Ex change 

14 3 

B a 1 a n c e 

2 3 .1 1 3 2 
Re course 

2 1421 14 



1 2 

An n u i t y 

2 12 21 
Credit 

33211 
Ac count 

2 11 

C u r r e n t 

12312 1 



chart er-party re gister ed 



143 12 2 
ad valorem 

2 11 
per cent age 

113 2 2 1 
broker age 

13 4 1 2 12 
to-arrive 

221 
re ceiv able 



2 11 
in debt ed ness 

1312 
ne goti able 

34 12 1 

col later al 

3 2212 13 
under writers 

32 11 
con sign ment 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 21 

Other Commercial Terms : inventory salvage merchandise manifest assets 
voucher usury bond trustee cargo transit check average tonnage consign tariff 
customs tare debit surety drawer storage duty staples entry returns export 
rebate factor protest failure policy market advices security capital telegram cash- 
book Avharfage transfer currency traffic deficit suspense dispatch, sundries, quota- 
tion endorse solvency freight shipment finance importation schedule revenue 
maturity renewal acceptance clearance assignment attachment dissolution dupli- 
cate foreclosure reference guarantee investment liquidation remittance resources 
secretary signature warehouse account- sales 

(52.) SENTENCES. 

Let us see if the broker will know the endorsement. How long before the interest 
on the premium-note will be due ? You Avill not get half the commission you deserve. It 
is a good business policy to make an inventory annually. After you examine the 
collateral, advise lue at once. We are unwilling to discount the draft. Keference was 
had to the bill-lading of the merchandise. A balance appeared when the account-current 
was audited. The coupons of the debenture bonds are negotiable if registered. The 
principal consignment was sold to-arrive for a small percentage over the^?'0 raia figures. 
The semi-annual assessment of the underwriters did not put to the credit of the policy 
either a dividend or reversionary additions. Charter-party, salvage, demurrage and 
manifest, are terms pertaining to the merchant marine. The indebtedness was receiv- 
able in sterling exchange. The item of primage upon the invoice was an overcharge. 
The manufacturer directed his stenographer to telegraph the secretary of the company 
to negotiate for a stock of supplies ; but learning that the price of exchange had 
advanced, that sales of merchandise were slow, and an average consumption could not 
be guaranteed, he refused to affix his signature to the despatch. The consignee was a 
good customer, but declared he could not realize a satisfactory profit unless quotations 
were given by telegraph. 



22 PRACTICAL TYI'EVVr.iriNG. 

LESSON XL 

(53.) MISCELLANEOUS AVORDS. 

221 3314-11 121 4E4 211 

Subject Accompany Convention Acquaintance 

1413 2411 2 12214 232 

Advance Magnitude Affirmative Recollection 

312 1 31221 24121 123212 

OminouB Ordinary Equitable Intelligible 

2413 143 12 1413243 121 4332 

Marshall Financial Fortunate Proposition 

2321323 1321213 34214 12431221. 

council misfortune operation extraordinary 

12344121 2223141312 31211 414 3212 24 

jeopardy memorandum con stitu tion qualifications 

2 133 13121 321 2 24 

know ledge gener al ly pro seen tion anti cip ate 

12 3131 21321 214321 41214 

d i f f i c u 1 1 u n i f o r m 1 y u n import ant ex a m i n a t i o n 

214212 3 2 14 212 222 

discharge obligation introduce prediction 

232 14113 1334 2312 

election arrangement developed accordingly 

Sincerely independent citizens patient service opulent apprehension property 

valiant privilege Colorado mollify excellency surrender beginning refreshing 
northwestern acknowledge controversy testimony. 



(54.) SENTENCES. 

The qualifications of the marshal led to his election by the council. The magnitude 
of the financial operations in this country is extraordinary. To the best of my recollec- 
tion I made his acquaintance at the convention. My knowledge of the ^arrangement put 
the prosecution in jeopardy. It was fortunate to know the subject jin adyance. It 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITIXG. 23 

-would be difficult to introduce a more equitable arrangement. Unimportant memoranda 
accompanied the proposition. The examination developed uniformly affirmative testi- 
mony. The prediction was ominous of misfortune. Generally it would be wise to 
discharge such an obligation. The constitution was intelligible to the ordinary citizen. 
Valiant service will mollify his excellency. We sincerely acknowledge that the exercise 
was refreshing to the patient. The beginning of the controversy excited some appre- 
hension. There are many independent citizens in northwestern Colorado. 

(55.) MISCELLAXEOUS ^VORDS : 

213 121 -4123 123 212 

In dustry Re quis ite Pro fes sion Trans cend ent 

1212 1 13 2 3223 213 121214 

Function Families Discussed Generations 

43243 222 432 2 1224 

Pleasure Decided Proportion Com munication 

322 23211222 3 S2 2 11 3 13 2212 21 

Science Countries Neighbors Individual 

3 2 121 24 3 4B2 22 4 1 1214 

1 i b e r ty calamity meanness admiration 

4142123 13212 3 1442 4412 

practice bounds happiness comparison 

43121 122 3 2 31412 3 221 3 214 

pover ty fideli ty statesmen ob serva tion 

3341211 12412 4123 3212 3 341 

slavery gratitude requisite legislators 

lCil2 3 41 3 221223 1321 41212 

honesty anxieties extorted acquirement 

131122 3133 43321 32 14 

tongue bestowed powerful obligation 

(56.) WRITING EXERCISE. 

After this exercise can be written readily, though perhaps in a manner somewhat 
mechanical, because of earnest striving for the correct fingerings, and all the require- 
ments of graceful procedure — the learner may venture letter writing. Follow the Form 
for Lettin-, par. 63, putting the same minutely into effect by copying the typewritten 



2i PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

model on p. 60. (See also the specimens of letter addresses, p. 68.) Other letters for 
simple copying practice may be found on pp. 05, 96, 119-122. In all such copying culti- 
vate the habit of reading coherent phrases, and writing the same with fluent manipula- 
tion in an uninterrupted movement from the beginning to the end of the phrase, rather 
than with a spasmodic pounding out of single words. If the matter be dictated by 
another, Avhich is an excellent way to promote speed, insist that phrases be read, and 
with as good elocution as may be possible. 

Knowledge in any art or science, being always the fruit of observation, study, or 
practice, gives in proportion to its extent or usefulness, the possessor a just claim 
to respect. We do, indeed, often see all the outward marks of respect bestowed upon 
persons merely because they are rich or powerful ; but these, while they are bestowed 
with pain, are received with pleasure. They drop from the tongue or beam from the 
features, but have no communication from the heart. They are not the voluntary 
offerings of admiration or of gratitude ; but are extorted from the hopes, the fears, the 
anxieties, of poverty, of meanness, or of guilt. Nor is respect due to honesty, fidelity, or 
any such qualities ; because dishonesty and perfidy are crimes. To entitle a man to 
respect, there must be something of his own doing, beyond the bounds of his well-known 

duties and obligations To the functions of statesmen and legislators is due 

the highest resiaect which can be shown by man to anything human ; for not only are 
the industry and talent, requisite in the acquirement of knowledge, still greater and far 
greater here, than in the profession of the law ; but, of the application of this knowl- 
edge, the effects are so transcendent in point of magnitude as to place them beyond all 
the bounds of comparison. Here it is not individual persons with their families, friends 
and neighbors, that are affected ; but whole countries and communities. Here the 
matters to be discussed and decided on are peace and war, and the liberty or slaveiy, 
happiness or misery, of nations. Here a single instance of neglect, a single oversight, a 
single error, may load with calamity millions of men, and entail that calamity on a long 
series of future generations. {Cohhett.) 



LESSON XII. 

(57.) LEGAL. 



33 41212. S 23 32112 211 

accessory premises assignee perjury 

4S421121 1212 121 121231241 

plaintiff de fend ant de murr er ad ministrat or 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 25 

1231 211 121 12 3 121 

felony executor conveyance shei'iff 

4332 2122 12 2321323 22 

deposition evidence counsel decision 

123-14 3 4121234 2 1 32432 3141112 

trespass quitclaim release statute 

14 2 11 4324 2 2 321412 12 3 1 

arraign p 1 e n d i n g mortgage intestate 

?1412 2 2 21 12 3 1 31fl212Sl 

chancery indictment digest superior 

4232 21123 1224121 312421 

appellee duress affidavit abstract 

Other Legal Terms : abej^ance alibi caveat citation client codicil collusion 
contempt jurisdiction indenture legacy ordinance precedent probate rebuttal 
referee argument replevin testator requisition witness lien declaration litiga- 
tion judgment verdict mayhem 

(5S.) ANATOMICAL. 

121 2114 42 132 32 12 2 43 2 313 2112 

vertebra pectoral secretions biceps cellular cuticle 

13434 3 2 23 2 21 123 1 Si514 '2 21 33 2 

protoplasm abdomen intestine ligament pigmentary osseous 

1212 143213 441234 2 31413 414341123 1212 4 

t e g u m e n t v a s c u 1 a r patella corpus c 1 e phalanges tibia 

1113 34 2 241 12121 423 12 3 24 2123 1234 

em b r y o re s p i r a t o r y tuber c 1 e pelvis c a r t i 1 age filament 

113243 242 1 21412 12 141132 4 41411 3 13 13 233 

t li o r a X macerate cranium ganglia p li a r y n x tonsils 

22 2 11412 2 121143 312112 312 414122 411412 212313 

membrane cerebral sternum lymphatic d i a p h r a g m mucous 

Other Anatomical Terms : lamhiae parietal occipital dentition tympanum 
ventricle foramen orifice alimentary dyspepsia humerus capsular auricle 
peduncle flexion sclerotic maxillary gustator}' fibula follicle pulmonary dis- 
section scapula capillary mesentery carotid lingual bronchial clavicle gastric, 
labial epilepsy gangrene myopia eczema fistula catalepsy asthma pleurisy 
quinsy medulla vesicle vivisection 



26 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

LESSON XIII. 

(59.) LETTER WRITING. 

The most widespread use of the writing machine is for correspondence, taken for 
the most part from dictation, either by the agency of shorthand or direct to the type- 
writer.* 

Typewriting has oeen declared as difificult to teach as shorthand, and so it may be 
considered in the sense that complete instruction ' embraces not only a command of the 
mechanical features of the machine, and the technique of its keyboard, but likewise a con- 
stant education in grammar, spelling and punctuation, as well as numberless helps 
toward rhetorical expression. 

As far as the business letter is concerned, the principal subject for attention should 
be the form of arrangement. A typewritten letter should preserve the formalities. 
While a single set way may not please all, yet no Avide range should be given to individual 
preference ; and we suggest a form of letter structure, arranged within the bounds of a 
reasonable propriety, which we are certain will displease but a very few. It is the form 
most in vogue among typewriters. Although circumstances may require a variation 
from this in some minor details, still we would not recommend the business writer to 
venture too much originality, because it is a conspicuous fact that poorly constructed 
business letters have been a sad reproach to typewriting in the past. 

(60.) FORM FOR LETTER IN DETAIL. 

Scale. 
35 . ... Place written from and Date. 

Feed paper for two full spaces. 

. . . . Name of Person or Firm, title, etc. ) ( Usually half space 

5 . . . . Street address or post-office box. v I between lines 

10 ... . City or Town address, and State. ) ( of address. 

Feed paper one full space. 

. . . . The Superscription (" Dear sir "). 

One full space. 

15 ... . Body of Letter ; full space between lines. 

25 ... . The Subscription ("Yours truly ■■'). 

Three full spaces for signature. 

60 ... . Title (Pres., Sec'y ) of signer, if any. 

Full space. 

. . . . P. S. (Postscript) if any, written half -space. 

■ * So many mongrel words, like typist a,nA tijiKwritist, have beea introduced, we propose a fixed designation 
ot— typewriter, to mean the person who writes, uad irriting machine, the device. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 27 

111 the foregoing, dose reference must be had to tlie Scale, and the writer will do 
well to memorize the directions of the Form. Below the same procedure is illustrated 
after the fashion of a real letter : 

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 GO 05 

Minneapolis, Minn., Julv 15, 1M>4. 
Messrs. TUFTS & HALL, 

13 Winnebasset Street, 

Providence, Rhode Island. 

Gentlemen : 

Your esteemed favor of the lOth instant received, and in reply to 
the same Avould say 



P. S.— 

Permit me to add. etc. 



Your truly, 

Secy. 



Every letter should have a date, and the person addressed a title of respect, if he 
has no pi-ofessioual title. For the address as a whole, the rhomboid form makes the 
best appearance. See example ; 



Mr. THEODOEE TORREY. 

No. 15 Algonquin Street, 

Indianapolis, Indiana. \ 



\. 



Pi-esenting the name in capitals, with half-space between the lines, gives a stylish 
effect, but that is not imperative. It is a matter of taste, the same as the setting 
of an advertisement. Taste likewise has to be exei'cised when the name may be long 
and the place short, or vice versa. Oftentimes two lines will look better than three, 
but at all hazards preserve the terraced look, both by a marshaling of material, and 
by clever spacing. 

On the other hand, if the subordinate part of the address be very brief, resort may 
be had to a shape like the following, which is far handsomer than to leave an unsightly 
gap at one side : 



ARTHUR CUMMINGS, 
S a c o . Me. 



When the name of the person or concern is written in capitals, all titles, etc., take 
lower case, except as to their initial letters. Drop full space to the superscription, as 




28 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

the form directs, and begin the body of the letter where the carriage may stop after an 
off-hand hfting of the lever. The pointer will mark about 15 of the scale, but regular 
paragraphs thereafter indent to 5, in imitation of type composition. So much for the 
manner of the letter. The matter now deserves a passing notice. 

Supposing the letter to have been dictated, then it were well for the typewriter to 
peruse his notes, and decide wisely how to arrange the same, before touching finger to 
keyboard. Haphazard action will not do; there is a form for guidance, and good diction 
to be regarded. If a business letter, it must bear a business aspect, and embody com- 
mercial expi'essiois. 

Paragraph occasionally, not only according to the sense, but for an improved appear- 
ance, when the sense will allow, moi'e than demand. It goes without saying that all 
typewriting must be obedient to correct grammar, spelling and punctuation. Write 
dates in figures, and sums of money the same, unless a more formal style is required, 
when letters may be emjaloyed. A short letter should be full space between the lines. 
Make one space after the comma, semicolon and colon. Leave no single-letter prefixes' 
at the end of a line, or single-letter affixes at the beginning of the next line. 

Correct all errors by machine, making as few interpolations by pencil and pen as 
possible. Before removal of a page from the machine read it through carefully, in a. 
search for errors. Many of the petty mishaps of typewriting can be disguised by simply 
reversing the paper, and making ingenious cori:"ections. For instance, a transposition of 
letters calls for erasure, and the insertion of the letters in proper order. An omitted 
letter is easily supplied if space remains ; otherwise it will need to be written a trifle above 
the space it should occupy, shifting the paper a little to do this. Omitted words can be 
written between the lines, and a caret made by lower-case v, after running the paper in 
upside down. When no space is left between words (and this is a common neglect) draw 
a fine line with the pen, to show where the division should be. Mistakes are likely to 
occur, but be vigilant to hide them before the paper leaves the machine. 

Address envelopes according to the form above given for the letter address, but 
make full space between the lines. Eemember that every city address requires a street 
number, and do not annoy the post-office department by unmeaning abbreviations. 

(61.) MODEL LETTER FOR COPYING PRACTICE. 

5 10 15 20 35 30 35 iO 45 50 55 60 65- 

Boston, January 22, 1893. 
Mr. JOHN Q. A. FLETCHER, 

715 Blaekstone Street, 
New York City. 
Dear Sir : 

We notified you some time since that we must re- 
ceive a remittance from you by early mail on your account, which 
is long overdue. 

We sold you the merchandise in good faith, and expected you 
to pay for it as you agreed at time of purchase. In regard to 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 29 

y:ur- claiming a discount, although we had no reason to suppose 
tnat anything of the kind was promised you, still, rather than 
have any trouble about the sale, we allowed your claim, expect- 
ing that your account would then be settled at once; and we now 
notify you, that as we have not heard from any of our numerous 
demands for settlement, we shall put the case into the hands of 
our attorney for adjustment. 

If the goods were not satisfactory, you should have advised 
us, and we would have been pleased to make them good; but you 
made no claim of the kind until long after your account was due, 
and when we sent a man to examine the goods he found that they 
had been sold, and you had received the money for them. We are 
disposed to be lenient with you, but there is a point beyond 
which forbearance ceases to be a virtue. 

Trusting that we shall receive a cheek from you by next 
mail, we are 

Yours truly, 



LESSON XIV. 
(62.) "chain" sentences for touch practice. 

The fact that in the following sentences the last letter of a word is the first letter of 
the word following, gives significance to the term " chain '" as above used. The object 
is to provide an easy passage from one word to another. 

After considerable familiarity with the Avriting machine, ordinary manipulation is 
performed almost intuitively. The writer dashes into a word ; it is finished before he is 
aware, and by a method he can hardl}^ analyze. This seems a strange statement, but 
the same is true of much mental and manual behavior. The more we practice a given 
action, the more it is done without apparent volition. 

Touch Writing demands entire familiarity with the machine, and the ability to type- 
write with accuracy. Begin writing these sentences slowlj-, locating the letters accord- 
ing to the instructions of Lesson V. Develop confidence next after facility of writing, 
for confidence stands for a great deal in Touch Writing. To speak heroically, we 
would say, — Do not hesitate to venture into the battle of words, and to strike effective 
blows right and left with decisive vigor ! 

Our requirements shall lead direct Citizens should desire enforcement 

toward definite education. touching general laws. 

Have every young gallant try your Develop proficient typewriting, 

recipe. Attorney's submitted decisions suffi- 

When next their right to ownership cient to oust them, 

prevails. Freedom may yield direct to opposition. 



30 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



Curious symptoms showed Dr. Renfrew 
what to prescribe. 

Data about taxation never read de- 
sirably. 

Knowledge every year records some 
error repaired. 

Salvation never realized does satisfy 
young girls. 

Active, enduring, generous, sympathetic 
citizenship. 

Statistics seem more entertaining given 
next to other reading. 

Bad decisions seem most technical. 

Possibly 3^ou ought to operate even 
nearer rural localities. 

The eminent traits Seward displays 
silence envy. 

Evidence even nugatorj"- yields some 
effective elements. 

This superintendent tends several 
looms. 



Cheap preparations seldom make even 
nerve elixirs salutary. 

Confined discoverers sorrow when new 
worlds stand decoying. 

Young gentlemen need definite encour- 
agement. 

RoUo ovei'heard Delia accept the en- 
gagement. 

Elastic cords stretched down near 
Richard's seat. 

Philharmonic concert this seasoir 
nightly. 

His strength has suffered desperate 
encounters. 

Fred Dow was sad despite eai-nest 
tem])erance effort. 

Wliat Tancred denies Sulla affirms. 

Professor Rolfe exercises some eru- 
dition. 

Surely your reason need dishearten no 
one. 

Correct typewriting gives satisfaction. 



(63.) TOUCH PRACTICE. 

In this testimony the easy location of Q. and A. assists in getting bearings. This and 
the other exercises pi-escribed for Touch Practice can serve for general discipline if 
exceedingly expert writing is not the aim. 



CROSS-EXAMINATION OF MRS. D. 

Q. Where do you live ? 
A. In West Roxbury. 
Q. How long have you lived there ? 
A. Twenty-four years. 
Q. When did you go to live at Mr. 
Randall's ? 

A. I lived there from November, 1888. 
Q. You remained there how long ? 
A. Until August 1, 18Sy. 



Q. Did you stay until they sold out ? 
A. I did. 

Q. Did you think of buying the furni 
ture ? 

A. Yes, sir. 

Q. You wanted it ? 

A. Yes, sir ; I 

Q. You did not get it ? 
A. Xo ; but I 



PRACTICAL TYFEWRiriXG. 



31 



Q. But you (lid not get it I answer my 
question. 

A. IS;o, sir ; and (in an undertone) I'ni 
glad I didn't. 

Q. Were you a member at the time of 
the Chestnut Square church '; 

A. When I left Mr. EandaU's I was. 

Q. Did you attend prettj- regularly ? 

A. I did. 

Q. How many times do you think you 
were there ? 

A. I could not tell you. 

Q. During the summer of 18SS how 
much were you in attendance ? 

A. A great deal. 



Q. Not regularly ] 

A. I was a regular attendant. 

Q. Every Sunday I 

A. Most every Sunday. 

Q. Were you not very irregular ? 

A. No, sir, I was not. 

Q. Whose Sunday School class were 
you in ; 

A. Mr. Frothingham's. 

Q. Do you know if a record of the at- 
tendance was kept t 

A. I do not, sir. 



(04.) LINES TO THE LONGFELLOW STATUE, BY GEORGE E. B. JACKSON. 

The object of this exercise is to lead the writer to acquire facility in lifting the right 
hand to turn the paper for a new line, and return to the keys without losing command 
of them. 



This sculptured form, 
'Tis but the semblance. 

And still, "tis he ! 
Amid the busy throng 

Calmly he sits ; 
Of all that pass along, 

Heedless is he ! 
His gaze is fixed toward home. 

He loved it well. 
And yet he seeth naught ! 

His ears attent 
To catch the rustling leaves 

Of Deering's woods. 
But still he heareth not ! 

Well hath the sculptor wrought. 
Making the seeming — real, 

The fiction — fact. 
And, in enduring bronze. 

His very form hath caught ! 



We, living, thee salute. 

Sweetest of bards ! 
Thy voice hath ceased to be, 

Yet, through the world, 
Excelsior's flag unfurled. 

Bears, in its strange device. 
Thy name and fame ! 

Thy Psalm of Life still lives. 
And to the weary gives 

Its heaven-taught blessed words. 
In pure Evangeline, 

Th' unsullied life is thine ; 
While from the Wayside Inn, 

And Village Blacksmith's din, 
Thy fancy weaves such forms 

Of beauty and of grace. 
That but to speak thy name 

Sets all our hearts aflame, 
And chief of bards we place 

Our Longfellow ! 



32 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

G-ENEEAL INSTRUCTIONS. 

(65. ) The query is often made — Why are the letters of the key-banks arranged so iiTeg- 
tilarly ? Aside from some mechanical difficulties which have to be overcome, the follow- 
ing exhibit of the comparative frequency of letters in writing will explain the matter 
somewhat : — 



E, 


1,000 


A, 


490 


L, 


270 


D, 185 


, w, 


130 


V, 


60 




T, 


665 


0, 


480 


c, 


260 


M, 140 


Y, 


100 


K, 


20 


Z, (] 


N, 


505 


I, 


475 


R, 


260 


F, 130 


G, 


85 


Q, 


8 


X, 5 


s, 


495 


H, 


355 


u, 


185 


P, 130 


B, 


60 


J, 


7 





(66.) Scratching, erasing, x-ing, and otherwise correcting words looks badty ; ,?ome 
employers will not accept such work. It can be avoided in a great measure if habits of 
accuracy be cultivated from tlie very beginning. 

(67.) Typewriting from dictation is exceedingly pretty work, and considerable sjjeed 
can be attained if reader and writer are in harmony. Court reporters often dictate to 
more than one operator alternately, keeping two writing contimiously, which is possible 
after some practice. By so doing, the dispatch of matter is greatly facilitated. 

(68.) When checking off (rectifying) typewriting by reading back to another, the 
operation is hastened a little by calling the marks of punctuation, — "Com" "Sem_"; 
and when a period occurs say "New sentence,'' or " PaT-agraph," as the case may be. 
Also say "' Quote " before and after a quotation. 

(69.) Literary work for publication makes a much better impression upon the 
" reader," if neatly typewritten* ; indeed, some one has said that the compositor adds to 
his prayers a sentiment commendatory of the typewriter. 

(70. ) There has been some uncertainty regarding the permanency of typewriting. 
We have seen legible print twelve years old, from ribbons when less was known about 
preparing the ink ; but the legibility of writing of that age is variable. Non-copying 
inks that are really pure carbon are practically indestructible, but some of the colors 
do not endure. The so-called " Indelible Copying " is said to be the most durable. 

(71.) A contributor to the Writer suggests, in substance, the following, to utilize the 
ribbon and prevent it from curling : 

Cut slots, about seven inches apart, in a strip of oil-board two inches wide, also a 
narrow hole half way between these for the type to strike through. Run the ribbon 

*" Manuprint ' is a recently coined word for such MS. 



FB.ACTICAL TYPEWRITIKG. 33 

through the openings, bend the oil-board under the frame of the machine at each end, 
and that's all there is to it. 

(72.) A few sheets of MSS. f or pubhcation need not be fastened together, altliough 
they should be plainly numbered in the upper left-hand corner, with the name of the 
• writer on the first page. Separate chapters may be fastened together— in such a way as 
not to inconvenience the reader. (The Wriit^r.) 

(Ta.) In MSS. for the printer it is best to leave a margin of one inch at the top of 
each sheet, and of half an inch at the bottom. If plenty of space is left between the 
hues, there is no need of wide mai-gins at the sides. (The WrUer.) 

(74.) The following recipe for rib-boii ink has been tried and found satisfactory: 

(\ Oz. Aniline Dye (of color desired). 
Non-copymg,- -[ ^ :; A.l»l>ol. 

14 " Fluid Gtycerine. 

If a COPYING INK is desired, use no water, and make it 6 oz. of Glycerine instead. 

This mixture should be applied to the ribbon evenly, of course, and the difficulty of 
this operation makes it preferable to buy from the regular dealer, unless one has a great 
many ribbons to re-ink. 

(75.) Typewriting for photographic reproduction should be Avritten in I'ed, very 
dark blue or green colored ribbon, green being preferred. ]\Iake interlineation in India 
Ink. These colors \atI1 photograph readily, and if the photo-gelatine process is employed 
the result AviU be satisfactoiy. There would seem to be an interesting future with re- 
gard to printing from such reproduction. 

(76.) Typefounders are now casting imitation typewriter type that does not copy 
the faults of worn-out machines, and the printer can furnish a very good facsimile nf 
typewriting. 

(77.) Morgan's " Sapolio " is the best cleanser we have found to remove from the 
hands stains caused by the typewriter ribbon. 



PARTICULAR mSTRUCTION. 

(78. ) It is not adAasable to cover the roller of the machine with thick paper, or use a 
backing-sheet. Formerly the rollers were oftener made of soft rubber, which became 



34 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

badly indented after Init little use ; no^v the hai'd roller is more common, and just as good 
results can be obtained without a backing-sheet. In fact, the typewriter is adjusted 
properly when it leaves the manufacturei', and any addition to the circumference of the 
roller increases its diameter distance, and tends to throw the writing out of alignment. 

(79.) When feeding a number of sheets, with carbon paper between for multiplying 
copies, the package should be allowed to enter between the rolls almost of itself, so as to 
avoid wrinkling the carbon. 8uch work should not be scratched, as any outside mark 
of erasure will coniimmicate to every slieet, and below the outside copy the writing will 
be marred. It is Ijetter to x or / an error, and pass on. 

(80.) When many duplicates are required, and the ribbon copy is not needed, the 
ribbon reverser hook at the left can be placed in the middle slot, and the ribbon itself 
moved out of the way. A number of faint impressions can be made witli the period, to 
produce a dotted line, with the hook as above, and the ribbon in place. 

(81.) Reduplication of typewritten text can also be made by an adaptation of the 
Cyclostyle process, its application to the type-vn:iter being as follows : A backing of silk 
is applied to a sheet of especially prepared paraffine paper, upon which the impression of 
the types makes a stencil. This stencil is transferred to the Cyclostyle printing frame, 
and many copies of a more or less excellent reproduction of typewriting can be executed 
from it. If the successive steps of the process are well performed, the result will be sat- 
isfactory ; but it takes some experience to prepare a cleai'ly defined stencil, and to print 
from the same with invariable success. 

(82.) Many duplicates can also be made by use of the Hectograph ribbon, which 
writes copy that can be multiplied upon the gelatine (Hectograph) pad. The so-called 
lithograph ribbon also produces copy that can be transferred to stone, from which many 
reproductions may be printed. 

(S3. ) Some operators have two ribbons on the reels at the same time, copying and 
non-copying ; and for the execution of fancy writing a variety of colored ribbons of short 
lengths may be pinned together, and used as occasion may require. 

(84. ) When directing envelopes, or writing the superscription of a letter, print the 
name or names in capitals (which is easy to do if one has a knee-shift), and the remain- 
der of the address in lower case, — city or town, county and state, in the order named. 
If there be street number or postoffice box, it follows the name, in lower-case, next 
below. 



PRAC TFCAL TVPEWFdrTXd. 



35 



(85. ) To direct envelopes nipidly, liave the Envelope-holder, and insert more than one 
between the rolls at once ; at the same time giving the roller lever a certain number of 
lifts as each envelope is inserted, so as to bring the fu'st one to the proper line for print- 
ing— tliis to be decided by the size of the envelope and tlie length of the address. When 
one is written and removed insert another, give the I'oUer the requisite number of tiu-ns, 
and the envelope next to be written upon will come round to the proper place. 

(SO.) When writing half space between the lilies it adds to the appearance of the 
page, and to legibility, if full space lie made between paragraphs. 

(87.) AVrite the body of telegrams, cablegi'ams ami the hke, in capitals. It adds to 
the general effect of legal documents to write atteslutioii clauses, affidavits, acknowl- 
edgments, citations of law, etc., half s])ace. 

(88.) After a ribbon has become somewhat worn and curled, it can be tnrned to 
advantage. To economize the ribbon, adjust so that the type will siiike along the edge 
nearest the operator ; and Avhen this part is exhausted, move the ribbon over so as to 
utilize the unused portion. 

(89. ) To write a title or sentence equally distant from the margins, count the letters 
(and spaces) in the phrase, subtract this sum from the amount total of the machine scale, 
and divide by two. The result will be the figure on the front scale at which the writing 
should begin. 

EXPEDIENTS AND DIRECTIONS. 

(90.) The owner or operator of a typewriter should possess some mechanical inge- 
nuity to make his machine work always at its best. We are ungallant enough to record 
the fact that lady operators rarely understand how to take care of the machine. We add, 
however, that this is not a fault, but due to the misfortune thai, their training does not 
lead in that dii-ection. But the typewriter is not coni]ilicated, and. it is of advantage to 
the operator to have a full knowledge of its pecuharities ; he should know his own 
machine at least, learn to adjust it to his own touch, watch and tend it carefully, and so 
make it more of an assistant to him than it can be to any other person. 

(91.) For persons who prefer a knee-shift at the right (like an organ swell) we 
suggest the following, which we have used many years with entire satisfaction : Buy at 
any hardware shop a 0-inch half-strap hinge and a 11-iiich screw-pulley. Insert the 
pulley at the left of the table drawer, and the hinge at the right so as to clear the iron 



36 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITiyXi. 

legs of the table. Bore an inch hole through table and base-board, attach a strong cord to 
the shift-key bar where the pull comes, pass it through the auger holes, over the pulley 
and to the right, attaching to the pendent hinge. Screw a piece of wood to the hinge 
for a knee brace, and the result is a cheap and effective capital-shift ai-rangement that 
works easily, surely, and does not wrench the machine. 

(92.) An old machine will write out of alignment because of wear, apart from that 
of the type meclianism ; but single types -\vill sometimes get out of line in a compara- 
tively new machine. To I'emedy the fault prociire a pair of aligning pliers, and proceed 
as follows : After establishing a standard, as, for instance, n, o and i, nialve i strike 
through the exact center of o, compare the letters that have lines in coiumon, 
(h and n, O and C, o e c b d q p, i 1 1 j f , etc., are examples,) and those of a series should 
coincide, or be made to, in the greater i:)art of the outline. With a cori-ect basis estab- 
lished, it is not very difficult to study out the alignment problem, though it is best to ex- 
periment on an old machine. To align rapidly and well requires considerable experience, 
and it is, of course, better to employ an expert. 

(93.) It will be found, when practicing by touch, that the key in the upper right- 
hand corner, marked "lower case," is often in the way. We have never discovered 
any particular use for this key, and of late have removed it, because of an occasional 
collision with the little finger. 

(94.) JSfever allows a typewriter to squeak for want of oil ; neither pour on oil 
when it is unnecessary. It is not difficult to find where oil is needed, though now and 
then there Avill be an elusive squeak, — possibl)^ that of a key-bar-spring under the back 
part. Tip up the machine and run the nose of the oil-can down all the springs ; or find 
the noisy one, and lubricate that. Another exasperating one to find is that of the front 
caniage-rod which the shift-key governs. Sometimes, too, the top of the cog arm (si^ac- 
ing rack) at the back will rub against its gviard, and cause a squeak. 

(95.) The mechanism that governs the ribbon movement should be kept clean and 
well oiled. This works by indirect influence of the carriage tension spring, and it is 
essential that it should act freely so as not to impair the carriage motion. 

(9(1.) Benzine is handy to have, not only to clean the types but to thin the oil in 
the lubricated parts. It is wise to apply benzine once to oil twice. 

(97.) The types may be cleaned just as they lie in the basket ; for this purpose use 
a stiff hand-brush of good size. When the ribbon is new, ifeCcOoBbDd89G, etc., 
become filled, lift the types and remove the dye (dirtj with a pin, or by tapping the brush 
against them vigorously. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITIXG. 37 

{\)^.) Care shcailii ije exertised to have the carriai^-e and fnigor-action tensions 
reciprocal. If the carri.ige-spring pull« too hard, the cogs will not let go readih" ; if the 
dog-spring is too stiff, the cogs are held unduly and the carriage obstructed. The car- 
riage spring should be regulated to the least possible power to pull the carriage along as 
rapidly ac each key is depressed, and tlie key and space-bar tension adjusted to " second 
the motion." 

(99.) When many sheets are ran into the ma-chine, with carbon paper between 
for reduplication, tlie ahgnment of the printing can be maintained by stretching a wide 
rubber band upon the track of the front carriage wheel ; the added thickness of paper 
adds to the diameter of the roller, which alters the relation of the type-bars to the same, 
and makes it necessary io lift the carriage a trifle. 

(100. ) Eublier l)ands may also be stretched across tlie top of the type-basket to keep 
the riblion from curling. Have a care to adjust the band so not to cause friction with 
the ribbon moA^ement. 

(101. ) To renew the rubber feed-bands, loosen the screws holding the axle of the 
front band- wheels, also the screw of the left scale-arm support ; then slip off the bands 
through the openings made. Be careful when retux'iiing the axle-rod to set the screws 
tightly, l)ut not spread the carriage frame to the extent of impeding its movement. 

(102. ) It is not generally known that a letter-key and the ca})ital-shift can be struck 
at one and the same time to produce a capital. Try it, and save time ! 

(103.) The manifolding power of a writing machine is of prime importance." Lit- 
erary workers should always prepare MSS. for publication in du])licate ; then if the 
original be lost in transit, or if it be rejected by the publisher and not returned to the 
author, the latter will have a copy at hand. 

History has furnished many instances of the destruction in a moment of the labor of 
years. We have an acquaintance, an astronomer, who lost his whole computation of a 
Transit of Venus by fire, and was obliged to work many months to calculate another. 
The effects of the Chicago and Boston fires have lasted long after, because valuable 
records and papers were burned, and no duplicates exist anywhere. 

(101.) In order to make the underscore double, after striking it as usual, draw the 
shift-rod (front) a little toward the operator, and while holding it firmly— iiroceed as 
before. 

(105.) In taking letter- press copies of typewriting the tissue sheet should be 
moistened more tha]i for ink writing. Many press copies can be taken from the same 
writing, if the ink be plentiful and the tissue thoroughly wetted. Such copies are con- 
venient w^hen the making in duphcate of a long letter has been overlooked. 

* Some offlce.s file away carbon duplicates of letters instead of taking- press copies. 



3g PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(106. ) New attachments for the typewriter are constantly appearing ; those of recent 
oriQ;in are,— the thumb-screws for regulating finger and dog tensions ; the improved dog 
that iiJlows the carriage to be pushed back without raking tlio teeth of the spacing- 
rack; the arrangement at tlie left for lifting the spacing-rack, and allowing th(.^ carriage 
to be set at any point on the scale— (being in addition to the right-hand thumb-piece for 
the same purpose) : and the various knee-shifts. 

We predict the invention at a not distant day of a device to return the carriage to 
point of beginning, turning at the same time the roller for a new line. All such im- 
provements, if of a pra.ctical character, tend to equip the machine for exceedingly fast 
work — and perhaps for verbatim reporting, if of a not too exacting kind. 

ADDITIONAL KEMABKS. 

(107.) A very fair estimate of the number of "words in a page of manuprint can lio 
made by reckoning twelve (13j words to the line, and multiplying by the number of 
lines. 

(IDS.) Degrees, minutes and seconds are represented by the lifted o, as ^, ' and ". 
In real estate abstracts, architectural specifications, etc., feet and inches are ofteu 
made — ' and " . 

(109.) In a description of Eeal Estate the language ; ", 

is about as follows : N. E. 1-i of the S. W. 1-i of Sec- \ '■ \ 

tion 3, Township (Tp) 10, North Eange, etc. A descrip- • ; • 

five outline in such connection can be written like : ■. : 

this :— : • : 



(110.) Printers prefer to haveMSS. Commercial Note (5 3-4x8 1-3), though this size 
is not so convenient for the typewa-iter as Letter-size. The legibility of the " copy," 
however, ought to compensate the compositor for the trifling increase in the dimensions 
of the page. 

(111.) When waiting correspondence the operator should paragraijh as the sense 
demands. AVe have in mind letters received from legal and other correspon.dents, Avhicli 
exhibit no paragraphing at all, and the effect w^as far from agreeable. 

(112.) Many familiar words like could, would, should, are capable of abbreviation,, 
and can be shortened when occurring at the end of the line, and there remains no space 
for ];)roper use of the hyphen. In purely informal correspondence it is not uncom- 
mon nor objectionable to see wd, cd, slid, yr, etc. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITIXG. 39 

(113. ) When ■writing many circular-lotters of the same tenor, it is often the custom 
to prepare one for the copy-book ; then write a hst of the names written to, for copying 
on the next page of the letter-book, witli this heading, — '' Circular as per foregoing page 
sent (date) to the following : — " 

(11-t. ) In telegrams and cablegrams v\-rite all numbers in letters, and never divide a 
w-ord at the end of a line ; rather pass to the line next below. 

(115. ) The typewriter amanuensis should be, to all outward appearance, as sense- 
less as the machine when private matters are being discussed :, and wholly uncom- 
mimicative when his or her employer's business may be alluded to outside Of the 
office. 

(116.) Mr. J. S. Campbell, of Cincijinati, has devised a scheme of typewriter short- 
hand which is ingenious, and ought to be eft'ective. 

(117.) The motive power of the hand sometimes perverts its action, and in the spell- 
ing of woi'ds the letters often become transposed. This is 'perhaps a result of nervous- 
ness, or may be taken as an indication of overwork. The best of writers occasionally 
liave days when the spelling of the comnaonest words is a little tangled. 

(118.) The acute accent can be represented by holding the space-bar down wliile strik- 
ing the apostrophe and the letter to be accented, as e. The cedilla is made by holding the 
space-bar in the same manner while striking the letter and the comma, as ^•. 

(119.) A perfectly straight line can be written horizontally across the paper by 
shifting to upper-case, setting it firmly, depressing the underscore key, or hyphen, and 
drawing the carriage forth and back once or twice without revolving the roller, ^^'ith 
the carriage in normal position, depress letter 1 or I, and a vertical line of the same 
character can be produced by turning the roller with the fingers. 

(120.) To w-rite on the very extreme of the bottom margin, attach the paper to a 
backing-sheet that extends far enough below the copy to come behind the roller-scale. 
Use the so-called "Newspaper Pins" to hold the sheets together. When it is desiralile 
to write vertically on the side margin, take the paper out, fold, and proceed as usual. 
Of course it is unprofitable to take this trouble except in extreme cases. 

(1'21. ) If a typewriter is left idle for a great deal of the time, it is best to cover with 
a cloth, for a dusty machine has an untidy look. A yard and a half of brown cotton- 
flannel makes a tasty covering. 



40 PRACTICxVL TYPEWRITING. 

(122.) To erase typewriting withoufc ui'irring the rest of the page, lay apiece of 
tough pai^er alongside the place to be scratched ; or, if more convenient, cut out a part 
of the overlay, and place upon tlie work so that the erasing tools can touch no other 
part. 

(123.) The typewriter can be of great assistance to the telegraph operator 
(Eeceiver), especially for the receipt of press dispatches. It is used quite extensively 
now ; but when a practical carriage-return device is invented, we may expect to see 
the writing machine much more effective in this connection. 

(124.) To erase typewriting, first scratch the paper a httle with a sharp knife- 
eraser, and then rub smooth and clean with the so-called " Typewriter's Eraser," which 
has some grit to it. The ordinary rubbei- eraser will not answer. 

(125.) If the thumb be allowed to remain upon the space-bar, any key can be struck 
many times without movement of the carriage. Consequently the impressions pile one 
upon another, and serve to make the print more distinct. Combination characters are 
made in the same way, such as jz5; g, e, '^. 

(12(3.) An operator furnishing a machine should receive at least two (|2) dollars a 
week more compensation. Some concerns that use many typewriters require employes 
to provide each his own, so as to insure bett'ir care of the machines, and hence, bettei- 
work. There are employers, also, that require this on less defensible grounds. 

(127.) A signature may be typewritten, it may be affixed with a stamp, or it may 
have been set in type and imprinted from that, — and each and aU are recognized as legal. 
The principal objection to a signature thus made is the difficulty of proving the author of 
it, in case any question should arise. The pen-written signature has individuality, and 
for many reasons adds weight wherever it appears. 



TYPEWEITEE INSTRUCTION BY MAIL. 

(128.) The paragraphs of this Manual ara figured, so they can be referred to in de- 
tail if it be desirable to give instruction by mail. 

(129.) After the pupil has procured a machine the first duty should be to read and 
understand the book of directions accompanying the same, so as to thoroughly compre- 
hend the mechanical workings of the instrument before directing hand to the key- 
board. 



PRACTICAL TYFEWRITIXG. 41 

(130.) The teacher may assign tasks adapted in length to the requirements and 
abihty of the learner, who, in turn, should forward all work to the instructor for cor- 
rection and comment. 

(131 . ) Typewriting can also be easily acquired by self-ixstruction, if the directions 
as herein set forth be faithfully followed! There exists no reason why proficient type- 
writer operators, according to the most practical method, cannot be the result of pains- 
taking study of just this little volume. 



LO^'GHAND ABBREVIATION. 

(132.) Acting on the belief that there was a need of a practical method for shorten- 
ing longhand, a committee of eight was appointed at the London Shorthand Congress, 
some time since, to consider tue problem of devi^'ing a uniform code of contractions to be 
recommended for general use. The list on following page was reported by this committee. 

It was found, upon investigation, that the larger part of this list was in use 
in the principal newspaper offices in London, and, accordingly, the chief labor was to 
regulate occasional discrepancies and bring the whole into tabulated form. 

(133.) For the convenience of the typewriter it is suggested that the terminations 
indicated by the superior letters be separated by the hyphen, as xtr-y, for extraordinary, 
or f ur-r for further ; and the hyphen may be omitted in words like wd, shd, yr, bn, wh, 
etc. 

The auspices under which this list was prepared ought to vouch for it, and to such as 
need a system of longhand abbreviation this ought to be exceedingly useful. 



42 



PRACTICAL TYPEWIilTIXG. 



Standard List of Contractions. 



Written. 


Printed. 


Written. 


Printed. 


/ 


tbe 


xtry 


extraordinary 


t 


tbat 


ev8 


evening 


f 


for 


evy 


every 





of 


fm 


from 


ll 


bave 


. fur' 


furllier 


y 


you 


gen' 


gen eral 


w 


with 


gov 


government 






great 


r 


terminalion "ever" 


ild 


had 


(above tlie line.) 


as bow, wbicb', 


imp" 


importance 




wben'', -wliei', 


imp' 


important 


& 


"iag," as eoms 


Ige 


large 


(above enil of 


coming. 


mti? 


meeting 


11 


terminalion 


m' 


might 


(above llie line.) 


" tioD," "sion," or 


m^; 


molning 


ce 

(above the line.) 

m' 


"ion." 
terminalion 


not-we 
obj" 


notwithstanding 
objection 


i"ance,"' "ence." 


o'c 


o'clock 


termination 


op" 


opinion 


omit 


"ment." 
example : 


oppy 

0' 


opportunity 
other 


" day " in davs 
ilweek. 


"Mon," Monday. 


o' 


ought,"'™''' ','[„" "J"'"^" 
brot, brought 
the', thought, etc. 


ab' 


about 




ace' 


account 


parf 


particular 


afl° 


afternoon 


q" 


"question 


ag» 


again 


S"* 


said 


ag" 


against 


sev' 


several 


air.B 


among 


Sll 


shall 


am' 


amount 


sh'i 


should 


bee 


because 


til' 


their, there 


b" 


been 


tho 


though 


btwn 


between 


thro 


through 


c° 


could 


togr 


together 


cb„ 


eliairnian 


V.V 


verj' 


cir" 


circumstance 


wh' 


wli ether 


eom « 


committee 


\v'' 


which 


dif» 


difference 


\v' 


without 


dil' 


different 


,,,d 


would 


dif" 


difficult 


yesiy 


yesterday 


dif'-"y 


difficulty 


\' 


your 



PUNCTUATION MARKS. 



(134. ) Some one has remarked that common sense ought to decide the meaning of a 
sentence without punctuation. That is taking a little too radical view of the matter, hut 
it is nevertheless true there is much superfluous punctuation, and an overabundajice of 
rules for the same. However, punctuation is here, and has come to stay ; therefore the 
next best thing is to have common-sense rules for the guidance of the writer who has not 
time nor inclination to study technicalities. In conversation the sense is indicated by 



PRACTICAL TYVEWIUIIXG. 43 

inflexion of the voice. It would seem to us that a common-sense statement of the 
province of punctuatiox is, that the stops should so divide sentences as to simulate the 
conversational style— of course giving due prominence to grammatical relations. 

(135.) Tjie Comma is used to set off any part of a sentence that has a sort of 
graiumatical completeness of its own. There is a liomely rule current,— that a clause 
Avhich can be taken away without impairing the grannuatical structure of the whole 
should have a comma before and after. 

Too many conuuas are worse than none. Many and comprehensive rules are to he 
found in works on punctuation, but where opinions differ as to the use of the comma, 
the best guides to follow are — the requirements of the sense, or the exami)les furnished 
hy standard writers. 

Use the comma before a short quotation. Together with the hyi)hen it is indicat- 
ed that what follows is somewhat explanatory of the foregoing. 

In typewriting ahvays strike a space after the comma. 

(13G.) The Semicolon luarks the division of a sentence greater than that denot- 
ed by the comma. Strength is added to many epigi-ammatic jihrases, following one an- 
other, by separating with the semicolon. 

(137.) The Colon marks the division of a sentence greater than that indicated liy 
the semicolon. 

In titles it divides the principal statement from the exjjlauatory i)art. It is used be- 
foi'e quotations of some length. 

(138.) The Period marks the full stop and abbreviations, though it may be omit- 
ted in abbreviations giving the last letter of the word, as Mr Jr Dr Messrs 

It is also used (instead of the asterisk) to denote an omission in a direct quota- 
tion. 

(139.) In typewriting the Period has such a small face it indents the paper undul)*^ 
and, thei-ef ore, is often omitted. When omitted after initial letters an additional space 
should be struck. 

(140.) Of course in legal matter the period should be employed, and in correspond- 
ence not purely informal ; the above suggestion is not intended to raise any question as 
to the propriety of using this mark at all times. 

(141.) In the execution of fancy typewrithig the period makes a neat horizontal 
border ; while the colon furnishes the vertical equivalent. The period and hyphen are 
common in tabular work to point to figures. 



44 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITIXG. 

(142.) The Interrogatiox Point marks the direct question. When placed within 
the parenthesis (?) it denotes irony, or that some doubt exists regarding the foregoing 
statement. Used in this way it can also be made valuable to explain (?) a written joke. 

(!48.) The Exclajiation Point is written after interjections, and may be sparingly 
used to denote wonder, contempt, emphasis, etc. Also is put after questions that are 
more exclamatory than otherwise. 

(1-iJr.) The Apostrophe marks the possessive case and omissions ; also a quotation 
within a quotation. 

(lis.) The Parenthesis calls for no remark. In distinction from the parenthesis, 
the brackets are used to include interpolations, corrections, notes, etc. 

(146.) In typewriting make no space between the parenthesis and the word en- 
closed. 

(147.) The Hyphen marks a divided word at the end of a line, compound nouns 
when the second implies the act of containing the first, as w-ood-box, tea-kettle ; also 
compound adjectives, as dark-eyed maiden, half -dead-and-alive condition. Also used in 
names to denote the omission of some letters ; to separate vowels that do not form a 
diphthong ; and to divide numbers written in words. 

(148.) The Dash (M-dash), made on typewriter by three hyphens, marks a sudden 
transition of thought, or change in the structure of a sentence, or when a phrase is 
purposely left unfinished. Also instead of parentheses or brackets with equal effect. 

It.also denotes hesitating speech, and is convenient to represent rhetorical effects 
not describable by other stops. Some writers use the dash indiscriminately, when 
apparently in doubt regarding the punctuation. 

(149.) Capitals are used as follows : At the beginning of a sentence, the first 
word of a line of poetry, the first word of a direct question, and the first word of a quo - 
tation. Also at the beginning of proper nouns (names of cities, rivers, towns, counties, 
States, persons, etc.)— names of divinity, titles, and words of prime importance in special 
matter. 

FUETHER REMARKS. 

(150.) Make no period after nd, st, th. 

(151.) Do not use Oh before the vocative case (case of address.) 

(15-2.) Do not use the comma when doubtful how to punctuate; employ the M- 
dash, or nothing at all. 



Pli ACTIO AL TYPEWBITIXG. 45. 

(153.) Do not omit the comma before and after — However, In short, Indeed, Too, 
Therefore, To a certain extent. Moreover, etc.* 

(15-4.) Do not underhnc too freely in a piece of A\Titing ; i-ather have your language 
strong enough to sustain itself. A word typewritten in caps attracts more attention 
than underlining, where attention is desired. 

(155.) Do not correct eiTors extensively in the body of a MS. ; use the margin. 

(156.) Do not use quotation marks too freely, and if one is written be sure and write 
its complement. 



FURTHER SUGGESTIONS. 

(]57.) The characters for mathematical representation can be evolved from the or- 
dinary key-board by calling &— plus, x — the sign for multiplication, two hyphens (--) for 
the minus sign, the — (made by hyphen and colon) for division, and two hyphens for 
" equal-to" (=>, one in normal position and the other lifted, in the manner described in 
paragraph 49. 

(158.) When making a manuprint of a drama, or the words of an opera, the dialogue 
is usually written at the right of the page, leaving an exceedingly wide margin at the 
left, in which all the directions for stage "business" are to be written. 

(159.) Poetry is very prettily written by the typewriter, due attention being given 
to the proper indentation of the lines as regulated by the rhythm, etc. 

(160.) An address for public delivery may be advantageously Avritten by machine 
all capitals, with double space between the lines, — for the more conspicuous setting 
forth of the matter. 

(161.) In letter writing use a blank sheet, that is, without letter-head, for second 
and subsequent pages. 

(162.) On machines having no Section-mark (§) that character can be made by one 
lowercase s above another. This is done as described under the head of numerals (T4S). 



*Allardyce saj's the tendency is against sucli punctuation nowadays ; we heartily wish the "tendency " 
would become a settled fact. 

Note.— Bigelow's " Handbook of Punctuation," oOc, Wilson's more extensive work, ^l.tjO, and Allar- 
dyce's " Stops" are excellent for reference it the pupil desires more definite rules for punctuation. 



46 PRACTICAL TYPEWRiriKG. 

(163.) Letter B and figure C are on what might be termed neutral ground, and the 
index finger of either hand can be emploj'ed as the situation may demand. 

(164.) When there is an enclosure to accompany a letter it is well to imprint the Avord 
" ENCLOSURE " in the lower left-hand corner of the signature page, for the convenience 
of the mailing-clerk. This may be done by machine or a rubber stamp. 

(165.) A letter to be registered should have the word " REGISTEEED " written just 
above the address — to the left of the date ; or elsewhere if preferred. 

(168.) When indexing the Letter-book, it is the common practice to enter the names 
of correspondents in the index pages at the beginning of the book, in as near alphabetical 
oixler as possible, and then add the page numbers consecutively ; at the same time re- 
cording with blue pencil upon the page with the letter itself the page-number of the 
last previous letter to the same correspondent — and vice versa. 

(167.) There is no security in filing papers away with only a rubber band to hold 
them, as the rubber soon loses its strength. It is l^etter to fasten with a tape, and the 
Crown File Band, which is a new fastening of this character, is inexpensive and effective. 

(168. ) The well equipped office should have a stock of thin paper, on which is the regu- 
lar imprint, for making duplicate copies. Also blank sheets of the same for second and 
subsequent pages of a letter. These blank sheets are also convenient to make copies 
of letters received, because being light weight they can be enclosed with other pages 
without adding much to the postage. 

(169.) Typewriter operators who may be afflicted with myopia (short sight), should 
have glasses with a double lenses, one with a long focus, and the other with a focus of 
about 1 8 inches, which will take in the key-board of the machine and the note-book on 
the table by its side. The vv-riter has used this style of glasses for some time, and 
likes them exceedingly. 

(170.) Dumb-bell and club practice is good for the operator who gets weary be- 
cause of long sittings at his machine, a)ad we have found bicycling an excellent antidote 
for office fatigue. Persons of sedentary habits should be mindful of the importance 
of exercise, if they expect the functions of the body to work properly. * 



* Publisher's Note. Many busine.ss offices have one of DowiFs " Home Exercisevs," which is considered 
the best means for physical exercise ever devised, and is specially useful to sedentary people. Price, with 
liook, $8.00. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITIXC. 47 

(.171.) Keep c.uixni paper in an air-tight tin box, siKrially made for tlio pr.ri)cse, 
and buy it in small quantities if drying n[i cannot be ])re\-ented. 

(111'. ) The corresponding secretary should be prompt i:i the execution of all typewrit- 
ing committed to him, and, if any discretion is expected of him, immediate answer should 
be made to all letters confided to his care. He ought to watch the mails closely, and 
see that all matter is dispatched at the earliest possible moment. 

(173.) Upon beginrnng the second page of a letter, if you are using papei with, 
letterhead imprint, take another sheet of same (or as per "[ 161) — only write upon the 
reverse side. Indicate at the top the page number and name of party written to. If 
the first line of such a page is incomplete, do not paragraph, but complete the line ; 
violating in this case the rule to paragraph. 

(ITi.) ■ When a quotation is to be written within a letter, it can be made to stand 
forth conspicuously by writing it half-space. Make a full-space division between para- 
graphs of a quotation thus written. 

(175.) In a business letter of a more or less formal character, figures are more 
properly written in words than to express them by the Roman signs. 

(176.) A great many letter writers begin by giving the date in this wise — October 
ITith, 1891. This is not correct, the th should be omitted ; likewise d, nd, st, in the like 
situation. 

(177.) When preparing a stencil for a duplicating process it is sometimes nise to 
rough out the matter on another sheet, marking the principal points from the scale to 
he remembered, and then the work can proceed quite rapidly. Or, if the matter is to 
occupy a certain space, take measurements and indicate same on the stencil paper with 
little lines or dots of red ink, which will define the limits witliin which the matter can 
be typewritten. 

(178.) After a perfect copy has been made, if it is somewhat intricate, mark a 
specimen with the most essential scale numbers, and preserve for future reference, if 
there are likely to be wanted more of the same kind. 

(170.) It is best to run the eye over figure work, and correct same before removing 
the stencil from the machine. If quick printing be required, strips of tissue paper may 
be pressed upon the undried varnish usually applied to the stencil, and the work proceed 
without delay. 



48 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(180.) When preparing to print with the Mimeograph, Cyclostyle or Neostyle, ar- 
range for the paper adjustment as follows : Space the right or left margin according to 
the longest line in copy, and the top or bottom margin by following vertical rows of 
letters ; or, in tabular work, a perpendicular line of figures. Use the paper to be printed 
upon, or a rule, for this purpose. Mark the adjustment with pencil on the blotter-pad 
tliat should cover tiie platen, and it is ready for feeding the ^laper. Eoll the ink in 
gradually, remembering tiiat it is only necessary to thoroughly saturate the fiber paper 
next to the roller. After this is inlied, but little is needed to make good impression. 

(ISl.) Avoid heat when using the Mimeograph. If the machine is placed on a shelf 
•over or near a radiator the work will be ruined. In a room heated to seventy-five 
or eighty degrees the stencil will not print well. This, we think, is due to the softening 
of the coating of the stencil paper. In a temperature of sixty to sixty five degrees the 
device works nicely, and is an excellent way of reproducing typewriting. 

(1S2.) A facsimile signature, or the introduction of characters not typewritten, can 
l)e made by transferring the stencil to the writing surface provided for pen work, and 
filling in Avith the pen ; exercising some care, of course, as the stencil paper is ahiiost too 
thick for such writing. (See p. 70.) 

(183.) Speed in typewriting depends somewhat upon the temperament of the 
-writer, and we might add with truth, the condition of his machine. At the outset the 
typewriter should be properly adjusted and in good 0]-der ; that almost goes without say- 
ing. Then a good method of procedure is an important requisite ; it is olr-dous the all- 
finger method has superior advantages. Typewriting from dictation is most conducive 
to fast writing, provided the above considerations a.re given due weight, and the dictator 
lias a proper idea of the matter. Good dictating is an acquirement ; the person essaying 
it should understand something of the capacity of the machine and the ability of the 
operator, and also pay due attention to sentence construction. 'Jliere should be the riglit 
division of sentences, natural phrases should not be broken, the sense should be made 
clear, the enunciation be distinct enough to be heard above the click of the machine, and 
a close watch be had upon the movements of the writer, so as to keep Avell behind, or not 
too far ahead, of the worlc. The best writers are not infallible as to slips of fingers or 
attention ; but with a dictator in sympathy with the operator comfortable progress will be 
made, and the most rapid of all typewriting result. 

(184.) When copying, the operator should read and remember as much of a sen- 
tence as he can, retaining it in mind until the same is transferred to i^rint. The habit is 
a bad one of writing one word at a time, and nervously turning the head back and 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 49 

forth from copy to keyboard. Facility of toTicb writing will effect an improvement in 
this respect. Frequent lifting of the carriage is also very much a habit. The 
cultivation of accuracy in writing, and confidence in the same, will tend to over- 
come this. 

(185.) It is considered by many as being more convenient to place the notebook flat 
upon the table, and dispense with the machinery of the elevated copyholder, because 
the eyes move with greater ease from keyboard to copy if both are in nearly the 
same plane. 

(186.) Continuous writing is quite practicable from clear and legible copy. Skill 
in thus writing is valuable to have, and it may be attained by something like the follow- 
ing practice : Write slowly, taking in with the eyes whole phrases, looking away from 
the machine when words occur that are easily fingered, or Avhen there is a common 
termination like Hon, ment, or ing, or familiar material of anj- description, utilizing this 
opportunity to look ahead upon the copy, and store up Avords, phrases, or Avhole sen- 
tences for the next step in the process. If the all-finger method is carried out with 
considerable exactness, it is uot difficult to acquire facility in continuous writing. 

(187.) A typewritten will should cover both sides of the paper, so as to leave no 
hlank space for the admission of fraud. 

(188.) Contracts should be very carefully written. The first and last names of the 
contracting parties should be written in full. The iirovisions of the instrument should 
be paragraphed in good style, and sums of money A\-ritten in both words and figures. 
Eates per cent, if such there be, should also be written in both words and figures. 
Erasures are not permissible, generally speaking, and if made (or any change of like 
character), attention should be called to it by a clause like the following : "The word 
(or Avords) so-and-so in lines so-and-so substituted (deleted, interpolated or erased) 
before execution." Contracts are made in duplicate, triplicate, etc. This may be done 
liy manifolding with carbon paper, but each part looks better if written by itself. It is 
hai'dly necessary to add that Avhen so written great care should be exercised. 

(189.) The beginner who is endeavoring to gain a knowledge of typewriting can 
derive a great deal of instruction and example from the high-class magazines, Avhich are 
fine specimens of typographical style and accuracy. 

(190.) When the carriage is SAvitched to upper-case, and fixed tnere by the cylinder 
shifter, a loAver-case character can be quickly made by pulling the front carriage rod 



50 



FRACTICA L TYPE VrRITlKG. 



forward teni[)oraril3' with the fingers. This is coaveriient for mailing a hyphen or 
comma wlien writing all capitals. 

(191.) If an omission has been supplied by writing between the lines, and a caret is 
needed, wait until the page is w-ritten before removing the paper. Then replace in 
the machine upside down, carefully adjust, and print a lower-case v where the caret 
she aid appear. 

(192.) Sometimes a letter is omitted, and there is no gap in the word to tell the 
story. To supply the letter, adjust the pointer so as to come half way between the 
scale marks of the letters each side of the one required, bring the cylinder forward with 
the fingers at the same time while holding the pointer as above described, strike the 
letter, and the impression will be made just above the place desired. If the apostrophe 
is wanted, shift to upper case, adjust the pointer in the same manner, and proceed as be- 
fore. 

(193.) It is always wise to compare typewriter copying with the original, and es- 
sentially so if it is work of some difficulty. If one can read to another, what is ordi- 
narily an irksome task can be easily disposed of. Do not deface the page with blue 
pencil marks in an editorial hand, but make a small cross in the margin with a soft 
pencil, which can be entirely erased. Then, if the corrections be ingeniously made, the 
page will be saved. 



(19i.) When typewriting matter for the telegrapher it has often been the practice 
to omit words, like the, a, and, an, etc., which could be filled in by the iiews editor at 

the other end of the line. Of late some newspaper 
offices have abolished this custom ; probably for the 
reason that under a favorable tariff of rates it is more 
profitable to have such matter wired in full. 



(195.) To make a -word, title, or phrase occupy a 
given space, in addition to following the instructions of 
paragraph S9, much can be accomplished by ingenious 
spacing, not only between words but sometimes between 
letters — after the manner of the compositor justifying 
his lines. 



(196.) The author has recently improved the knee-shift referred to in paragraph 91, 
as will be seen by the above illustration, aud it is now for sale. A practical de- 




PRACTICAL TYPEWRITIXG. 51 

vice for operating the upper-case key independently of the lingers is of great assistance 
in the promotion of all -finger procedure, and graceful writing generally, and we recom- 
mend this arrangement without reserve as being entirely effective. 

(197.) Practice in the use of the two scales can be had by omitting a letter here and 
there, and returning to insert the same. This is harder to accomplish if the paper has to 
be readjusted (as after removal), and to insure success the cyhnder scale must be made 
even with the alignment the entire distance across the page. This can be done by writ- 
ing a line, turning the roller backward a full space, and then adjusting the scale by the 
screws. When the proper relation is established between the letters and the marks of 
the scale, corrections and insertions can be readily made. 

(198. ) The following constitutes a key to the less obvious of the fancy borders : 
Page 06, lineo, AV X Page G7, line 2, o/ 01 

" " " 5, 00- " " " S, bq/- 

" " •'= 9, AVQ' " " "13, / o_ 

" " " li, oi " " "IS, /lo- 

" " " 1^1, AV ■ " " "19, oi-X- 

(199. ) In further reference to aligning (1 92) : a letter should be corrected with refer- 
ence to the top as well as the bottom, and treat one letter at a time. If the readjustment 
is made with the screwdriver, be sure and set every screw fimily at the last. It is a good 
plan, if a new machine has been transported some distance, to ascertain by trinl if every 
screw is tight ; but a person unfamiliar with the mechanism, or with the use of tools,, 
should not trifle with the machine. 

(200.) The long and short accent marks (o, a,) can be made (1) by treating the 
hyphen according to paragraph 48 ; and (2) by holding the front carriage-rod so that 
only the lower part of figure will make an imprint, as moy be observed in the fii'st 
specimen of facsimile, page 55.) 

(201.) For practising and strengthening the left Little finger, the following line? 

will serve: 

"Wars arm all ranks, all hearts, all crafts appal; 
At Mars' harsh blast arch, rampart, altar fall. 

Ah! Hard as adamant, a braggart Czar 

Arms vassal swarms, and fans a fatal war. 
At that bad call a vandal band 
Harass and ransack Wnllach-land ; 

A traitor phalanx Balkaii's scarp hath passed, 

And Allah's standard falls, alas, at last. " 



52 PRACTICAL TYPEWRiriKG. 

(202.) Practice for the fourth finger of the right hand can be had by writing the nur- 
sery jingle — " Peter Pipei' picked three pecks of prickly pears, " etc. 

(203.) In addition to paragraph 13, alphabet practice can be found in those speci- 
mens of writing, of which the following is an example : 

"And I, even I, Artaxerxes the king, do make a decree to all the treasui-ers which 
are beyond the river, that whatsoever Ezra the priest, the scribe of the law of the 
God of Heaven, shall require of you, it be done speedily. " (Ezra, vii: 21.) 
— which contains every letter of the alphabet. Other examples are not difficult to find 
among curiosities of composition. 

(20-1.) The Writer says: "The prejudice of most editors in favor of typewritten 
copy is so strong that no writer who can afford to own a typewriter should be without 
one. " This is a hint to literary workers from good authority. 

(20.5.) The word " fypewrltlst," signifying a typewriter operator, has of late 
gained some currency among the unthinking. The Century Dictionary defines -ist as 
^'a termination of Greek origin existing in many English words derived from the 
Greek or formed on Greek analogy, denoting an agent (one who does or has to do with a 
thing), and corresponding usually to nouns in -er, with which in many cases they 
interchange. In vulgar use words in -ist are often employed humorously, or for the 
nonce, where properly only -er is permissible, as in shoot ist. sing ist, uxilkist, etc., for 
shooter, singer, iralker, etc. " 

Write, being an Anglo-Saxon word, should hardlj^ attract to it the Greek termina- 
tion -ist, and the word " typeivritist-'' does certainly liave a vulgar sound, and grate un- 
pleasantly upon the ear. We hope it will not pass into general usagje. 

(206.) When a copy of any writing is made upon the typewriter, indicate the char- 
acter of the transcript by the word "COPY" at tVie top of the page ; and i-f signatures 
occur, write the word " SIGNED " in parenthesis before the same. The value of a copy 
for legal purposes lies in its being exact, though in a business house copies of badly 
written letters are often made as they should be, /. e., with correct spelling and punctua- 
tion. It is not always advisable to perpetuate an error. 

(207.) A thorough cleaning and oiling of the typewriter is greatly facilitated by re- 
moving the back rod. This is easily done, and Avhile the carriage is detached, the 
wheels, beaiings, teeth, etc. , become more accessible. 



PRACTICAL TYFEWRITING. 53 

(208.) Style in typewriting embrices a great many desii'able features. There is 
something in the manner of tlie operator — in his attitude before the machine. A 
stooping, unbusinesshke posture has an ungraceful look, and departs from style. 

(209.) The way the keyboard is manipulated constitutes an important attribute of 
style. There ai-e persons who make piano playing a most graceful performance, while, 
on the other hand, extreme awkwardness characterizes the simplest movements of others, 
and no thought of style enters into consideration. We say a certain person upon the 
street is stylish because the tout ensemble of his appearance is due to careful attention to 
the items of dress and demeanor that have a part in the general effect. The typewriter 
operator can cultivate style by taking heed of the little details that go to make correct 
and good looking procedure. 

(210.) Erect ngure, easy arm, hand and finger action, and a dignified behavior gen- 
erally, should be i)ractised by the writer in the effort for a stylish bearing. 

(211.) When it comes to style in the arrangement of the matter written, there is a 
v.-ide range for suggestion. Above everything have the machine in such good working 
condition that no visible effort is manifested in its manipulation. Do not be obliged to 
pound the kej^s with a sledge-hammer touch, or pull the carriage back to place with the 
swing of a giant. The muscular method of manipulation has had its day. Have but 
little flourish about your finger movement ; no occasion can be found for striking 
kej'S in alt. as in music ; there are no harmonics in typewriting. 

(212.) Do not let the letters pile one upon another, or spaces be lacking when most 
required. Spell correctly, of course, and punctuate, having the reader in mind. Be 
tasteful in the arrangement of matter, whether it be a simple letter or more elaborate 
writing. Paragraph at the proper time, whether in obedience to the sense of the subject 
or to the appearance of its presentation. 

(213.) Be vigilant to observe the commoner rhetorical rules. As stated elsewhere, 
good models of typograiphy are furnished by the high class monthhes. If the operator 
has ever stood at a printer's case he has avou experience in a good and practical school. 

(211:.) Eemember that plain print has a most cruel way of exposing errors, and 
nothing betrays the want of capacity in a writer so much as the writing itself. There- 
fore study the acknowledged standards of fine writing, and then strive to make your 
own work exhibit those almost undefinable traits which may be characterized by the 
word — style ; not style of composition from a literary standpoint, but its mechanical 
aspect. 



54 PRACTICAL TYl'E WRITING. 



A Chapter in Facsimile. 



Examples of Titles, Backing's, Caplions, Legal Forms and Otherwise, 
A Variety of Fancy Borders, Tail-Pieces, and the Like. 



The following pages consist of a facsimile reproduction of actual typewriting. There 
is hardly a limit to the variety of combinations that can be made from the char-acters of 
the typewriter, and those following by no means exhaust the resources of the machine. 

The ruled lines in the tabular work, and much of the underscoring, are supposed to 
be in red ink. A very simple piece of typewriting, tastefully I'uled in red, looks well 
because of the contrast of color. 

The legal captions furnished herewith ai'e not intended to be set as a standard, for as 
a matter of fact such forms are generally prepared to suit special cases and individual 
tastes. We hope the student will get ideas from the forms submitted, and then his eye 
for arrangement, and the requirements of the situation, will be his other guides. 



10 15 



FHACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 



65 



No. 



— ; A-B-S-T-R-A-C-T : — 

o f 
The T-I-T-L-E o f 



JOHN FENDERSEN 
— to — 
MARK BROWN. 



Richardson & Pillsbury, 

Counselors at Law, 

Troy, N.Y. 



Gen. No, . . . 

Term No. . . . 



In the Court, 

Of 



WORCESTER TOOL CCMP'Y 

--VS — 

JOSEPH LEIGHTON et al. 



Notice & Interrogatories. 
SUMNER BIGGS, Att'y. 



aXHXEXHXMXMXMXHXlKMXlDCJDaEaSKKXKXIDaSXEXIKSX^ 



EXAMINATION of TITLE 



— to-- 

Kenneth Townshend, 
Clarence Timmins and 
Eorrest J. Vining. 



For 



Elemming, Flaxsead & Fly, 
Conveyancers, &c. 
Boston, Mass. 



In the , Circuit Court, 

Of.- County. 

II n II n II II It II II II II II II II n ii ii it ii ii ii ii it it it ii it n •' i> " » 
VS 

DEC_I_SI_ON 

o f 

Judge Cobb. 



PR A CTl CAL T YFE ^ VRITING. 
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 



STATE of MAINE 

vs 

RICHARD W. BALLANTE. 

mmmam s mmmmmmmmi amimmmmimma 

Cuinberland County, 
Maine. 

March— --Term 
1889 



A p p a r a n c e s : 

Per the State - - C. C. H0L¥AY. 
For Defendant - - JAS. BROWN Esq. 



Before 

—Hon. JOSIAH TUFTS, Judge, 
And a Jury. 



Prom 
George Wilkes, 
Official Reporter, Cum- 
berland Co. Me. 



II It It II II ti !i II ti ti II I1 11 II II II 11 1! i; II II 



II II II II II II II II II <i II I) It II I) If 11 II II 11 II 



7 



X 



X 
txxxxxxxxxxxx'xxx;.:xxJcX 



oooooooooooooooQOoooo =^(jiro^o^o^c#oi^a^o^a^^ 

/-:„/-:_/-.:-/.:-/-: V-:~/-^-/-:-/-:-/-:-/-:-/ 

ojf'o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o x: :x: :x: :x: :x: :x: :x: :x /-/-/-/-/-/ 



PBA CTICAL TYPE 1 \ -RiriNG. 
FORMS for COURT TRANSCRIPTS: 



State of Maine . 
County of Cumberland, Superior Ccv.rt 
,,.„.,,.„,.,,,.... April Tei'TE, iCo. , 



Complainant , 

--VS — 



Respondent. 



IN EQUITY. 



Argument of Mr 

cciinsel for Respondent, et£ 



(Write law citations solid| regular argtuxent 
full space. ) 



In the 

Supreme Court of 

Illinois Northern Gr„Div. 



SoTjtember Tei-ro, A.D„ 1888, 



) Appeal from Superior Court 
) Cook County: 



— : Brief and Argument for APPELLEE ?-- 

( DEGREE ) 
In The SUPERIOR COURT of V/ashingtor. CcLinty. 



« « n t? I) 11 ti 11 11 II II « n u II 11 II H w u n n !j n n n 



» n i» II II n !t ti ti II II M u H w II II ij w (I n u w « n 



In Chancery:- 



Decree , 



n t e r 



(Signed) Judge. 



58 PRA.CT1CAL TYPEWRITING. 

( CrossTBill ) 

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_j^ In the Superior Court. 

STATE of ILLINOIS, / 

Cook County. / ^^ In Chancery. 

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx^ 



Robert M Douglass et al 

vs 
Mutual Trust Company 



-- Original Bill, 



Stephen A Douglass : 

vs :-- Cross *Bill , 

Mutual Trust Company : 



Mutual Trust Company 

vs 
Robert M Douglass et al 



Cross Bill, 



C-R-0-S-S B-I-L-L of M-U-T-U-A-L T-R-U-S-T C-0 . 

Brief of 

Reply Brief of 



( OPINION ) 

United States of America In the Circuit Court 

Northern District of Illinois of said District 



OPINION of the COURT , delivered 

A.D. 1887 

BLAISDELL, J. 

STATE of MAINE ~) 

Cumberland County ) In the Superior Court 

( Caption) 

vs Bill . 

DECISION of TARBOX, J, Friday, July 8th, A.D. 1888. 



PRACTICAL TYPE WHITING. 59 

( DEPOSITION ) 

UNITED STATES of AMERICA: 

Middle District of Indiana In Circuit Court for said Dist. 



llillllllllllllli:::: ANNIE HOORN. being first 

duly sworn, deposes and says 



(Signed by) Annie Hoom. 

SUBSCRIBED and SWORN to before me this blank day of blank, A.D. 
1884, 

######## __ 

# SEAL # Notary Public. 

(0)-(0)-(0)-(0)-(0)-(0)-(0}-:0)-(0)-{0}-C0)-(0)-(0)-(0)-(0)-{0)-(0) 



STATS of X 

X ss 

County of X 

On this 



day of A„D, 188 before me personally came 

to me known, and known to me to be 

the same individual described in, and who executed the foregoing 
instr-oment , and acknowledged to me that he executed the same. 

(Notary's Seal) 

Notary -Public. 



-oOOOo-oOOOo-oOOOo-oOOOo-oOOOo-oOOOo- 



toiotototofotot 

%%%%%%%%%%% leieiGieiei 



60 



PRACTICAL TYPEWlilTlNG. 
::SUBSCRIPTION LIST 





000 

00000 




Brockton, June I4th. 1887. 



WE, THE Ul^IDERSIGWED , agree to contribute the sums set 
linst our respective names for the purpose, etc. 



^ Nam.e s : 



§ Amounts: {J Names: 



§ Amounts : § 



\ II 11 11 II 11 II II II II II II II n II H II II II II II II R II It II H II II H () n a n n II 1) II ii ii ij ii ii ii ii n ii ii ti u ti n n n n n, a ii n it ii ii ii n it n i 



— ) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTsT] — 

THAT I, THOMAS WALS INGHAM , of Weymouth, County of Norfolk 
and State of Massachusetts, do hereby constitute and appoint MAR- 
TIN NICHOLS , of Abington, County of Plymouth in said State, 

MY TRUE, AND LA7/EUL ATTORNEY , 
and in my name, place and stead to demands sue for, recover and re- 
ceive all sums of money and. debts due mSj and all claims and 
deiriands against all persons whatsoever, and to give suf- 
ficient acquittances therefor, and to adjust settle 
or compound all debts or demands, and to insti- 
tute proper suits for the recovery there- 
of, and the sams to pursue to final 
judgment and execution; 
AND I HEREBY RATI FY and confirm what my said Attorney 

the 



shall lawfully do in 



premises. 



IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set ray hand and affixed my 
seal this Twenty-fifth day of August, A,D„ 1883. 



I 11 11 


lit'.'. 


: I |Se 


alk: 





( signature ) 



PRACTICAL TYPE]VBiriXG. 61 
gORM ^of PROXY . 

# # 

# ~: KN0T7 ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS :~ # 

# # 

# THAT I , William _D, Reynolds , DO HEREBY # 

# constitute and appoint--- # 

# JETHUR J^o RAMSDELL # 

# Attorney and Agent for me, and in my name, place and stead to # 
#■ vote as proxy at the.. # 

# according to the number of votes I should be entitled to if # 

# then personally present, \?ith full power of substitution. # 

# # 

# I_N WITNES S WHEREOF , I have hereunto set ray # 

# hand and seal this Fifth day of March, A^D, 18S8. # 

# # 

# Witness: WILLIAM D. REYNOLDS. # 

# # 



SIGHT DRAFT. 
$1,000. Oa Boston, May 25th, 1889. 



— ( AT SIGHT ) — pay to the order of WILLIARD _R. RENFREW 

■ One Thousand dollars 

value received, and place the sarae to the debit of 

To Merchants National Bank, Henry R. Williston. 

Kew York city. 



RELEASE . 

KNOW ALL ^.TEN BY THESE PRESENTS , That I, JONATHAN KNOX , of 
Hartior-d, Connecticut, for and in consideration of the sum of 
Five Thousand (§.5,000.00) Dollars paid to me by Daniel Johnson of 
Hartford, have remised, released and forever discharged, and by 

these presents do, for me, my heirs, executors and administrat- 
ors, remise, release and forever discharge said Johnson, his heiis 
executors and administrators, of and from all manner of action, 
and cause of action, suits or debts against said Johnson, which 



(52 PRACTICAL TTPEWlilTlXG. 

RELEASE continued : 

I ever had, or now have, from the beginning of the world to ths 
day of the date of these presents. 



IN WITNESS WHEREOF, etc. 



(Signed) JONATHAN KNOX. 



BOND . 

-o) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS ( o- $ 

$ 

THAT I, — — — LAWRENCE HUTTON of Boston, § 

County of Suffolk, and State of Massachusetts, am holden and $ 

firmly bound to RUSSELL I NG RAH AM" of the said City and $ 

State, in ths sum of # 



I --( TI-iREE THOUSAND ($3, 000. 00) DOLLARS, )— $ 

to be paid to said Ingraham, or his attorney, execut- 
ors, administrators or assigns; for which payment, well and 
truly to be made, I bind myself, m.y heirs, executors and adminis- 
trators, firmly by these presents. 

SIGNED in the city of Boston, said County and State, this 14th 
day of March, A„D, 1888, with my hand, and sealed with my seal. 

xxxxxx 
Witness ,— LAWRENCE HUTTON . Seal 

xxxxxx 

oOo 

ASSIGNMENT of STOCK . 

Troy, May 1st, 1887. 

EOR VALUE RECEIVED I, KENNETH TORREY, of Troy, New York, 
hereby assign and transfer unto Ralph W. Thomas, of Weymouth, Mas- 
sachusetts , 

TEN (lO)Shares of Stock of the — — 

HUDSON. LAKE ERIE and ALBANY CANAL CO . , 
as per Certificate No 1911; and do hereby irrevocably constitute 
and appoint the Secretary of said Company my attorney to transfer 
the said Stock on the books of the said Company, with full powers 
of substitution in the premises. 

Witness: KENNETH TORREY, 



PRACTICAL TYPE WRITIXG. 
FORM for Cover to Stenographic Report: — 



63 



Office of 
DOTTS & DASHES, 



Appearances : 
For Pl'ff, 

For D'f' t, 



- — New York city-j N.Y. — 



Law £ 


> t e n o g r s . 

















Before : 



Witnes ses Plff. Direct. Cross. I V/itnesses Dft. Direct. Cross. 

I 
I 



-» cao- 





DIMENSIONS of HEXAGONAL BOLTS, NUTS, 


HEADS, ETC. 






Diameter 


Width of Nut 


Depth 


Diameter 


Depth 


Nimber of 






of 


over 


of 


of 


of 


threads 






, Bolts. 


Angles. 


Nut. 


R'nd Head. 


Head. 


in inch. 






Inches. 


Inches. Inches. 


Inches. 


Inches. 


Inches. 






V4 


7-16 1/4 


3/8 


V4 


20 






5-16 


5/8 5-16 


V2 


5-16 


18 






3/8 


5/8 5-16 


5/8 


5-16 


16 






7-16 


Vs Vs 


V8 


7-16 


14 






1/2 


V'S 7-16 


3/4 . 


7-16 


12 






9-16 


1 1/2 


V8 


V2 


11 





§§§§§§§§§§§§§§§i§§§§§§§i§§§§i§§§§§§§§§§§§§§§§§§§§§§§§S§§§§§§g§g§§§ 
(D-(D-(D-fl}-(D-S-(D-ID~(D-iD-ffl ^-s-^i-l^ S0S0S03 ^^^^/^ig^X 

OxOxOxOxexOxOxflxOxOxOxflxOxOxflxOxOxOxOxOx&xOxfixOxOxOxOxCxOxOxOxOxOJ^O 



<6-± PRACTICAL TYPE\VIUl''j[XG. 

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 



Portland. Maine, January 1, 1888 



To 
Date. Mfst. Cars. Egg. Stove. Sm. Stv. Chest. Rate. Amount. 

» ii II » » II II » t> II ir II I) II II M n H II II » n it ii ii ti ii » » ii » n h ti ti n it ii ii n ii ii ii ii ii ii ii ii ti w ii » it ir i> w ti n ti » » i i ii ii w n 

Dee. 3 1580 10 53.08 

5 1587 5 27.13 

10 1626 5 28.11 

13 1659 5 28.14 

14 5255 5 27. 04 

14 1646 20 29o08 85o00 

15 3267 5 28,10 

15 4364 10 57=15 

16 1664 5 29,00 
20 1682 5 ______ 28.14 

29 , 08 5o05 148.47 

57ol5 5.30 306.08 

113.10 5,30 601,55 



225. 64 



(Sug, by Phon. 
World. ) 



Received Payment 



EXTRACTS from LETTERS in Phon. Magazine: 

The rraterial required is as follows,-- 

Girders G^, G^, G^ , G^ , G^ , G^, one each; 

Golxmms CLA, CRA, VLA, VRA, one each; 

Lattice Struts — -0,, T^; q, T^; 

Strut s— — — 2-ToR, g-ToL, 2-t3r, 2-t3l, 2-t4R; 

Laterals 6-ES, 12-ED, 12-ID, 22-LT, l-L^, 21 -L^- 

Gussets 12-EP, 12-ELP, 24-IP, 12-0-2, 4-g4, 2-6^; ete. 

oOOOOo 

1 Piece 18" X 3/8" x 19* 9^/4^, -Invoice No 8454 For Flaws. 
1 " 193/4" X 5/8" X 1' 6", - - « " 8454 V^ Short. 
1 " 14" X 3/4" X 15", ------ « 8455 Por Plaws. 

1 " 18" X 3/8" X 19' 9I/4" - - " " 8846 Vs Short. 

o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-t. 



10 



15 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 
20 25 30 35 40 45 



65 



50 



55 



60 



65 





Av'ge No. of 


Net Cash Prems. 


Expenses 




Year, 


Go's for 


Received 




Ratio. 




Each Period. 


Incl. Inland. 


Paid. 




1?S0 to '65 incl. 


136 


$109,332,843 


$31,561,599 


23/S6 


1866 " 70 " 


163 


227,458,782 


73,045,889 


32/Ll 


1871 " 75 " 


177 


305,599,649 


94,169,252 


50/81 


1876 " 80 " 


281 


307,198,546 


108,561,299 


55/34 


1881 " 85 " 


293 


452,816,809 


155,098,577 


34/^5 



.A5:gregate , 



$1,402,406,629 $462,436,616 32/97 





War 


Second 


Final 




Strength. 


Reserves. 


Reserves. 


GERfMMY, . . 


, 2 520 000 


1 520 000 


1 860 000 


PRANCE, . . 


, 2 440 000 


1 570 poo 


1 700 000 


RUSSIA, 


. 2 495 000 


1 980 000 


2 200 000 


I T A L Y,. 


. 1 010 000 


1 320 000 


1 200 000 


AUSTRIA, . . 


. 1 145 000 


1 470 000 


1 700 000 



Total, 



9 610 000 



7 860 000 



3 660 000 



ASSETS DECENfBER 31st. 1888. 



Real 

M o r t g a g 
Premium 



2. 

Estate,-- $1,789,426 92 

ages, ---- 1,174,236 90 

Notes, 345,678 21 





POLICIES: 


INSURANCE: 


PRE?,iiUM receipts: 


J S35 , 


13,961 


$24,567,437 67 


|670,675 76 


1836-, 


14,111 


25,185,946 40 


678,463 17 


1837, 


14,478 


25,794,195 49 


689,897 83 


1SS8 , 


14,728 


26,395,600 46 


713,639 90 




57,278 


|101,943,180 02 


|2, 752, 676 66 



66 
1 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 



11. 11 , 1 1 f ! i 



— 0) T-H-E S-A~F-E-T-Y V-A-L~V-E . (0 — 



o:o;o:o!o:o:o:o:o:o; 



OO-OO-OiO-OO-OC- 



it II ii t( n IP H H 11 II " II 11 ii 11 " " II II I' " 



x~ : -X- I -X- I ~x~ I -X- : -x 



bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb 

9/e/9/e/G/9/e/e/0/e/e 

66ti)d)ii)®66fflffl6d)di66666ii)H)d) 
:/l - l/l - l/l - :/°- - l/° - ■ 

nnnmummuu 

'• ' ' 3.Ll.XLLi.l.LX.l.S.Ll.LLl-i. 

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 

X-0-X-0-X--0-X-0-X-0-X 



A Journal devoted to the Inter- 
ests of Owners, Construct- 
ors & Operators of Ma- 
rine & Land Power 
A-Tspliances . 



: Office: 

-o( Equitable Building, 

: 120 B'way, N,Y. 



)o. 



f2 00 a, year in advance, postage 
prepaid in United States & 
Canada; $2 50 for Eu- 

r p e. 



AdV( 


srtising Ra 


tes : 




1 Page , 


12 Months , 


|600. 


net 


1/^ " 


n It 


325. 


It 


1/4 " 
1/S " 
1/L2 » 


It n 
It II 
If n 


175. 

100, 

75. 


It 
II 
It 


Payable in Advance. 




-:- -:- 


=, ° « «. " — 


:- -: 


;- -:- 


_ ° _ _ ° _ - 


° - - : - - 


\~ - i 


; - - ; — 



,/_ „/- »/ -/- -/- -/- -/- 
_/. „/_ _/- -/- ~/- -/- 

-/- -.<?/- -/- -/- -/- -/- 



-/ 



-oSo- 



— oOo- 



— )0( — 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. gj 

-oOOOo- 
-o O/ r d e r~/ oo- 
o O/ Program / Oo / o f/ -o O/ Menu / Oo- 

-o O/ Exercises / Oo- 
— oOOXOOo-- 



N 



SSSSSS 

I 
/o/o/o/o/c/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/ T ?????■????? 

A 

„____ ^ 

46AiA6AAAA(i)646Ai4Ai666(bA466i6i666666666 B ^.^.^-^.^.^.^.^.^ 

M 

c 



)ttee«eeeeeseseeeeeeeeee( 



//////////////////////// Y _-/-/--/--/--/-/--/--/"/--/-- 

T 

::::::::::::::::: f V^V"V^V"q/"q/~V^V^Q/~Q/~V^Q/~Q/~Q/ 



o 



-0 0/ -:- / Oo — o o/ -:- / Oo — o o/ -:- / oo — oo 



S |/^/|/15/|/|/$/$/$/l/l/?/l/v/l/?/$/^/^/^/$/t/?74/ 

E 
L 



» » > > > 

p 



9 M /ii/i/h/b/h/i/i/i/iAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 

A 
X 

E «XeXeXeX*XeXeX«XeX©X©X©X©XsXffiX©X©X»XeX©X«XBXeXeXffiXaXsX«XeX9XaX 



68 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITIXG. 
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 



'oo o / / oQ o / / o^o o/____/o o o^ 



'O O ^ ^0 0^ 

~/0 ?? ^ Oy 

7"° O o/ 7o O o/ ^^ O py /O O O/ 



#/ Messrs WILBUR, ADAMS & Co., 

#7 3003 Girard Ave., 

#7 Philadelphia P e n n. 



/=mm4mhmmHmimmk. 



RICHARD FOX Esq 
Boston 

Mass 



M/E/N B/Y T/H/E/S/E 



s/e/m/t/s . 



Mrs CHAS, EROTHINGHAM, 

#77 Marlborough Street, 

Boston, Mass, 



Miss ADELIA R, CRISP, 

Sec'y Mission Circle, 

Lynchburg, Virginia, 



-oOO" 



"OOo- 



To The PRESIDENT, 

Executive Mansion, 

Washington, D. C. 



His Excellency, 

WILLIAM E. RUSSELL, 

Governor of Mass. 



/-:- -:- -:- -:- -:- -:~7 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



6& 



#019 Boylstone Streot, 

Boston, Mass. , November I4. 1890. 

Master HAROLD H. FURNESS, 

#77 Fi-anklin St. , Salem, Mass. 

Dear HARRY : 

Your letter of the 12th instant was duly received, and 

I will endeavor to meJte answer to your enquiries. 

There are quite a number of details to the make-up of a letter, and 
the raGchanics of it contribute not a littJe to the success of the result. 
For instance, every letter should be dated, and the writer's residence 
indicated, so that the reply will not miss its aim. You can get some 
idea of the form of a machine-made letter from this one; and, it being 
typewritten, a scale has been marked at the top, by v/hich you can arrange 
the parts in good form. 

A communication to a professional gentleman, say a doctor, should 
begin as follows,-- Dr. SO-AND-SO, or Mr. SO-AND-SO, M.D. Do not con- 
fuse this last style of address with the common error, -^ Mr. SO-AND-SO, 
Esq., because in the latter case the mistake is in the use of TWO titles 
of respect, while Mr. and MoD. would hardly come under the same defini- 
tion. Some of the books say otherwise^ but I am no t convinced. 

A letter addressed to a lady requires delicate treatment. If she 
be a young lady, and you are certain she is unmari-ied, you can begin the 
address^-- Miss SO-AND-SO, and the letter itself,-- Dear Miss SO-AND-SO. 
If she be a married lady, the address should be,-- Mrs., of course, and 
ths letter proper should begin,-- Dear MADAA1. Reference is here made to- 
letters purely formal. It is obvious that tender epistles admit of more 
freedom. 

The contents of a letter are susceptible of some order also. Be sure 
and answer all queries for the first thing, and acknowledge the receipt 
of enclosures, if such there were. Paragraph as the sense demands, (and 
sometimes for looks), and be as attentive to rules of punctuation, gram- 
mar and rhetoric as circumstances will allow. If it be a business let- 
ter, make it businesslike; finish when you are done. If it is a polite 
communication, come to the conclusion in a graceful manner. Always be 
observant of the formalities and do n't forget to sign your name. 



Yours tru]. y. 




f\ 



70 

Reproduced from 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



I 



Mimeograph, vork. 



~— -v^/'^Xf) (j3/^?s-><— 



-o0 5 GUARANTEED IN^STMEKT POLICY JOo- 



Age 55 



Amount |l,000 



Annual Premium $70 00 : 20 Y^-s. 



(1) 
Cash. 
>1,531 40 



(2) 

Cash. Paid-up. 

^758 89 $1,000 



(3) 

Life Ann'ty. 
1312 00 



(4) 

Life Aran. Paid-up, 
^154 00 !|l,000 



■-MAIira: NON-rOKFEITURE LA"W 



\ 



A.nnual 
Cash 



Prems pd in 
before lapse 



Ins under this Pol 
secured for 




Yrs 
- 6 
■ 8 
■10 
-12 
•14 
-17 
-19 
-20 
-20 
-20 
-20 
-20 
-20 
-20 
-20 
-20 
-20 
-20 



Cash due end of Ins p 
iod if insvired lives 



er- 



Bays : 

536 - - - - 

352 _ - _ - 

328 

273 

335 

75 - - - - 

187 

0--_ - - -% 170 75 

0-- _-- 371 85 

0------ 556 69 

0---- -~ 725 96 

0-------- 880 32 



-1,020 52 
■1,147 20 
-1,261 11 
■1,362 98 
■1,453 47 
■1,531 40 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 7l 



TYPEWRITING FOR THE BLIND. 



(215.) The acknowledged value of Practical Typewriting in no less than three 
schools for the blind, east and west, has given birth to the conviction that a chapter of 
instruction directed particularly to the blind might be appropriate in this book. 

(216.) Communication with several teachers of the blind has given encouragement 
to the idea, and made it possible to round out the chapter to the measure it has attained. 
Acknowledgments are due for material and suggestions to Mr. J. W. Smith, of the Per- 
kins Institution for the Blind, Boston, and Supt. J. J. Dow, of the Minnesota School for 
the Blind at Faribault, and to the former, as a blind person, all copy has been submitted 
for approval. 

(217.) This instruction possibly may not have a wide application, but it is presented 
with none the less pleasure, and we trust that for the few to whom it is addressed it will 
provide substantial assistance. 

(218.) Also for those seeing operators, who do not find sufficient primary practice 
in the foregoing and subsequent pages, this chapter will supply more explicit instruction. 

GENERAL REMARKS. 

(219.) The history of printing and writing for the blind is a curious one, and has 
extended over quite a period ; but the steps of progress have been slow, and the results 
attained are at their best not wholly satisfactory. 

(220.) Embossed printing was introduced (1784*), and the blind were furnished 
with reading matter, long before they had any means of writing. A system of lan- 
guage representation was desired, which could ba legibly written as well as easily read, 
and the invention of Louis Braille supplied this need by what is known as the "Braille " 
alphabet, being a system of dotted characters in relief very legible to the fingers. 
Braille's original alphabet is stiU used in Europe, but in this country it has been super- 
seded by a more logical version, embodying an arrangement of dots corresponding with 
the relative recurrence of letters, thus falling in line with the American idea of saving 
time and labor. 



*The same year it is of record that there was an instrument invented by a Frenchman for 
writing raised characters for the blind. In fact, most of the early inventions in this line were 
efforts to provide reading for the blind. Beach's typewriter (1856) is a notable example. 



72 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(221.) According to this modified " Braille " the blind are now well provided with a 
tangible system of writing, and it is reported that an instrument of the writing machine 
type has recently been produced by which the dot alphabet can be written. 

(222.) This invention must be especially advantageous to the blind, for not until 
the appearance of the typewriter were they able to readily accomplish for themselves the 
writing needful for correspondence and the demands of business. To write the letters in 
general use involved tedious efforts to draw each character with mathematical exactness, 
and to print them by one or another of the appliances thus far devised was a tiresome 
and far from satisfactory performance- 

(223.) The blind have few channels of communication with the world of light, and 
a pitifully small list of bread-winning occupations which persons of ordinary capacity 
can jDursue. Their fingers are commonly the means by which they become acquainted 
with those doings of daily life that are sensible to others by sight. Much of their study 
and business must be carried on with the assistance of the seeing ; hence it is that an in- 
strument operated by the hands, which can produce legible writing for all who see, an- 
peals most eloquently to this unfortunate class. 

(22i.) Furthermore, this application of the typewriter isnot a visionary idea. J. W. 
Smith says, ' ' I believe it is possible for an intelligent and active bhnd person to earn a 
living by the use of the typewriter," which is quite in accord Avith another statement of 
Ms, that " the blind throughout the country are waking up to an appreciation of the value 
of the typewriter, and there is no mechanical device for writing that places them so nearly 
on a plane with their more favored brethren ." 

(225. ) This gentleman, whose long exiserience in teaching the blind gives weight to 
his testimony, also says that the all-finger style of manipulation is, in his estimation, the 
most practicable method for the blind, because it requires less movement of the hands, 
and, by keeping the fingers near the keys, reduces the danger of inaccuracy. 

(226.) Then, too, the present interest in touch ivrlting brings with it a suggestion-, 
it being fair to presume that if seeing operators can by a logical scheme of fingering the 
typewriter attain some skill in a field of operation, more especially the province of the 
blind, those whose vision is in eclipse ought to reach equally satisfactory results. 

(227.) At the same time there can be no just comparison between the two, when 
the details of typewriting are to be considered. Unquestionably the seeing operator has 
a great advantage ; and in a measure the contrary is the fact. In his efforts toward 



PRACTICAL TYFEWIUTING. i3 

touch Avriting (Par. 33-36) he is reluctant to dispense wholly with sight,, and is slow 
in gaining confidence to write hy touch after the accomplishment has heen acquired. 
Unconsciously he will write for long stretches with hardly a look upon the keys, yet he- 
ing made aware of the fact he becomes confused, and bad wi-iting ensues. 

(22S.) But for the bhud it is always absolute touch writing ; there is no alterna- 
tive. While the seeing operator, with a consistent method, acquires more or less facil- 
ity in glancing away from the manual, it must be remembered that the blind are 
wholly in the dark, and must depend solely upon the touch. The one looks upon the 
letters in an absent fashion, there is apparently no conscious mental exertion ; in fact, 
the gaze fixed upon a point a little above the keys insures accuracy, because a certain 
sense of the situation comes with the shghtest clue to the direction of the keys. The 
other sits in darkness ; there is not vouchsafed to him the least assistance toward learn- 
ing the relations of the letters except by the finger tips, no landmarks except such as 
the sense of touch reveals. 

(229.) So it will be apparent that while the procedm-e in both cases bears marks of 
resemblance, it will have to be conceded that typewriting for the blind is more difficult, 
the details of it require a finer treatment, and all the more important is it that for them 
the rules of fingering be consistent, and at the same time the general method be suscept- 
ible of ready acquirement. 

PARTICULAS INSTRUCTIONS. 

(230.) The bhnd person at the beginning of typewriting encounters the double diffi- 
culty of acquiring & finger method and touch writing at one and the same time, to say 
nothing of other matters of instruction. 

(231.) In addition to the appUcation of the regular finger method of this book to 
typewriting for the blind, one or two points deserve especial prominence, notably the 
division of the keyboard for the right and left hands. The keys TY, GH, YB and figure 
G mark the division of the manual, and may properly be designated as " guides'' to the 
position of the hands, and hand position has a great deal to do with a command of the 
keyboard. 

(232.) Other strategic points are A and P ; easy progressions are 0, L, E, S. It 
will be noted (par. 19) that the guides and the next key to them are fingered the same, 
namely, 1 or 1. Occasionally the adjacent letter is fingered 2 or 2 when consecutive 
to the guide — for the better furtherance of the legato movement desirable in touch writ- 
ing. In striking intervals the long and strong fi.ngers 1 and 2 stretch from one key to 



74 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

another far easier than 3 and 4, so this apparent exception causes no difficulty ; in fact, 
it is not of frequent occurrence. 

(233.) For a better tactile approach to the keys it has also been found desirable to 
raise the "guide " keys mentioned a little above the general level of the manual. This 
plan was originated and employed by Mr. Smith, and he reports excellent results.* 
How^ever, the lifted keys are not an indispensable requisite to proper instruction for the 
blind, though they assist some students greatly, and in all cases make progress qiiicker. 
The study can be pursued vs^ithout these mechanical helps. 

(234.) At the beginning the teacher will indicate to the pupil the j^roper attitude to 
assume before the machine, and explain its mechanical features in detail. Of primaiy 
importance are the carriage movements, feeding the paper, the significance of turning 
the roUer forward or back, line spacing, the ribbon motion, use of the front scale, shift- 
ing to upper case, etc., etc. 

(235.) The arrangement of the keyboard next merits attention, namely, the division 
of it for either hand, and the object of the raised keys, if such there be. At the outset 
the learner should have a mental picture of tlie manual of letters. 

(236.) The hand position may be first gained by placing the little fingers upon the 
extreme outward keys of the row, as for example P or Q, and then dropping the other 
fingers upon the keys inward in natural order. The guides, so called, will be the keys 
next within this span of fingers. The latter may be then taken for points of beginning, 
and the attack upon the other letters be made outward from the central division of the 
keyboard so established. All the fingers should be employed, and the action of each hand 
strictly confined to its own territory. 

(237. ) The touch will reveal T and Y side by side on next to the top row, with four 
keys at each side, U I P at the right, and R E W Q at the left. Y should be depressed 
by the first finger of the right hand, and the letters at the right of Y by the four fingers. 
T is depressed by the first finger of the left hand, and the letters at the left of it by the 
four fingers of the left hand. 

(238.) In the next lower row G and H are depressed by the left and right index 
fingers respectively. At the right are J K L and the semi-colon (lower case) ; at the 
left, F D S A. 

* A front scale made in relief would also afford much assistance. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. . 75 

(239.) The lowest row has V and B for the first fingers, with N M comma and 
shiUing-mark at the right, and C X Z and shift-key at the left ; B enjoying the distinction 
of being fingered by the first finger of either hand, as occasion may require. 

(240.) The very top row contains figures, etc., 6 being attacked by either index 
finger ; with 7 8 9 and hyphen at the right, and 5 4 3 2 at the left. The figures are com- 
monly fingered with less precision than the letters. 1 is made by lower case el, and 10 
by el and capital 0. 

(241. ) Shifting to upper case not only makes capitals, but introduces new characters, 
and the changes should be committed to memory. The space-bar should invariably be 
depressed by the right thumb, and the shift-key, marked " upper case,"' by the left fovu-th 
finger; although the blind, (and the seeing as well), will derive much advantage from 
the use of a knee shift (par. 190). The left thumb is not utihzed. 

(242.) The above sets forth the contents of the keyboard, and the proper fingerings, 
and by this time the pupil has undoubtedly some idea of the same. The relations of the 
characters, and the intervals of fingering require study, memorization and practice. The 
letters which mark the division of the manual are comparatively easy of access, (especially 
if raised), and those attacked by the fourth fingers are not difficult to find ; but the inter- 
mediates are struck with less accuracy by the beginner. 



EXERCISES FOR PRACTICE. 

(243.) To fix the location of the middle letters, and the intervals at right and left, as 
well as to exercise the fingers and memory generally, practice the following : 

"1 1 11 11 1 12 13 14 1 12 13 14 1 1 

y y y 1 1 1 t y y t y u y i y o y p t r t e t w t q g g g h h li 

1 

11 111 1213141 12 13 14 1 1 11 111 12 

g h h g h j h k hi h ; g f g d g s g a b b b v v v v b b v b n b ni 

1 
13 14 1 12 13 11 1111 11 11 11 11 1 11 11111 

b, b/ vc vx vz thgybg hv by hy yb 66665 67thr 

114 14 14 113 113 13 14 13 12 13 13 12 12 14 14 

g V p hyp h y a t h 1 g y o ho g a v s g e hi bo v e t e t a ha 
2 2 3 3 

*rat-face figures— RIGHT HAND. Light-face— LEFT HAND. A figure under a letter— 
EXCEPTIONAL FINGERING. 



76 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(244.) Memorize paragraph 41, and take note that H and N are often fingered by 
the second finger when occurring directly before Y. 

(245.) An exercise in simple words, showing easy progressions from strategetic 
points : 

1 1 121 123 1212 12111 11 112 1123 11123 112 

ttt tr try tree true truth, th thr three threw the 

3 2 3 

1 I 1121 1141 1141 11212 11232 1 12 121 123 1241 
thy they that than there these, yyy ye yet yes 5^ ear 

123 12431 4 4 3 431 43 1 4341 4324 4341 43412 4 3 
yew yeast, ppp pi ply plot plat plea play plate poll 

2 2 

443 1 12 1123 1241 12341 124421243 4 43 2431 

pall, ggg gr grew gray great grape grass, aaa as easy 
3 3 4 3 

434 343 3434 3431 34312 32 321 321 341 32 4 31 

asp was wasp wast waste, we were wet way weep wh 

3 1 3141 313 3121121 3121 31332 3134 31 32 I 
why what who whether when whose whop whole. h h h 



2 



2 



1 143 142 141 1412 12 1241 1242 1241 133 134 134 2 
hy has had hat hate he hear head heat, how hop hope 

1 
J3421 1 11 11 12 12 1 1411 141 141 1411 14112 

hoped, bbb br by be been babv bag bat bath bathe 

13 13 

1 12 1 21 2121 21211 212121 3121 12 12 13 14 4] 
vvv veer eve ever every everett over. 68 64 69 62 26 

3 3 3 3 3 3 1 

31 
9 6. 

(246.) The following words exhibit more difficult intervals, but have a beginning 
with some letter easy of attack. They are confined to the two middle rows of letters 
for the most part : 

13 1342 1 3 1 32 134 131 1224 1223 1244 1123 11221 
to toad toll told top toy. trip trill trap, this their 
22 

113211 1121 1122 11212 1121 11223 131 1311 1 32 

though then them think theft thrill you your yolk 

3 21 2 2 

12231 1234 4341 4312 4134 413421 1211 1241 1223 
yield yelp plan plum prop proper grub grab grill 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 77 

122 12342 1233 123311 313 4 31232 31212 323 32231 

grim grope grow g r o w t h whip while whine will wield 
1 

12 1 1 1 1 124 12 3 1 32 12 12 2 1142 123 1311 

him hub hug hip hill hold Tim time type till both 
12 12 2 11 

1 32 1313121 131 1341 14231 1241 412 1 4121 422 1 
bold boulder boy boat badly bear queer quit queen 

2 

2143 214 1 2134 2123 2112 2111 23 22 232 3 241 

draw draft drop drill drum drug do did does dear 
2 1 

241 224 224 21 3 24 32 2 322 3412 32 1 3241 3242 32 
deaf dip dipper lip like lie late leer liar lead see 

1 

324 3 23 3241 3 41 3 4 31 341 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 121 12 311 

sea sew seat sat sash sag fr fret from fruit filtti 

2 2 3 4 2 1 2 

12 12 121 141 123 131 124 12 12 13 13 31 31 2 3 3 

five jet jar j i 1 1 j o v jump 63 48 72 59 24 97 33 92. 
3 " 2 

(247.) Practice upon the upper row of letters. Note the introduction of capitals, 
calUng for the use of the shift-key : 



42343211 432121 

Property Poetry 


1311 241211 4121 1 41221 
Your Equity Pretty Quiet 


4 3 11 

Pour 


211 3.4 2 2321 13 1 
Europe Ewer Eoot 


4311 4112 1231 4321 1123 
Pout Pure Troy Port Tyre 


4 12 1 
Prey 


31312 321 1 121 13421 41211 4121 3221 41312 3 

Wrote Witty Yet Toper Query Quit Weir Quote W 
3 3 


121 2 1 

r i t e r 

3 2 



4111 1213 3311 

Putty Terror Worry. 

(24S.) Follow the fingering strictly as indicated, for at this stage the same finger 
should be identified with certain letter or letters. 

142 131 43412 412 3 12412 14 3 2 1342 1412 3 412 

Tax Yon Place Quiz Grave Craze Hoax Have Save 

3 2 3 3 

3 431 341 411 342 3123 3412 1312 1432 1432 1223 

Lazy iSabhath Wax Whiz Wave Vote Gaze Case View 

3 3 

3231 342 1331 24232 132 1412 23 1 241 1241 23111 

Zest Lax Cozy Maize Box Crack Moon Man Near Month 



7S PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

11232 23111 43 4 3 23 31 31 3 2 33 13 1313 2 3 33 233 
Build Mouth Pomp 10 30 14 16 19 12 50 7041 8121 90 2 

1 2 

213 2 33 3 

840 812 1000 
2 

14 1 23 121 31243431 1521 31 124134 141113 2 

Hattree Hubbub "Whiplash Thereof Tiptop Bathroom 

1 

1241 41 312121 1 141 2 13321 1 131 3 2 21 114 

Grabbag Whenever Baggage However Boyhood Every- 

3 

11211 4 32 12 23 34 

thing Polite Iowa. 

2 

112 1241 1121412 1112 112 3 11212111 1123 1 241 
The year. They are. Three trees. Thetruth. Grew great. 

23 23 23423 

3 2 34312 123 1241141 324 1411 142 123 141 1123 11211 
We waste tea. Gray rat. Sea bath. Had his hat. This thing. 

211121 12 1 4 131134 241321 124134 1224 13113 

Every evening. A toy top. Dear sir. Tiptop trip. Yours 
3 3 1 

12131 114123 33 13 12 3113211 422 112 123213 

truly. That is so. No need of going. Quee n-b e e. Mexico. 

1 3 

(249) Practice paragrajihs 27-32 — Common Words. Also, the following mis- 
cellaneous words. 

231232 4312121 12 12 1132 212 2143 3212132 44341245 

Excise Ascetic Juice Uncle Inimical Legible Palatial 
2 2 1 3 

12231 134 211 2321212313 1 2131 1314 121 12112212 

First Foppery Deleterious Buxton Bouquet Uxbridge 
12 3. 

23 23 331243 3 132 2 413 4131 3 1231 3 132 141321 

Model Social Sublime Promptly Lovely World Tablet 

1 2 112 1 

413 11 11414 11 13 21 2 413 212 1 12231312412 

Amount Guaranty Committee Prominent Kemonstrate- 

2 2 13 1 

1 3 21132 41322 3 341124112 313 211332211 1 3 1423: 

Collector Proximo San Francisco Endowment Colorado 
2 3 2 1 1 2 

13 21243 2 212412 413124 1 2112321 1231 43314 

Commercial Immediate Abstract Introduction Post- 
121 2 2 

3 1241 123 412 412 3 1212121 143113121241 

script Village Annum Scrivener Hypochondriac. 
2 3 12 3 2 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 79 

(250.) Chain Sentences : — Choleric children need dii-ection. Sublime effects sur- 
vive evanescent thought. Affection needs stimulus. Treat these elements sagaciously. 
■Only your reviewer remembers. His section next the elevated division seems secure. 
"Going, going, gone," ejaculated Dennett, the energetic call-boy. (Also paragraph On.) 

For "Words in Proximity, see paragraph 59. For Prefixes and Affixes, see paragraphs 
39 and 40. Paragraphs 51 to 58 inclusive furnish a variety of words for general 
practice. 

, LETTER WRITING. 

(251.) At the suggestion of Supt. J. J. Dow we give the following explicit direc- 
tions regarding the mechanical arrangement of a letter : In addition to the hints given 
in paragraph 63, we would remark that particular attention should be given to a few 
details which no rules can cover. For instance, if the name of the ]Aa,ceivrittenfrom be 
a long wox-d, or if there is an extended street address, the point of beginning must be 
calculated accordingly, so that the lines will occupy the proper space, and the separate 
parts of the whole address will drop in a stair-like gradation. 

(252.) Write the month in letters and the date in figures; also take note of the 
cautions expressed in paragraphs 150 and 176. 

(253.) If a letter is written from a city having postal delivery, begin at about 20 of 
the scale, writing street number, post-office and State on the first line, and the date 
upon the next, dropping half-space, and indenting the second line five spaces of the scale 
beyond the point of beginning. Of course some taste can be displayed by proper abbre- 
viations. 

(254.) If the name of the person lurltten to be long, and the address short, it may be 
expedient to spread the latter by spacing between the letters ; only remember to make 
three taps of the space-bar between each word when the letters are so separated. (See 
p. 68.) 

(255.) Then again, sometimes the second line proves too long, even though con- 
densed as much as possible ; and it is necessary to drop to a third line, indenting so as to 
preserve the terraced look, if we may use the expression. 

(256.) The body of the letter should be well arranged, due attention being given to 
mechanical and rhetorical effect. The Dear Sir or Gentlemen should drop a full space, 
if it is to be a full-spaced page, otherwise not ; and the beginning of the first paragraph 
dropped in terraced fashion from the superscription. 



80 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(257.) After the first, all paragraphs should begin at 5. Some prefer 10, but the 
effect is not so good in a letter, though it may sometimes answer in a legal docu- 
ment. 

(25S.) For further and general information regarding the appearance of a type- 
written letter, have page 61 described. 

(259.) A short subscription {Yours truly) shoul^i begin at about 1^5; but if it be 
Yours respectfully, written at length, it should begin farther at the left. 

(260.) It will be observed, therefore, that considerable taste can be displayed in the 
structure of a letter, and due attention has to be exerted outside of the treatment of its 
literary features. The seeing operator can judge with the eye, but the blind have to re- 
member ; and having a knowledge of the capacity of the machine, and the limits of the 
page, need to exercise great vigilance to provide for everything that occurs out of the or- 
dinary — hence the particular directions given above. 

TO ADDRESS ENVELOPES. 

(261.) Insert the envelope at the left, even with the end of the rubber cylinder, hav- 
ing the back, or writing surface, away from the operator, and the flap down. Roll it in so 
that the upper edge can scarcely be felt between the rollers ; though, of course, a large 
envelope must be admitted further. 

(262.) Begin the address at about 20 — or according to its length — and proceed as in 
addressing a letter. Some prefer to insert at the right ; in which event the writing must 
begin at a different point of the scale. Reference is made to the Remington machine. 

(263.) If the envelope is inclined to lift from the cylinder, press the holder tightly 
upon it ; and if the alignment is bad, follow the directions of paragraph 99. 

TABULAR WORK. 

(264. ) This chapter does not recommend tabular work of a very complicated char- 
acter ; that is, for quick accomplishment ; although in view of the remarkable work that 
has been done by the blind it is hardly fair to presume that anything in typewriting is 
beyond the ability of this unusually gifted class. As figures in columnar arrange- 
ment, and skips about the page, require constant reference to the scale, it must follow 
that complex woi'k upon the machine can only be done slowly.* 

A specimen of tabular work executed by a blind person is exhibited on page 82. 

* Supt. Dow speaks of having filed a nick in the front scale at the middle point, and we have 
elsewhere suggested a raised scale. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. §1 

(2ri5.) In conclusion it seems fitting to pay a tribute to the skill displayed in type- 
writing by a class so heavily handicapped. The blind have accomplished wonders, and 
with better facilities within reach they will do still more. Mr. Smith says: "Take two 
persons of equal ability, one sighted and the other blind, and I will guarantee the latter 
will surpass the other in attaining facility in the use of the machine within a given 
time. " And speaking from the other point of view we would remark that no person in 
the full possession of his powers will think of begrudging the opportunity for bread- 
winning held out by the typewriter, when the world is wide for the seeing, but those 
who work in darkness have but a narrow field of labor. 



82 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



Number of Teachers employed, with Teachers* Wages, 
from 1879 to 1888. 





Teache 


rs. 


Wages 


per month. 


Years. 


Male. 


Female. 


Male. 


Pemal 3 o 


1879, 


1,133 


7,462 


$67„54 


$30 .,59 


1880, 


1,134 


7,727 


85.54 


38.4© 


1881, 


1,079 


7,858 


102.90 


32. SS 


1882, 


1,038 


8,197 


103.33 


41.90 


1883, 


1,058 


8,340 


103.02 


44.18 


1884, 


1,061 


8,480 


120.72 


43.85 


1885, 


1,060 


8,610 


111.23 


43.97 


1886, 


1,033 


8,693 


116.85 


44.93 


1887, 


1,010 


8,887 


119.34 


44.88 


1888, 


901 


9,222 


108.88 


45.03 




Normal Teac 


hers. 






Attended 








Normal 


Schools, 


Graduates. 


Years. 




Increase 




Increase, 


1879, 


2,228 


_— _ 


1,911 


___ 


1880, 


2,236 


8 


1,831 


20 


1881, 


2,416 


180 


2,037 


108 


1882, 


2,581 


165 


2,155 


188 


1883, 


2,744 


163 


2,240 


85 


1884, 


2,866 


122 


2,392 


152 


1885, 


3,003 


137 


2,420 


28 


1886, 


3,134 


131 


2,533 


113 


1887, 


3,248 


112 


2,677 


144 


1888, 


3,373 


127 


2,389 


12 



The above was prepared by a pupil of the 
Perkins Institution, Boston, a young man to- 
tally blind, who had operated the typewriter 
less than a year. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. '83 



PREFACE TO THE MACHINE EXHIBITS. 

(266.) The -nTiting machines discussed in this volume are all standard productions. 
They represent the highest inventive skill and the best workmanship. Each is capable 
of swift action and fine work ; every one has its admirers — all are good. 

(267.) The similarity of keyboards, and the ready adaptability of the finger method 
of Practical Typewriting to them all, has been the incentive to give to this issue what 
may be termed universal features. 

(268.) But these exhibits do not supply the place of the customary book of direc- 
tions, being only intended to supplement the same by fuller explanation and application 
of such points as deserve more than a passing notice. Moreover, these chapters were 
prepared with the assistance of the makers of the machines, and great care has been 
exercised to make them helpful to the enquirer. 

(269.) Teachers will find interesting features for instruction all through the book. 
For instance, very primary advice and finger exercises can be found in the chapter for 
the blind ; extended Avord practice in the Remington exhibit ; a legal form with detailed 
fingering in the Hammond ; some names of cities in the Yost ; sentences and letters in 
the Smith Premier, and general illustrative examples among the f ac-simile ; the Bar- 
Lock gives commendable general and particular instruction, and exhibits a tine pictuie 
of the Spanish caravel " Santa Maria," executed entirely on their machine ; the Caligraph, 
some special finger work and long words readily written, besides sentences and letters. 



84 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



THE HAMMOND. 

FINGER METHOD. 

(270.) The Hammond typewriter referred to principally in the following pages is; 
the new pattern having the "Universal" keyboard, so called, an arrangement of letters 
which brings it entirely within the scope of this method. Although the original 
Hammond, termed tho "Ideal," has an excellent keyboard, and one susceptible of an 




THE HAMMOND MACHINE. 



all-finger treatment, it is perhaps unfortunate that this scheme of fingering does not 
strictly apply, and, therefore, the within instruction is limited to the more recent version 
of the machine. Apart from the keyboards the machines are almost identical as regards 
mechanical features ; and as the following a keyboard receives is sometimes a matter of 
personal preference, we submit what we do without praise or disparagement of either 
arrangement, having the sole aim to assist the enquirer to reach practical results 
according to the best advice we have to offer. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



85 



(271.) The " Universal" keyboard in its essential features so resembles that of the 
diagi'am on page 5 that the same cut can be used for illustrative purposes. [See also 
diagi'am below.] 

(272.) The letters TY, GH, VB mark the division of the keyboard into right and 
left hand territory, and the same rules of fingering apply as are set forth in paragraph 
19, and illustrated by the finger exercises on pages 6 to 27 inclusive.* 

(273.) The space-bar is depressed by the right thumb, although we can see no 
objection to its being tapped by the left if occasion requires. 

(271.) The depression by a finger of the shift-keys tends to disturb a consistent 
finger method, but less difficulty in this regard comes with the Hammond, because 



t^_ X.^' ;c^ ^ V^ 

[fcAP)) ((©) {^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ (Q) ^ 



DIAGRAM OF KEYBOARD. 

of the easy action of the shifts. When the left fourth finger is upon the shift the letters 
in the left division of the manual are attacked as follows : q 1 1, w s I, e d c. r f v, without 
removing the little finger from its position. Other capitals are attacked by the right 
hand. [See also paragraph 26.] 

(275.) The very beginner can find excellent primary practice in the word exercises 
for the bhnd, paragraphs 243 to 246 inclusive. 

(276.) Although it is well understood that the strictness of rules of fingering is 
relaxed somewhat when words are combined into sentences, yet the deviations from 



* Attention is directed to the exceptional fingering of N and H when occurring before Y, the 
second finger being used. 



86 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



exact procedure are not frequent, 
made at random : — 



This can best be shown by the following selectioi;. 



3 14 13 

.State 



31 

of 



243 312 321 3 

Massachusetts, 



232111 31 

County of 



1 3 
BE 

4 4223 

A pr i 1. 



2 1 

IT 



3 2 1 3 2 

Suffolk. 

2 

1222 213232 
EEMEMBEEED, 



3 

s s. 



114 1 

that 



31 

o n 



1123 
this 



32 3 

18 90 



13 13 2 3 

before 



113 
the 



2 1 12 13211 



3 11 

1 0th 
2 

3 2 4 



2 4 1 
day 



3 1 

o t" 



undersigned 



a 



2 3 14 2 1 
no t a r y 



421322 321121 42 2 132 113 232111 31 311 32 413233422 
public, within and for the County of Suffolk aforesaid, 

2 



42133143 1 2422 
personally came 



234241 32 134133 31323 4213S143 1 

Isaiah Sweetwater, who is personallv 
3 



21331 13 13 


13 13 113 3423 431331 31 


33 2 


14 2 2 2.3 


known to me 


to be the same' person wh 


s e 


name is 


3213212132 13 


113 132313211 2131212311 


31 


3 2212 11 


subscribed to 


the foregoing instrument 


of 


writing. 


4 3 113 1321 3 3 


1132321 413 41213 3321121 


112 


3 4 2 3 13 


as the obligor 

2 


therein, and acknowledged 


the 


same to 


13 123 123 421 422 23 132 113 4114 


3 32 


113 2 321 


be his free act and deed for the purp 


o s e 


t h e r e i a. 



2 31123132 
mentioned. 

21 123121321 

IN TESTIMONY 



3 13 2 3 3 1 
WHEREOF 



14 2 2 
h and 



4 12 
a n d 



41 23 2 1 
affixed 



2 1 

m y 



3 1 22 4 3 
official 



14 13 

have 

3 2 43 

seal. 



13 232113 
hereunto 



3 2 1 
set 



2 1 

m J 



4 1 
a t 



2 1 

my 



3 1 2 3 2. 2 1 

office in 



13 3 131 113 241 412 1343 12231 41312 3321 31 

Boston, the day and year first above written. 



(277.) From the above it will be seen that only one, variation from regular 
•fingering had to be made, namely, in passing from the words "my " to " hand. " Here 
a jump, rather than a gliding movement, occurs ; but the proportion of such irregulari- 
ties is commonly so small that words may generally be regarded as the syllables of a 
great sentence, wherein the passage from one to another is hardly broken — even by the 
thumb action upon the space-bar, which a,fter a time becomes entirel}^ mechanical. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 87 

HAMMOND HINTS. 

(278.) As the impression hammer is impelled by a spring, and as the key-levers 
merely operate to release this spring, so that it can exert force of impact, it will be un- 
derstood that no greater force need be used to depress a key than is required to bring the 
type-Avheel to the printing position, and to release the said spring. If the touch of the 
lever machines can be compared to that of a piano, that of the Hammond more nearly 
resembles organ action, being legato rather than staccato. 

(279.) The keys operate to oscillate the type-wheel, so as to bring such character as 
may be wanted opposite the hammer'; therefore it is essential that the keys be entirely 
depressed, otherwise the types will fall short of their printing position. 

(280.) Although, in order to produce perfect impressions, it is necessary to fully 
depress each one of the keys, it should not be presumed, on account of operation in this 
manner, that speedy manipulation cannot be accomplished. The proper touch is to 
place the finger upon the key and press it downward firmly until there is a slight resist- 
ance. In slow procedure this may be described as a blow and a pause, but after the 
"knack" of it is acquired the separate steps are not noticeable. This does not necessi- 
to.te sloAv operation, but the keys may be depressed as fast as desired ; in fact, no opera- 
tor has been found capable of overtaxing the machine. 

(281.) The figure-shift key should be noted. This is operated by the left fourth fin- 
ger, and serves to introduce many new characters. 

(282.) The shifts are easily operated by the little finger, as they do not move a 
heavy carriage— only lift an exceedingly light type- wheel controlled by an elastic spring ; 
on account of which, weak fourth fingers wall not be inconvenienced. 

(283.) Very fine tabular work can be executed upon the Hammond, and it can be 
done with great facility. The writing comes in view after the first line has been printed, 
and processions of figures are easily kept in alignment for this reason — one rank being 
Avritten according to the one above, rather than by reference to the scale. 

(28i.) The scale is read as follows : On old Ideal machines, from the w^hite mark 
cut in the forward end of either side of the key-shield ; and on late Ideals and Universals, 
from the metal indicator on either side of the machine underneath the ribbon spools. 
The nxmibers up to 50 appear on the right side of the machine, and those above 50 on the 
left side. It is not necessarj^ to use the scale for making corrections or for placing words 
or figures underneath others written one or tAvo hues above ; the notch in the ribbon 



88 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

shield and the line guides can be used with more convenience and accuracy. The oper- 
ator learns that, by placing the paper in the extreme left side of the carriage, providing 
always for the same left margin, the impressions made during the step by step movement 
of the carriage are indicated on the scale from one upward. Paragraphing can be uni- 
formly done the saine as with all other writing machines ; likewise the placing of 
words or sentences in the center of sheets for headings, etc. , is done under rules (^ 89) 
familiar to all operators. Much inconvenience and time can be saved, when it is- 
desired to place a word or sentence in the center of a sheet, by writing the same on a 
strip of paper and placing the strip with the hands in the middle of the sheet inserted in 
the machine, on which the phrase is to be written. After the word or sentence thus 
written upon the strip has been placed in a central position on the paper, the carriage 
should be moved to the left or right until the first letter of the word or sentence appears 
immediately above the notch in the ribbon shield. The strip can then be removed, the 
paper to be written upon lowered to the proper position, and the sentence written. This 
will save making a calculation for determining the center of a word or sentence, and will 
frequently prevent errors. 

(285.) Always insert two sheets of paper [according to the book of directions] one, 
preferably a thick sheet, serving for backing. Two sheets are not absolutely necessary, 
but work written where two sheets are inserted iu the machine will be found to appear 
more attractive. 

(286.) Very little oil is necessary on any part of the machine. A little around the 
pins by which the type- wheel is driven, and a drop on the escapement mechanism occa- 
sionally may be required. The type-wheel should every few days be removed, and the 
steel bushings thoroughly cleaned ; after which they should be lubricated by being; 
rubbed with an oily rag. None but the very best watch or clock oil should be used. 
In oiling the parts of the machine it is not advisable to use an oil can ; a small camel's- 
hair brush, or small wire dipped in the oil, will lubricate, the pa,rts amply. 

(287.) The hammer and carriage springs bear a close relation one to the other, and 
when the blow of the hammer is increased for any reason the carriage motion should be 
tested to see if it is affected by the change. It generally is, and its tension should be 
increased or decreased accordingly. 

(288.) A shift-key and letter can be depressed simultaneously ; or the fourth finger 
can be allowed to rest on the shift, and the letters of the left-hand division of the manual 
may be attacked by the first, second and third fingers of that hand. Of course right- 
hand letters are operated by the right hand always. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 89 

(2S9.) Tne rubber strip stretched from one carriage end to the other should be first 
attached by the outer hole in the right end, and then as it sags attach by the inner one. 
If the loAver parts of the characters print faintly it is evidence that the impression strip 
is not stretched enough. Should it adhere to the paper, dust with chalk. 

(290.) Four variations in line spacing are controlled by the milled nut at the left, 
called the line-feed regulator. Be sure and turn it entirely round at each change, which 
is proved by engaging the notch in the nut with the pin beneath at the end of each turn. 

(291.) Keep the ribbon-shield clean, and remove when making a stencil for repro- 
duction work. For tabular work the notch in the shield dispenses in a great measure 
with use of a scale. 

(292. ) Upon insertion of the paper, drop same entirely to the bottom of the cylinder, 
and it Avil] be found to be held straight for an even beginning. A long or very wide 
sheet should be partly rolled before insertion. 

(293.) The printing may be examined by turning the feed-roll knob toward the 
wi-iter, and if the spacing is the widest, the printed line' will show below the ribbon. 
The better way, however, is to push back the paper with the finger just in front of the 
impression strip. 

(29-4.) Omitted letters may be inserted after placing the blank space underneath 
the notch in the ribbon shield and the line in which the letter is to appear even with the 
line guides on either side of the shield. The last letter printed can be easily seen by 
pressing the paper forward with the finger below the erasing plate. If the paper has 
been fed up more or less before the discovery of an error or omission, it should be fed 
down by turning the feed roll, first lifting the feed pawl handle on the left side and rear 
of carriage. If then, on releasing the pawl handle and giving the final and downward 
pressure to the same, or turning the feed roll knob forward in order to insure the full 
engagement of the feed pawl in the teeth of the ratchet wheel, the paper is thereby 
slightly shifted so that the lower edge of the line of writing is either a little below or a 
little above the line guide, it can be brought to the desired position — if two sheets have 
been inserted as recommended — in the following manner : If the lower edge of the line 
of writing is below the line guide, turn the front roll by hand so as to move the paper up 
until the proper alignment is secured. If it is above, hft the pawl handle again and 
turn the feed roll so as to bring the lower edge of the line of Avriting a little below the 
line guide. The pawl handle should then be released and depressed, and if the lower 
edge of the line of writing is still below the line guide, the paper should be raised by 



so PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

slightly turning the front roll, as before described. The carriage may now be moveu to 
the proper place and the letter inserted. If the printed paper has been removed from 
the machine and is to be re-inserted to continue the writing or make a con-ection, it 
should be placed in the carriage in the usual way, but before the letters are printed it 
should be seen that one of the letters of a word ah-eady written appears centrally over 
the notch in the ribbon shield. The rolls should then be closed, and the paper fed up or 
down and adjusted by the line guide, as may be required to bi'ing it into proper align- 
ment. If manifolding is being done on the machine, and the paj^er is to be turned down 
to make a correction, the front roll should not be disturbed ; the adjustment to the line 
guide being effected in this case by pulling the paper by hand the necessary distance 
upward through the unseparated roUs. 

(295.) Manifold copies maybe taken as follows: Prepare the paper in the usual 
way, by laying down a sheet of manifold paper and then a sheet of carbon paper upon 
it- with the carbon surface downward, and continue until the necessary number of 
sheets have been arranged. Insert the paper in the machine, together with a sheet of 
ordinarily hard paper (that used for wrapping j3urposes being jsreferable) behind the 
paper prepared for manifolding, and proceed with the Avork. Operators Avho do not 
desire to use a thick sheet of paper in the carriage with the paper to be written upon, 
can accomplish the same result by placing a thick strip of paper, or a sheet of thin 
paper folded several times, ia front of the impression strip, allowing it to rest on the 
rolls and not in the grip of same. When the paper inserted in the carriage is lifted line 
by line, the strip of paper will not be lifted, but Avill remain in the position where placed. 
As tliere are various kinds of carbon in the market, and as carbon manufactured for 
type-bar machines seldom gives good results on the Hammond, it is necessary to obtain 
carbon adapted to this machine ; and if Hammond carbon cannot be obtained from the 
dealer of whom they purchase their typewriter supplies, application should be made to 
the company or its agents. If tissue copies are wanted, the double carbon paper should 
be used, and alternating with each of the tissue sheets, so that an impression may be 
made on both sides of the tissue sheets. The hammer spring thumb-nut at the right of 
the hammer (from the i-ear) should be used to give a stronger blow when it is required. 
Should the carriage move sluggishly, if the tension of the hammer spring has been in- 
creased, it will be necessary to increase the tension of the main spring. 

(296.) Some operators seem to be under the impression that carbon copies can be 
taken upon any gi-ade of paper and on any thickness. The best manifold results are usu- 
ally obtained upon soft paper, and wove paper is preferable to laid. When a number of 
copies are required, very thin paper should be used, and the smoother the surface the 
better the result will be. Some operators also think that the original can be written 



PRACTICAL Tl'PEWElTIXG. 91 

jpon thick paper, and that carbon copies can be made on thinner sheets af paper 
placed back of the same with etpially as good results as though all of the sheets 
Avere thin. This is an erroneous idea, as Avill be readily understood when it is noted 
that by rising a thick sheet of paper for the original the outlines of the letters are made 
heavier in proportion to the thickness of the paper, and necessarily the carbon copies 
will not be nearly so sharp as if the first sheet were a thin one. 

(297.) To prepare a stencil for the Mimeograph or other duplicating device that 
employs paraftine paper : Exceptionally beautiful results by these processes can be 
obtained if the operator will carefully follow the directions as follows,— Eemove the ink 
ribbon (or slip to the front of the type-wheel guard), rubber impression strip, and ribbon 
shield from the typewriter. Put the stencil sheet into the typewriter with the perforat- 
ing silk only back of it, Avithout the paper " backing."' Use the hammer at its greatest 
tension, and in doing this it may be necessary to give the main spring one more turn, as 
in manifolding. Clean the type-wheel before commencing to write. Parties having 
machines numbered below 0,000 should have them fitted with large main and hammer 
springs. All machines above that number contain the necessary appliances for execut- 
ing stencil' Avoi'k. It is important, however, for all parties desiring to execute i:)erfect 
stencil work to use the Mimeograph wheels, which can be obtained from the Hammond 
Company, or its agents, for the usual price of the ordinary wheels. Such wheels should 
be used for stencil Avork exclusiA'ely, as those for ordinary Avriting seldom produce a per- 
fect stencil. It is also adA-isable to use paraffine paper Avhich is knoxvn to he adapted to 
the Hammond machine. 

(29S.) When using paper that is very Avide, say double the width of the carriage, 
roll before insertion, and if it is tabular Avork, make the columns of figures at the left ; 
then roll again, and insert in the carriage so that the right of the paper can be printed, 
and proceed as before, being very careful to adjust so that the continuation of the lines 
shall be uniform with the first portion Avritten. 

(299.) When the capital-shift is depressed, and perhaps fixed by the catch, the 
figure-shift may be depressed in addition without releasing the other shift. 

(300. ) Observe that the period of the Universal machine adapts itself to either the 
shifts or the normal condition of the manual ; also note the variety of characters for 
mathematical work and the reference marks. 

(301.) Erasures may be made upon the nickeled surface just back of the paper, mov- 
ing the line of Avriting to that point. AVh en restoring to printing position be careful to 
follow the line-guide. 



92 ^PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

GENERAL FORM OF AGREEMENT. 

THIS AGREEMENT, made the first day of August, 1890, between 
Isaac E. Hill, of Tarkio,, County of Atchisonj, State of Mi^-GOLiri, of 
the first part, and John Smith, of Fairfax, Mo ., of the Gejond part: 

WITNESSETH, that the said Isaac E.. Hill, in consideration of 
the agreement on the part of the second part, herei'naf ter contained, 
contracts and agrees to and with the said John Smith, th:it he will 
deliver, in good and marketable condition, at the village of Corn- 
ing, Mo., during the month of Septertiber, of this year, one hundred 
tons of prairie hay, in the following lots, and on the following 
specified terms; namely, twenty- five tons by the 7th of September. 
twenty- five tons additional by the 14th of the month, twenty- five 
tons more by the 21st, and the .entire one hundred tons to be all 
delivered by the 30th of September. 

The said John Smith, in consideration cf the prompt fulfilment 
of this contract, on the part of the party of the first part, con- 
tracts to and agrees with the said Isaac E. Hill, to pay for said 
,hay Six Dollars per ton, for .each ton as soon as deliverea. 

In case of failure by either of the parties hereto, it is here- 
by stipulated and agreed that the party so failing shall pay to the 
other One Hundred Dollars as fixed and settled damages. 

.In witness whereof,^ we, have hereto set our hands, the day and 

year first above written.. -r-.^.^ r^ --rrr 

• ISAAC E. hILL» 

JOHN SMITH.; 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 93 

SPECIMEN OF COURT TESTIMONY.. 

Mr. Lovely. Q. Dr.. Andrews,^ what is your profession? A. — 

Physician and surgeon. 

Q. Of how many years practice? j^A? Will be fourteen next 

February. 

Q., Where did you graduate, Doct'or? A. — At Bush Medical Col- 
lege,- Chicago.- 

Q; U'hat preparation did you make for the profession besides 

ycur actendance at college? A. --Well, after graduating at Rush I 
practiced two or three years and went to New York and^took a ful} 
course in Bellevue Hospital Medical College, and graduated there 
again; and after practicing a few years :iiore--two years mor-e--l 
went off to Chicago again and. was-there tliree months, in the dif- 
ferent hospitals and taking private courses,, not in any particular 
college .; 

Qi Well, Doctor^, you have been to Europe? A. Yes>;, I prac- 
ticed tlien again three or four years, and went to Europe and took 
a course of n; ediclne in Berlin and Vienna. 

q; Attended the lectures and clinical course-s there in the 

hospitals? A... Yes;' my course there was entirely clinical.: I 

did not enter the colleges at all^ but took private clinical 
courses., 

Q. State whether or not you have seen Mr^g Harrold; the plain- 
tiff in this case? A Yes;- I first saw him this niorning. 



94: 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



State of Ohio, 
Cuyahoga County, 



EDWARO PLACE 

vs. 
ROBERT GRIiVES. 



In the Court of Cowwon Pleas of Cleve- 
land,- of November Term, A. D., 1882. 
No. 232.. 



GEORGE PHILLIPS, of Cleveland,, in said County, the lawyer and 
attorney of Edward Place, of said city, county and state, butcher,? 
on oath declares that the said Edward Place has-a demand against 

THE within WAMED ROBERT GRIMES, U?0M THE CAUSE OF ACTION STATED IN 
THE WITHIN WRIT, WHICH THIS DEPONENT BELIEVES TO BE JUSTLY DUE, AND 
U=ON WHICH HE EXPECTS THAT THE SAID EDWARD PlACE WILL RECOVER 

Twelve Dollars and fifty-thre'e cents, or upwarus; a,\'d that this de- 
ponent HAS reasonable CAUSE TO BELIEVE THAT THE SAID ROBERT GRIMES 
is ABOUT TO DE.^ART BEYOND THE JURISDICTION OF THE COURT TO WHICH 
SAID WRIT IS RETUF.NA3LE, THAT IS TO SAY, INTO THE PROVINCE OF ONTA- 
RIO, Canada, and not to return TitL after judgment may probably be 

RECOVERED IN SAID SUIT, SO THAT HS CANNOT BE ARRESTED ON THE FIRST 
execution [if any! which may be' issued in SAID SUIT. 

GEORGE PHILLIPS. 
SDBSCRIBED and sworn to this twenty-third day of November, A.) 
£)., 1882, before me^, 

.QUARTUS K. RICE, 

Notary Public. -■ 



PFs, ACTIO AL TYPEWRITING. 



Palace Hotel, San Francisco, 
Feb . 6th, 1??90. 



lESSaS-.. SICHAEDS & DE JONES, 
Kew York City. 



.'Gentlemen:- 

I arrived in San franci3Co yesterday, after a somewliat 
3'. cajrreeable trip, tlie roads having been much obstructed by land- 
slides, and bridges carried away by tlie swollen streams. I have 
called- upon so;;ie of the trade, and judging from the low stocks of 
goods on hand, I shall take some large orders. There is a better 
ieeling an-. or.g the leading houses than I expected. I called upon 
Messrs. J. M. H. & Sons, as instr'ucted by you, but was not favor- 
ably impressed with them, their store and stock having a very slack 
appearance, and showing a loose way of doing business. I could not 
learn of their doing the amount of business represented, nor could 
I obtain satisfactory, information as to their standing. I. should 
hesitare about filling their orders without a guarantee. Our new 
go.ods are appreciated, and orders exceeding my anticipations have 
alread.v been taken. 

Will leave for Chicago on the 9th inst.,and in the meap- 
time shall keep you informed of what is done here. 

Very respectfully yours. 



<>6 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

547 Fifth Ave., Albany, N. Y. 
January 5, 1873. 

Messrs. A. T. Stewart & Co., 
New Yonk City. 

Gentlemen: 

Enclosed find Post Office Order for Twenty-five Dollars 

[$25.00] for which, please send by A-nerican Express, the following 

goods: 

2 Lancaster Table Spreads, [$3.50], $7.00 

4 Prs. Alexandre Kid Gloves, [$2.50] No.6i, 

Brown, Green, Yellow, Black, 10.00 

8 Yds. Calico, Brown, with small figure, [25(?] 2.00 

12 " " White, " " pink dot 

figure, [25(?] , .- 3.00 

2 Linen Handkerchiefs, [50<2'] , 1.00 

4 Prs. Lady's Cotton Hose, [50<f ] , No. 9, . . . 2.00 

$25755 

Your earliest attention will greatly oblige. 

Yours truly, 

MRS. JAMES. H. BROWN.. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



97 











T) 






o 


o 


o 


IN 


lO 


w 


w 


w 














Q) 






•7-4 


LO 


lO 


<^J 


'^ 


tH 


CQ 


,H 














^ 




























U' 






to 








vH 


rH 


















C 






<C 




























■-1 




h- 





— i — 
































--1 




to 


































o 






13 




o 
o 


o 








lO 


CC 

o 






in 
to 






o 






ca 




■» 






















1 






-I- 





--I-- 













— 


— 


— 





— 





-^ 














o 


If. 


in 


o 


CD 


in 


in 


OJ 


o 


in 
















'*- 


s-H 


CAi 


^^ 


CJ 


cv 


o 


cv 


.(-t 


■* 












fj 






























■7-1 








vH 




.^-1 






















(D 








c9 


























A; 






























1 hJ> 


• 


n 


t- 





--J-- 














__ 

















-4 


) in 


S-, 


•ai 






























1 <i) 


ct 










o 


lO 


o 


!>- 


C73> 


o 


o 


in 


Cv; 


o 




1 3i 


0) 










0- 


t'l. ■ 


o 


c.> 


CV 


lO 


cv 


lO 


^H 


o 




1 o 


>5 






U: 


























I T-l 


<D 










rt> 




M 














'^ 




1 ^ 


/-; 





-H 





— 1 — 























— 








--I 


1 * 












c 


lO 


o 


lO 


w 


o 


1-. 


in 


in 


C' 




1 « 








1-1 




o 


c 


-' 


o 


w 


CO 


o 


•^_ 


o 


w 




1 0) 


•rt 










^H 




^-1 


















1 r^ 


S-( 










■es 






















1 ti£i 


■rt 


-a 


t-- 





-I-- 





— 








-- 


— 


— 











--1 


1 3:. 




m 










































o 


o 


lO 


t- 


Oj 


!>■ 


■o 


o 


03 


o 
















<* 


to 


^ 


xH 


cu 


xf 


.^ 


w 


O 


a> 












re 




rO- 




- 


















•1 


c 
c 

CD 




-i-. 




— 1-- 


O 
lO 

•£«- 

lO 


o 


■lO 

o 


lO 




in 


o 

.c. 




!>■ 


o 
o 






& 






^n 




tV 


w 








to 


o 


ca 


O 


in 




1— 


O 




-- 


ca 


— 1-- 


«5 
O 


lO 


— 


tO' 


— 


o 


in 


lO 


— 


LO 


-^1 




i:i 








-H-- 


<^ 


o 

ill 

O 


nJ 




rH 

O 
O 






o 




0) 








o 








o 


»^ 


o 


rH 


Oi 


G 


G) 


.Tj 












o 








o 


!S 


o 


'"' 


-(J 


3 

&H 


o 


ca 


. 


03 








(i 








o 




G 


3:: 


13 




^. 


ct 


.Q 


^ 








o 








■(J 


^ 


Q) 


•o 


;ii' 


13 

G 


(J) 


■p 


O 

C 


P 








w 








G 




> 


.TJ 


o 


O 




+J 


fca 


cb 








S3 








itj 


hJ 




f-1 


tn 


e 


(11 


W 




> 








-< 








rH 


f— i 


M 


c 


c 


<tf 


r!>; 




OJ 










Sa 








4^ 


rt 


■rH 


• o 


o 


•(H 


cd 




f-1 


•M 
















•=t: 


OD 


ca 


o 


O 


Q 


J 


s 


o 


m 





98 



PRACTICAL TYPEM'Rl TIXG. 















1 _ - -- 


* * 


1 * * .+ ,s- -i- :if ***:*** * :jt * * .t * * * * * * * * ■<,■ i^ * * + * + * * 1- i^ t * i- * * t -t f. * * -r + * t * * J. f * 


* 


.;. .[..i-.i- .1- -I- -I-. I- -I- -I- .1- .I-I--I- -I- -h •l--I--f- -I- 1- -I-I-I- •!• 


-!• * 


.[. .1. .i-.n.-i-.I. .1- •!■ I-'I-'I--I--I- -I- ■^ ■I-V-f'I-I- --f -1- -I--!--!--!--!- -I- I- 


** 


14- .i.4..[. .}. ■]■ -l-.h-h ■]■ ■!- •T--J-I- ■!• -I- +I--I- -f + -f-I-I- -I- 


* 


1 .J. .;..!. .J. .1- .[. ,1- -I. .1- .1-.4. .)-.l..l. .f. -I- .}. -I- .[. .J. .f. 4.. I- .J. .1- .1. .J. .1. .t .;, .J. .!.4..v 4. .j. .j. .;. .j. .;. ,^ l ,,. .j. .j. 


** 


1 .1. .i-.i..!- -I. -1- .I-.!-.!- -h -I- •I--1--!- -I- ■•!■ •t--I--t 'I^ - -- -I- ■1--I--I- -h 


* f 


1 .1- + ■^■^■^-•f■■I• -i- ■!■ -i- -t -i- -i- -i- -i- -i- -i- -i- -t- -t- -i- f- ■!- -t -i- -i- -i- •!■ ■!■ -i- 


* 


] 4. .i^.i- -I- ,1. .i-.i-.}. ,1- .1. .i-.i-.!. .1- .1- -i. + .i. .T- -h -I-.I-'F ■!■ 


* * 


1 ;)r ;(_• .:(.• .t * :t * * * * t * !(• t 4 +- * * t * ■(■ ***** * * * * * ■>■ * ****■(; * * * -1- * * * * * * * * i" * t * * 


* -^ 


I * * J; * I.- :| * -i; * t *- * * * if t * s * V * *■ t * 'i': * * * ^ + * * i' * * -i- * i- 1 > * i- -I' if * 


* * 


^ o o o o k ' ^ . ^ o o * •t'l' i- i- * ••< 


* * 


* 


** 


! * * * ■)■■ -i -f * * * * * * * * * * r f * * * .-■ * * * * :'r * * -i' * * * *• ■'* ->' -"!■ * * * ■'' ''■ * * * 


** 


" 'l-'I- * * r. 


* 


1 o o * * * * -I- -I- * * * ,;■ 


* * 


/J if -H- oo XX noooooo * * * ^■■i--i--i--h'i-'i--i--\-'\-{---i- * 


* * 


1 ,y.y 4+ o-o XX uuuuwuu ^^^ ^,_ .t,j..i-4.,j.jf..i..i-.i.4-.i..i. 4.**.y,f 


* 


} //'7 1 -1 oo XX * * ,^. * 


* -i 


] HUfflPi II ooooo XX ********** ** ******* ******* * 


•f * 


1 .s/ // U H :! 1 "1 6 o » XX ***** * * * * * * * 


* 


1 T "1 XX ;^t ************ * * * 


* :r 


1 H--'r + H1M1 XXXXXXXX ****** * * * * * * 


* * 


j +T-t|-l-iT XXXXXXXX ***.********** * ******* .(-*****(, 


* 

* * 


1 * * * * ******* ******* ******* ******* ******* * * * * * * * * * 


** 

* 


1 **** ******* ******* ******* ******* ******* ******* ** 


** 


' * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 


** 


j **** ** **** ** **** ** **** ** **** ** **** ** **** ** 


* 


J **** ** **** ** **** **.* *■* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 


** 


1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 


* :i 


1 *****-** ******* ******* ******* ******•.;.- ******* ****** * 


* 


{ ******* ******* ******* ******* ******* ******* ******* 


** 
** 


1 ********************************************* -is *******+ i: 


* 
* -s. 


j OOO OOOOOO OOOU^C OJOOCC u'»»LCCO COOOOC. OOwOOC. c.c 


* 


|00 OOO OOC C coco CO 000 C' OC-C coo OOO 


** 


\ O OOC COG OOC ceo C COG O OOC CO ccc 


* * 


1 coo ot;c c OOO o coo o ooc o ceo o coo 


* 


' 00 ooc 000 COOO OOO coo O OOO 


-t * 


I OOG GCOOOO COOOOC CC. COCO OOOOOG GOOOCC CCCOOO OC 


* * 
* 
** 
** 


1 ************************************************;(:***** + 


1 . *** *** , 


* 
** 


1 ****** ****** 


* * 


1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 


* 


j * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * + * * * * * * * 


** 


1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * .-i: * * * * * * * * * 


** 


1 * * * . * * * * * * * * * * *, * * * * * * * * * * * * * 


* 


1 * * * * * * * * * * ^. * * * * * * * 


** 


1 * * * * * * ■ * * * * * * 


** 


' * * * * ->- * 


* 
** 



* * 

* * - 

* * -• 



* * * * * * * * * * 



* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ■• 




THE YOST MACHINE. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 99- 

YOST. 

FINGER METHOD. 

(302.) In applying the finger method of this book to the Yost Writing Machine the 
first feature of interest is the doable key board, the capital letters being produced by 

another manual identical in its order with the lower 
case, but lifted above the latter three rows higher. 



(303.) The repetition of the letters is indicated 
by a change in the color of the keys. Seventy eight 
characters can be written, and the keyboard is very 
compact (6^ x 9 inches), considering its range. This 
latter feature is a help in its manipulation, and 
assists touch writing somewhat. The duplication 
of the letters does not, however, occasion complicated 
fingering, but only calls for a double application of the method. 

(304 ) For purposes of instruction the keyboard may be supposed to be divided 
vertically into territory foi' either hand, as partially illustrated in the diagram of page 
10, and the keys marking this imaginary division may be called " guides," as in para- 
graph 352. In the top bank of either manual TY are the guides ; the middle bank GH ; 
the lower, VB. These keys are attacked by the index fingers, and the remaining letters 
are operated by the four fingers as described in the said diagram. 

(305.) Particular attention should be given to the duty of the little fingers. It will 
be noted that the accompanying diagram sets forth ^^ 

the "Universal" keyboard. Essentially, Fig. 1. is a fpN^ >^?^ ^ ^9^ >n >s, >^ 
distinct character, and the letter 1 will not need to ^4i^® ^^® ® ® ^® 
be utilized. In other important respects the kej^- .^.m.^^.^^^^^^ 
board is umfoi'm with those ot the other machines .-».-»..«». .^ .^^^^^^^. 

®©0O®®®®O9 

treated m tins work. /-x/-n/-a/-n^-n^-n/-^^-^ .-s T^ 

®®©©©®®®(o)® 

©®©®®®®®®® 
(30G.) The touch of the Yost should be quick @@®(c)(v)®®@00 
and shai'p, though not necessarily hard. A light ttU^iJ^ 

staccato blow is preferable. AVhen properly attacked digram of keyb ■ard 

the type acquires a momentum which finishes the 

stroke, and gives a good and sufficiently clear impression. If the finger action is 
exerted as above, no collisions will occur, and very fast writing can be jjerformed. 



100 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(307.) Practice at the beginning should be upon the lower manual, it being generally 
more accessible. A command of the keyboard may be acquired by writing paragraphs 
21 to 24 or 243 to 246, supplementing the same by twenty-five working wholly 
upon the lower manual, and progi'essing by tasks of not too great length, being careful 
to follow the fingering exactly as indicated. When a familiarity with the position of 
letters has been gained, together with their correct fingering, and the same in words 
as given, the student may pass to the upper manual; and as a help to an easy progression * 
thereto we recommend the following : 

2341 1123211 1313 2413 1311 123 121 2 3 1 
(308.) Copy Brewery Note Mate Both New Buy Meet 

112 221 1 214 4213 221 1 13 2 1312 34124 413 

Burr Meyer Cup Zero Merry Veer Nettie X-traZulu 

1241 1431 1242 233 1233 4231 1 32 23132 123 2114 

Near Vast Beak Cell Vile Zest Bold Mould Vie Myra 

2 

123 22 2413 4314 2411 34243 241 23 4212 1223 

Bessie Carl Zora Maud X-mas Man Mix Zuni Nice 

1 

2341 122 1 112243 241312231 1221231 24143 1 

Milan Vichy Burial Cavendish British Catalog. 
1 a 2 

Eemember to not repeat the letter when passing from capitals to lower case, 

(309.) The same finger procedure applies to the ujDper manual as the lower, and if a 
capital or other character be written, it should be attacked by the finger distinctly speci- 
fied as belonging to the particular situation. 

(310.) The uniformity of this method makes it a simple one to acquire, and when 
cultivated from the beginning the skill of hand keeps pace with the understanding. The 
only exceptions are those covered by paragraph 41, also H and N fingered 2 when oc- 
curring before Y, and C by 1 when sometimes preceded by E. Words illustrating these 
variations, as also a few exceedingly rare ones, will be found in paragraphs 41 and 42. 

(311.) At the same time these are not exceptions in an aggravating sense, for very 
little attention is required to guard against them. The hand position regulates the 
matter, and in an awkward situation the next best finger serves. This permitting the 
play of preference is a distinguishing feature of the method. 

(312.) After the exercises above assigned have been mastered, as well as paragraphs 
26 to 32 inclusive, the student may take up the Prefixes (39) and Affixes (40) ; then pro- 
ceed to Miscellaneous Words (53), and afterward to sentences and general writing. 



PRACTICAL JYPEWRITING. 101 

(313.) * When words are builded into sentences there will be occasional lapses from 
the strictness of fingering (41), but only to escape the "hoppity-skippity" style of ma- 
nipulation, which latter we earnestly recommend the beginner to avoid. If the jumps 
common to the one or two-finger fashion of writing are taken, a "cast-iron" system of 
fingering might obtain ; but more graceful writing follows a gliding, legato action, and 
we are confident this style will give more enduring satisfaction. 

GENERAL INFORMATION. 

(31i.) Briefly stated, the features of the Yost Writing Machine are inflexible align- 
ment, detachable types and carriage, single scale, double manual, direct printing, novel 
inking arrangement, portability and general simplicity. 

(315.) First, remember to always keep the machine clean, inside as well as out. 
Never let erasings drop into the basket. When an erasure is necessary slide the 
carriage either to the left oi- right, as the case may require, so the erasings will fall out- 
side of the basket. 

(316.) The Yost differs materially in its inking apparatus from the other standard 
typewriters. The types, printing direct, are capable of producing the finest outlines, and 
no operator should be satisfied with less than this. A hard, soft or medium platen is fur- 
nished, according as many, few or no manifolds are desired. Most operators prefer the 
medium hard platen, so that they can manifold if desirable ; but it should be noted that 
there is less ' ' give " Avhen the type strikes against a hard surface, and, therefore, the 
imprint is likely to be less distinct than when a soft printing bed is employed. The 
backing-sheet is appropriate for the Yost, and with the hard platen it is always neces- 
sary to insert two sheets of medium weight paper at a time, or say, three sheets of thin. 
If this is done the complaint cannot be made that the types " are not on their feet. " 
The backing sheet also serves to preserve the platen. 

(317.) If the type does not ink, it will not print ; therefore it is imperative that the 
character returns to the pad freely at every stroke. If through friction a difficulty arises, 
clean the point of friction ; and if the double link of a type-bar becomes pressed together, 
relieve it by gently forcing apart with a screwdriver, making all the joints work freely 
and easily. 

♦The rarity of such deviations is illustrated by paragraph 276, pages 85-86. 



102 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(3 IS.) The print should be uuiforraly clear and distinct ; if it is not, something is 
the matter : either the operator taps the keys in a tardy, "weak-kneed" fashion, or the 
ink-jjad does not deliver freely. 

(319.) If the pad seems dry in any spot, take out the case containing it, scrape the 
surface with a knife blade, and squeeze it down a little to start the flow. 

(320.) Experience has shown that an ink-pad works better after it has been used a 
month or two ; because then, if the surface has not been disturbed, the types imbed 
themselves slightly, and extract ink over their whole surface every time. 

(321.) When changing pads, to introduce a different kind or color of ink, the careful 
operator will, before putting on the new pad, wipe off the surface of the types, which can 
be quickly done by forcing type through center guide, and rubbing with a brush. 

(322.) Ink pad in one piece. To Insert. — Lay the key plate on the keyboard, with 
bent edge down over the upper row of keys, to keep it from slipping. Press evenly on 
the plate to bunch the keys in the centre. Spi'ing the ends of the pad case apart ; start 
one end under the front scale and around under the guide holder at the back until it 
comes out from under the scale on the opposite side ; then, with the two ends together, 
return the junction of the case until it is under the guide holder and opposite the wide 
space between the type-bars. Snap into the rim on the clamp ring. 

(323.) The inking and printing system of the Yost gives better results upon quali- 
ties of paper which have not a hard, glazed surface. It should be understood that 
papers suited to one form of writing machine may not be best for another. The peculiar 
hard properties of the fine linen and bond papers seems to confine the tendency to spread 
of the coloring pigment of the ribbon machines. The kinds of paper last mentioned are, 
on the other hand, illy adapted for direct printing. What is required for the Yost is a 
paper of smooth finish, and a somewhat softer texture ; ordinary book paper exhibits the 
work beautifully. The operator desiring to reach the best results will do well to select 
his paper with the above in mind. 

(32i.) Do not make hai-d work of feeding the paper to the carriage. Let is rest 
squarely by its own weight between the rollers at the back, then turn it in by using the 
large finger wheel at the left. 

(325.) When feeding narrow paper apply the envelope or postal card guide at the 
right of the front carriage wheel, so that its left side shall rest under the left paper 
guide. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 103 

(326.) The bell may be silenced by setting at " " of the scale It is regulated by 
the small thumb-screw at the left. 

(327.) Use the finest oil for lubrication of this or any typewriter. The only points 
where oil will be needed upon the Yost are the back rail (wiping carefully after applica- 
tion), the front rail, the rack-teeth (applying with the finger), also possibly the key- 
stems where they pass through the bridges and base, should there appear to be friction 
there. 

(328.) The types should not be cleaned with oil, and none should be applied about 
the center guide at any time. When cleaning, hold the type in the guide by depressing 
the key, and wipe with a dry brush ; or, if benzine is used, let it evaporate before return- 
ing type to pad. 

(329.) If the carriage moves tardily it is more likely because the back rail needs 
cleaning than because more tension is required. The carriage tension screw shordd be 
used very sparingly ; two or three clicks should be enough to make a material effect one 
way or the other. 

(330.) The carriage can at any time be puUed to the riglit. To shde it to the left 
a few letter spaces, operate the space key. To run it quickly any distance to the left 
{I.e., toward the end of the line), press the release key at the lefL of the carriage, which 
will release the dogs. 

(331.) It it wiser to correct en-ors and supply omissions before removal of the 
paper from the machine. The liabit of running the eye over the work as each page is 
completed, and before taking out the sheet, is a good one to cultivate. 

(332.) A superior imprint may be secured by inserting, say, four sheets of rather 
thin paper at once ; this gives the impression a velvety look very agreeable to the eye. 

(333.) When directing envelopes the envelope clip will be found convenient. With 
the slot down, clamp this over the front carriage rod at the proper place to give you the 
desired margin at the left of the envelope or paper. 

(33-1:.) An advantage of the double manual greatly to be enjoyed is the facility of 
making addresses, titles, emphatic words, telegrams, etc., aU capitals. When doing 
tabulated work labor is saved by taking a strip of paper as long and wide as the 
scale and inserting in place of scale. 



104 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(335.) Upon this strip mark the points at which the various headings will come, 
and the carriage need not be raised so often. 

(336.) Use the front scale only for adjusting margins ; never for locating your place 
on the paper. Raise the carriage and set it by the pointer. 

(337.) Be sure and get all the advantages possible out of the pointer. It plays an 
important part in the event of supplying omissions, making corrections and maintaining 
the columnar arrangement of figure work. If it perchance mars the printing, bend a 
little so it will travel across the page a bit below the writing. 

(33S.) For Mimeograph work do not remove the pad, and do not apply vaseline, or 
other substances to the face of the type ; the ink itself does all the needful lubricating. 

(339.) Operators who have widely varying kinds of work will find it convenient to 
have at hand a selection of special type, such as French, German and Spanish accents, 
fractions, dipthongs, geometric signs and reference marks. These can be substituted for 
characters seldom used without much dilficulty. 

(340.) To change a type-face for any reason, extract the old with pliers, and insert 
new with top of letter to the front ; depress the letter key gently until the type comes 
through the center guide squarely, then strike a few smart blows and the change is 
made. 

(341 .) If it is desired to have the least noise possible, take off the shields from the 
back and sides of the machine. Of course it is better to do this when the machine is 
kept in a drop cabinet desk than if exposed to more or less dust. 

(342.) If two or more types collide and catch, which is a consequence of faulty 
finger action, the jam may be broken by striking a key actuating a type-bar on the 
opposite side of the basket. A little investigation will show Avhich keys are oppo- 
site one to another. If this does not accomplish it, tap the elbow of a lever, which will 
surely make the type-bar return to place. This may be done with a pencil conveniently 
at hand, and so save soiling the fingers. 

(343.) To make corrections after the paper has been removed, replace so that the 
bottom of the printed line will rest evenly and exactly upon the steel strip, technically 
called the " paper blade. " Turn the roller forward one cog or click, and adjust by the 
pointer ; remembering that the latter directs to the middle of a letter when one is printed, 
and, therefore, should point to the center of the place where the letter is to be in- 
serted. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 105 

(344.) In press copying be spai'ing of the water. The best results are obtained from 
a fine grade of cotton cloth, or, better still, from the cloths furnished by the machine 
people, which are of the same material that goes into typewriter ribbons- This should 
be soaked and wrung out smartly, when just moisture enough will be retained, and a 
comparatively inexperienced person can produce a successful copy. 

(345.) If blotters are used for copyingthey must be dampened euewZ?/. Our opinion 
is that the writing from a pad demands less water for reproduction than either ribbon 
or hand writing. Iji the case of a ribbon machine the copyist inspects the work, and if a 
fresh ribbon has apparently been used he gives the blotter less moisture. It seems rea- 
sonable that the same watchfulness should be exercised in connection with the pad. Note 
the delivery of the ink, and moisten or dry the blotter accordingly. A new pad obviously 
vequires less water for copying than one which has been in use eight or ten months. 

(346.) The center guide is one of the most interesting features of this machine, but 
the operator should never meddle Avith it under any circumstances. It should never be 
raised, lowe ^ or taken out. It will undoubtedly last as long as the rest of the ma- 
chine. It was never intended to be disturbed, and a little study will show that the more 
sheets of paper are inserted the nearer the center guide the outside sheet will come. The 
machine is adjusted so that the types Avill reach, and print plainly, on one sheet of thin 
paper, and when manifolding the situation regulates itself; inasmuch as every additional 
sheet makes the types strike much .harder, the printing surface being brought nearer to 
the guide, and the alignment is preserved, no matter how many copies are taken. 
As a matter of fact the type is not stopped by the guide, but by the paper against 
which it strikes. 

(347.) The carriage may be quickly removed by detaching the cord underneath the 
bearuig, raising the latch behind the paper table, and sliding off to the right. To restore 
to maclaine, reverse the process. 

NAMES OF PERSONS, CITIES AND STATES. 

2341211, 3 124 3 33 341 112. 3 133131 223223 

(348.) Clarence Brazos Xanthus Boston Mexico 

123131 131 41334 3 23 4 2 123 1221421 231 

Newton Venezuela William New Britain, Conn. 

231211131 112131 3 2 3 31 412 111 43 2141323 

Covington Burgoyne Cleveland Buffalo Charles 



106 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

143121323 123 1221 3212 2122413 121 244 323 

Baltimore New Brunswick Chicago Minneapolis 

2 2 

1324 2114 2311414 11 411213 123 4 1221214 

Vera Cruz Montana Byzantine Mississippi Virginia 

3 

22 4123 1123 3 132 123 1322 131 2423131 3 31313 

Memphis Brewster New York John M a r s t o n & Stone 

2 

3 431211131 241343 2 2 11 123 233413 231 3212211 

"Washington Kansas City New Orleans Connecticut 

2 

2432132124 2311433 2 32 12412 113 2 3 213 2412 

California Montpelier Frank Tlie Collins Manu- 

2 

142112211 23 3241 31 3 123 23112343 1221412 

facturing Co. Omaha St. Louis Montreal Richard 

2 

231 3 31 3 23 142314 213 11 342211 2332 41234 

Johnson & Co. Tacoma Duluth Springfield Phila- 
2 2 

2334124 413411 3 241 33 4434124 

delphia Atlanta Seattle Palatka. 

(3i9.) The compactness and light weight of this machine makes it convenient for 
carrying about, notably for the court reporter having a circuit extending over con- 
siderable territory, the traveling correspondent, and the i^rivate secretary to a traveling 



(350.) Attention is directed to the facsimile work performed on the Yost as pre- 
sented upon the following pages. The greater portion of this is not difficult to execute, 
now that a model is furnished, but the more elaborate borders on page 110 require ex- 
planation. Their compactness and symmetry dejoend partly upon a re-adjustment of the 
paper after each line written. This is easily done by the pointer. For instance, in the 
top border, after striking ( ) and U, and turning the roller forward one click, it will be 
neccessary to pull the paper down about tV of an inch, in order that the ) of the next 
line will touch the combination above. After one or two trials this becomes an easy 
matter. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



lOY 



LIFE INSURANCE IN VARIOUS COUNTRIES. 



Coimtries. 



Insurance in 
Force. 



Year' s 
Premiijjns. 



Year' s 
Losses. 



United States. 
Great Britain. 

Germany 

France 

Austria, 

Scandinavia. . . 

Russia 

Switzerland. . . 



,122.374,190 

,167,100,000 

628,623,102 

554,072,737 

191,843,009 

53.011,561 

47,925,979 

38,908,928 



$164,370,176 

70,672,069 

24,783.741 

22,017,407 

12,507,691 

1,722,207 

1,757,681 

1,317,467 



$87,309,377 

52,522,845 

10,599,257 

8,314,952 

2,828,842 

415,637 

584,707 

923,679 



ACCOUNT OF EXECUTOR: 

The first account of John Doe, executor of the last v/ill and test- 
ament of Richard Roe, late of New York, in the County of Nev^ York, de- 
ceased: 

Said accountant charges himself with the several amounts 

received as stated in schedule A herewith exhibited, $86,388.62 

And asks to be allowed for sundry payments and charges as 

stated in schedule B herewith exhibited, 20,720. 25 

Balance $65,668. 32 

(Signature) Executor. 

The undersigned, being all the parties interested, having exam- 
ined the foregoing account, request that the same be allowed without 
further notice. 

(Signatures of the widow and all the heirs and legatees.) 

Schedule A. 

Amount of personal estate according to inventory. ........... $60,480. 00 

Balance of former account 9,408.62 

.^ount. received from gain on sale of personal estate over 

appraised value, and from other property as follows: 16.500. 00 

Total 85,388.62 

Schedule B. 



Amount paid out and charges as follows: 

1. For funeral expenses and expenses of last sickness.. $1,260.00 

2. For charges of administration, 1,000.00 

3. For debts of the deceased ; ■ 8,460. 00 

4. For amounts paid to legatees and heirs, 10,000. 25 

Total 20,720.25 



ins PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



thtE easy chair. 



ACT II. 



Scene 1. 



(Scene: A sitting room» plainly but neat- 
ly furnlslied. Table C. Easy chair R.~ 
Grate fire L. ) 

(HENRY discovered at table looKing.over 
some old letters. ) 

Henry. 
I am sure it must be among tbese old letters. It's one of m;jt 
strong points that my memory in these matters always serves 
me well. If Rose could only know the sacrifice I have made 
for her, I'm sure she could not treat me so coldly. But 
soft! Here she is! 

(Enter ROSE. R.U.E. in street costume. 
Henry rises to greet her. She meet s . 
him indifferently. ) °^^ 

Henry. 



Good morning, Miss Moulton. You see I- have not forgotten 
my promise to you of last evening. My fingers are nearly 
v/orn out handling this antiquated stuff. 

(Pointing toletters. j 

Rose. 



I am sorry, Mr.Grannis, to have put you to so much trouble, 
but I am sure your own vindication demands it. 

Henry. 
You are right, and it shall be my first duty to satisfy you 
of my integrity. It is over five years since I have looked 
■upon my father's handwriting. 

(Again searching, among; letters. | 
Here is one from my brother Frank. Do you remember him? 

Rose. 



(Taking letter eagerly) Was he not in the 'army at one time? 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITIXG. 



lO'J' 



ymiyiiii^imiyjmjkiii^iiyiOy&iJiiiyjtiJsii 



il il 

i2 il 

?i ?i 



@ @ 



@ @ 



( M H H H ^ ( H ^ ( «■ ( H f ( ^ ( ^ ( f ( f 



fi 



if 









oooooooooooooo 



?)? ?)? 

4(4 4(4 

?)? ?)? 

4(4 4(4 

4444*^4444444444444444444444- 






i{)^ 



444.|444Aii.A44AAAliAAAMAA144. (j)^(})({)({)(})i{)i{)^ij)(J)$)({)(J)({)({)(})({;|({)({)i{)$i})iJ)(})|>i5) 



110 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



(((({{((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((({((( 

)))))))))))))))))))) 

(((((((({((((((((((( 



))))))))))))) 



{({({{{(( 



)) 
(( 



)) 



(( 






iTimmnm)mmrrrormiinTmnrnrmiJTirmmmrimmmmj7in'i^^ 







/mmAwmmm/mm^m 




EcScScScScScScScec &&&&&&&Sc8c Sc8c&&:&8o8c&& &&&&&&&&& 
& && && && & 

&&&& &&&& &&&& &&&& &&&& &&&& &&&& &&&& 
&& && && && 

&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&& &&&& 



))))))))))))))))))))))n))))))))))))))))))))))))) 
((({((((((((((({(({((((((({((((({(((((((((((((((( 
))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING, 



111 



- SMITH PREMIER. 

FINGER METHOD. 

(351.) In directing attention to the accompanying diagram, it is hardly necessaiy 
to remark that it represents only the Avhite keys, namely, lower case ; and that there is 
an upper manual above this of black keys, showing the capitals in exactly the same 
order of arrangement. 

(352.) A general idea of the fingering of the letters can be derived from this dia- 
gram. It will be noted that there is a division of the manual into right and left-hand 



^ffl\ 



:i^ 



G3 



v5 









THE SMITH PREMIER MACHINE. 



territory, and that along the line of this division the "guide" keys, so called, TY, GH 
and BN of the respective banks of letters, are to be attacked by the index fingers. The 
next vertical rows at each side of this imaginary partition are depressed by the first or 
second fingers, the first having the preference ; the second being principally used when 
a guide key precedes. The next two. rows are manipulated by the second and third 
fingers respectively of each hand as set forth in the diagram. 



112 



PRACTICAL TYPE WRITING. 



(353.) The fourth fingers have double duty with the last row of letters and the 
adjoining figures ; the latter, however, make light demand upon the fingers, having 
210 part in word structure. 

(354.) The sub-figures in the diagram denote that for some sequences of letters an 
alternation of fingers is permissible. For instance, A takes the third finger when followed 
by Q, and S takes the second after W. A few similar cases are covered by paragraphs 16 





Xji< 


eft IBCjaixcaL. 






DFtiglit .LJ-^zxca.. 


3^ 


q 


Fingering. 

3 2 2 1 

w e r 

3 


1 i 

1 1 


1 

y 


Fingering. 
1—2 2 3 4 

u i p 

2 ' 


^7 


4 


a 

3 


s d f 

•i 1 


g 


h 


j k 1 ; 


8 


5 


z 


X C V 

1 


b 


n 


m , . .:. 


9 



DIAGRAM OF KEYBOARD. 



and 41. On account of the vertical lines of the keyboard, when two guide keys are con- 
secutive the upper takes the second finger with more grace. 

(355.) This machine has two space-bars, one for each hand, which are designed to be 
depressed by the little fingers; for inasmuch as the thumb cannot be utilized, the short- 
ness of the fourth finger makes it the alternate for this space-bar duty. We grant tbat 
this usually weak member has enough work assigned to it upon the keyboard, but the 
remarkably easy action of this machine removes all grounds for complaint, and makes 
it possible for the little finger to perform the most exacting duty without much diffi- 
culty or fatigue. 

(356.) Theoretically it would seem proper to attack the space-bar ivith the hand not 
to be engaged with the first letter of the next word, but, as a matter of fact, operators upon 
the machines equipped with a double bar rarely use more than one hand. It becomes 
a habit to employ one hand, either the right or left, as the writer may prefer, and one 
spacer is habitually ignored. 

(357.) For the first task commit the above diagram to memory. Then next in order 
the keyboard as a whole, taking note of the figures and characters in the margin. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 113 

(358.) Practice at first wholly upon the lower manual, consulting paragraphs 243 
to 2-16 as well as 21 to 25 all inclusive ; dweUing upon the same until the letters and their 
proper attack are the property of head and hand. If the fourth fingers are weak, 
strengthen by practice upon paragraphs 201 and 202. 

(359.) Note that figure one is made by lower case el, and the cipher by capital 0. 
Do not pound the keys ; a very light touch will suffice. 

(360. ) Next proceed by way of paragraphs 20 to 32 inclusive ; after which pass to the 
upper manual, employing paragraph 308 as a step thereunto. Supplement this study by 
paragraphs 37 and 38. 

(361.) Practice also upon the exceptional fingering contained in paragraphs 11 and 
42 ; then Miscellaneous Words (51 to 58), and next in order 59 and 60, following same by 
the sentences given at the end of this chapter. 

(362.) In a book of such composite character we can only outline the work ; no very 
serious attempt has been made to assign tasks. The learner by self instruction will do 
well to study most those parts which come the hardest, and the teacher will lay out 
lessons suited to the varying capacity of his pupils. But be it personal investigation or 
study under the direction of an expert, do not undervalue the importance of correct pro- 
cedure. Work faithfully upon these exercises, and the period of labored painstaking 
will be succeeded by the time when attention to all these petty details will become me- 
chanical, and graceful writing follow as a matter of course. 

SMITH PREMIER INFORMATION. 

(363.) Features of this machine are :— Uniform and agreeable key action, ready 
visibility of the writing, economical ribbon feed, locking mechanism at end of line, 
double keyboard, single scale, removable platen, firm paper feed and easy release, 
carriage bearings and permanent ahgnment. 

(364.) Feed the sheet of paper between the platen and the paper-apron with the 
left edge always projecting beyond the end of the rubber roller about one-eighth of an 
inch, then turn the platen with the hand or the carriage lever, at the same time depress 
ing the paper finger with the other hand. The projecting edge of the paper shows its 
progress, and gives a hint when the bottom of the page is reached. 

(365.) The paper-finger, so called, is a great convenience when feeding the paper 
Do not forget its action. 



114: PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(3o6.) For the better preservation of the platen, a backing-sheet may be used. 
One of the thickness of ordinary writing paper will have no appreciable effect upou 
the alignment. 

(3G7.) To release the paper, give the paper-apron a slight movement toward 
the front, which allows a perfectly free Avithdrawal of the work, and is of obvious ad- 
vantage when removing many sheets with carbon between. Or pull the paper forth 
the usual way. 

(308.) The firm paper feed makes it possible to address envelopes and postal cards 
neatly. Insert at either right or left of the roller. The carriage will accommodat& 
a nine-and-a-half inch envelope. 

(369.) To insert an omitted letter before the paper has been removed, display the 
printed line according to directions, and move the carriage until the vacant space is oppo- 
site the index or pointer ; then return the roller to printing position and strike the 
desired letter. 

(370. ) The roller can be revolved freely in any direction by pressing the release-lever 
on the platen frame at the right with the thumb, and turning the roller with the fore- 
finger. This becomes necessary when correcting an error made several lines back, or 
when moving the paper either backward or forward for any purpose whatever. 

(371.) The machine has two widths of line spacing. The oscillation of the carriage- 
lever actuates the pawl at the rear right end of the platen. Below the pawl is a line 
space regulator, which in one position allows the roller to turn for one, and when in the 
other position two teeth, which accomplishes single and double line spacing. 

(372.) The lever or carriage-arm at the right is employed to draw the carriage back 
at tbe finish of each line of printing, and at the same time to turn the roller so as to feed 
the paper for a new line. This lever is best operated by the thumb of the right hand. 
Simply pulling to the right returns the carriage to point of beginning, but oscillating the 
arm makes the cylinder revolve one or more spaces for a new line. 

(373.) The carriage tension is regulated by means of the small crank at the left front 
of the iron machine frame. Turning this to the right increases the tension, and to the 
left diminishes the same, one or two revolutions being required to produce a perceptible 
effect. But do not meddle with any of the tensions until thoroughly acquainted with the- 
typewriter. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 115 

(374.) Do not tamper ^vith the key tension. The " rocking-shaft " mechanism pro 
•duces a most delightful action, and the machines are originally adjusted at a low tension, 
which is most proper for comfortable operation. It is hard to understand why anybody 
should prefer stiff action to easy, and for the beginner we recommend as light a touch as 
is compatible with the perfect movement of the machine. 

(375.) By depressing the small lever at the left front of the carriage the latter may 
be moved to any position, back and forth, upon the scale, and stopped at any desired 
point. The carriage moves freely to the right by simply pushing it at any point of 
contact. 

(376.) To inspect the writing, pull the roller forward with the left hand by means of 
the i^rojecting axle. The line of print will appear above the scale. Return with the 
fingers upon the axle, so as to ease it down the "ways." 

(377. ) To remove the platen, pull it half way forward with both hands applied to the 
axles, lift slowly and swing from the back of the carriage toward the front until the 
paper-apron appears at the front ; then drop the axles from the hooKs, being careful not 
to release your hold until the platen is entirely free from the machine. To restore, 
catch the axles in the hooks, having the paper-apron to the front, then rest the axle ends 
firmly upon the forefingers, place the thumbs on the rod back of the apron, throw the 
platen over, and with the thumbs guide until it drops into the carriage frame. 

(37S.) Easy regulation of either right or left margin is explained in the book of 
directions ; though, if it is desired to make a marginal note or correction, press the 
release-lever at the left front of the carriage, and the pajaer can go to the right to the 
utmost limit. When writing in the margin, be careful not to encroach upon the body 
of the work. The next line will begin at the point for which the margin is set, un 
less the lever is again exerted. 

(379.) When it is desired to set the back margin regulator in its normal position, 
disengage its teeth by aid of the lever at the back of the type-basket, at the same- 
time pushing the carriage to the right as far as it will go. 

(380.) The locking mechanism is adjusted so as to operate at 50, allowing a mar- 
gin at the right of 20 degrees of the scale. If this does not provide the proper stop for 
writing upon paper of note size, insert same at the right, and regulate the left margin.* 

*We are advised that the limit of both margins will be increased ere long, so that either can be 
operated at least thirty points. 



lie PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(&81.) An economical ribbon-feed is a feature of this machine, which utiUzes the 
ribbon across its whole width while printing each line. The return of the carriage sends 
the ribbon backward over the top of the basket, at the same time feeding it from spool 
to spool about one-sixteenth of an inch. The entire length' and width is exhausted of 
its pigment, there is no curling or bulging in any part, and the writing has a uniform 
appearance. 

(382.) Study carefully the directions with regard to changing the ribbon. The 
direction of the ribbon feed may be reversed at any time by running the carriage to 70 
of the scale, which permits the throwing out of one pawl, and adjusting the other for 
engagement with its spool. The ribbon will feed toward the spool which is in engage- 
ment with its pawl. 

(383.) The standard length of the typewriter ribbon is nine yards. Below is given 
a list of the variegated ribbons on the market: 

Black, copying Purple. Black, copying Green. 

Black, copying Blue. Purple Copying. 

Green Copying. Blue Copying. 

Ked Copying. Black, Non-copying. 

Blue Non-copying. Green, Non-Copying. 

Purple, Non-copying. Eed, Non-copying. 

Indelible Copying, writes Black, copies Blue. 
Hectograph, Lithograph. 

(384.) When making titles, etc., all capitals, it is more convenient when using a 
double keyboard machine to execute the letters with one hand, operating the space-bar 
with the other. 

(386.) As the carriage does not lift, in the sense generally understood, and it not 
being expedient to remove the platen every time a key becpmes filled with dirt, the brush 
arrangement for giving the types a universal cleaning comes in handily. To operate this 
bring the platen forward, leaving the work within the rollers, set the carriage at 70 
of the scale, which throws the ribbon forward and out of the way of the brush crank. 
Before beginning to turn the latter, see that every type-bar is back against the cushion. 
The improvement in the quality of ribbons as now manufactm-ed makes hut little 
cleaning of types necessary. Once a day will be found sufficient for the use of the 
cleaning brush. 

(386.) A character can be made above the general alignment (as 60°) or below it 
(as in chemical formute), by depressing the release at the front of the roller frame, and 



PRACTICAL TYPjE WRITING. IIT 

turning the roller forward or back with the same hand, holding firmly while the imprint 
is being made. In the same manner write e g e §, etc. 

(387.) Combination characters like a, c, R, M, etc., are written by holding down 
a space-bar while striking both keys. 

(388.) Stencils for the Mimeograph, or a similar duplicating process, are well made, 
and manipulation of the paper-apron when withdrawing the work from betAveen the 
rolls prevents wrinkling. General instructions regarding the preparation of such work 
may be found in paragraphs 177 to 182 inclusive. 

(389.) For manifolding, apply the hard rubber platen which is furnished for this 
purpose. This not only makes the work much easier, but it saves the softer platen from 
becoming indented by the unusually hard action of the types which manifolding 
demands. 

(390.) When it is desirable to give the platen many revolutions, either one way or 
the other, pull same to the front and turn with the thumb pressed upon the platen 
release-lever. The movement to the front exhibits the contents of the page, and shows 
how far to move the paper. 

(391.) Before oUing wipe off all accumulations of dust, etc. Oil the "ways " of the 
platen axles as often as may be necessary to keep them working smoothly. Oil once a 
month the grooves in which the carriage-bearing balls run. Also occasionally apply a 
veiy little to the ribbon-spool shafts. Oil the type- bar bearings with a splint at inter- 
vals of from sixty to ninety days. Keep the teeth of the feed rack slightly oiled, and at 
rare intervals put a drop in the oil-hole of the back feed-pawl arrangement. 

(392. ) Operators by the two-finger style sometimes hold the third and fourth fin 
gers curled up in the palm of the hand. We are told this unnatural position makes the 
little finger ache, if maintained for a long time, which is good argument in favor ol 
distributing the labor over the whole hand. 

(393.) The question of a tariff of rates for typewriter copying has always been £ 
debatable one, so much depends upon circumstances. Factors in the problem an 
these : Is the work difficult or easy ? Is the job a large or small one ? Are there 
more copies than one ? Have you had much work from the same customer ? Must i' 
be done in a hurry i Will it be dictated to the machine ? Have you got to supply cor 
rect punctuation, etc., when the copy is bad ? Will it be from shorthand notes taker 



118 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

in dictation ? All these are important considerations, and have a part in the fixing of 
rates. 

(394.) A fair schedule of prices, subject to change as one or another of the above 
factors exert an influence, is the following : 

Per 100 Wo ds. 

For one copy of less than 5,000 words 05 

Each additional copy by manifolding 03 

One copy, ordinary matter, 5,000 words or over 04 

Each additional copy of same 02 

Dictation in Shorthand, and transcription on machine 20 

Dictations taken direct upon the Typewriter 15 

Each additional copy of either of such dictations 05 

Shorthand dictation at customer's pleasure, per hour $1.00 

Transcript of the same at above rates. 



SENTENCES FOR PRACTICE. 

(395.) "Now is the time for all good men to come to the aid of the party." 

Memorize the fingering of the prefixes and affixes, for use in all writing. 

Acting from policy rather than from Christian principles. 

Names of some persons, cities and States can be found on page 105. 

"Christmas — receiving what one does not want, and giving what one cannot 
afford." 

A chain sentence is one in which the last letters of words are the first letters of 
words following. 

Industry often supplies the lack of talent, and learning often consists in knowing 
wh-^re knowledge may be found. 

The primary part of Typewriting for the Blind furnishes excellent practice for tlia 
beginner. 

Waiting for opportunity is like betting on the weather. 

Tabular and fancy work is improved by red ink ruling, only do not overdo it. 

When acknowledging a business letter always give the date. 

A bicycle reform—" Out of this nettle danger we pluck this flower, safety," 

For words made up of letters in the top bank of keys, see paragraph 247. 

To know the value of a dollar, earn it. 

Learn to write from good, legible copy straight down the page without a pause. 



PRACTICAL TYrE\Vl{ITn'G. II9 

Don't pour on oil when the machine needs lubricating ; a drop is as good as a 
quart. 

When opportunity offers to do a nice job, utilize a pretty form of border, and make 
the result extract a smile from your employer. 

For left-hand practice, see paragraph 25, page 7. 

I am afraid my former high esteem of his preaching was more out of opinion than 
judgment. 

I see no content or satisfaction anywhere in any one sort of people. 

Fair or foul, come what, come when, we will have our way at last. 

" Strength of mind is exercise, not rest." 

(396.) New York, Jan. 15, 1891. 

CALEB ANDERSON, Solicitor, 

Quebec, Canada. 
Dear Sir : 
25 Your esteemed favor of the 12th inst. is at hand and contents noted. | 

It would seem to us that the communication had better be addressed to your 
50 agent who is to blame in this matter, and not to | us. If they protested a draft they 
Y5 ought not to have, and want to make you pay $1. 78 for doing it, then you should see | 
that your agent straightens it out. 

The First National Bank in presenting the draft here acted as your representative 
100 and not ours, and as the | papers were not in accordance with the terms cf the draft, 
we declined to honor it until the same were put in proper shape. 
25 We 1 must respectfully refer you to your own agent, the First National Bank of 

50 this city, or the bank through which the draft was sent, for any corrections or | 
changes you may desire to make in the collection of the money. 
Sincerely regretting this complication, we are 
172 Yours, 

(397.) Boston, January 15, 1890. 

Mrs. ELIZABETH LATHAM, 

Towan da, Pennsylvania. 
Dear Madam : 

Your esteemed favor received, and we note yonr inquiries and comments re- 

25 garding the rate | of interest you are receiving upon your investments. There has 

been quite a reduction in the rate of interest obtainable upon first-class securities 

50 during | the last decade, and it has, of course, affected the income you would receive 

from your bonds. 
75 Twelve or fifteen years ago six per cent | city bonds sold below par, and many 



130 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

of them ai'e now selling at from twenty to sixty per cent premium ; railway bonds 

100 yielding seven and | eight per cent were selling below par, and now sell (if they 

25 have a long time to run) from fifteen to forty-eight per cent | premium, making the 

net income realized from these bonds in many cases less than four per cent ; very 

50 few first-class railway bonds, and no | first-class city bonds can now be purchased 

75 to pay a rate of interest much above four jDer cent, while bonds of such cities as 1 

New York and Boston sell at a price that yields the investor two and three-quartcrrj 

SCO to three and three-quarters per cent per annum. | 

Only about twelve or fifteen years ago mortgages could be placed in New York 

25 at seven per cent, and in the West at from nine | to twelve per cent ; whereas, nov/, 

first-class mortgages in New York are placed at four and one-half per cent, and in 

50 the West | at from five to six per cent generally. 

From the above phase of the financial situation, you will naturally infer that 

75 you are but one | of many who are not realizing from their investments as much as 

they formerly did. 

300 This is something we are not accountable for, and we | can only hope that the 

future will make a better showing for us all. 

316 Yours respectfully, 

(398.) Hartford, July 2, 1890. 

Mr. WINSLOW JOSSLYN, Manager, 

Columbus, Ohio. 
Dear Sir : 

25 Yours of the 2d instant in re policy No. 08,097, Blaisdell, is at | hand. 

This policy was originally issued as a ten-payment life for $2,500, requiring the 

payment of an annual premium of $181.13. 

50 The premium, instead | of being paid entirely in cash each year, was settled 

75 partly by note ; that is, a portion of each year's premium was borrowed of the | 

company, and a note given for the same. 

The balance of the note now outstanding as a lien against the policy represents 

100 a portion of j the money borrowed of the company by Mr. Blaisdell, and used in 

settlement of the ten years' premiums. 

25 The policy is not entitled by its | terms to any cash surrender value, nor could 

we offer to issue for the surrender of it a fully paid-up policy, cancelling and return- 

60 ing I the premium note. 

If it w^ere possible for Mr. Blaisdell to pay the note in cash, the policy Avould 

75 then be a fully paid-up | life for $2,500 ; or, if he could not pay the note in full, a 

200 partial payment on it would reduce the interest payments each year. | 

Kindly submit these suggestions to him, and advise us of his decision. 

214: Yours truly, 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 121 

(399.) Augusta, Me., May 1, 1890. 

ALPHEUS HEMINGWAY, ESQ., 

1 i Broadway, New York City. 
Dear Sir : 
25 Your favor of the 28th ult., enclosing copy of complaint | in the Ward well case, 

is received. 

You know I have no experience in, or knowledge of, your system of pleading in 

50 New York, upon which | I can rely. I can only say, tliat if pleadings of this char- 

75 acter were made in a suit here I should demur the first thing | I did, with a feeling. 

of absolute certainty that I should prevail upon the demurrer. And I have an 

100 impression that if you demur they | probably will ask leave to amend, as I suppose 

25 they will be allowed to do on the payment of the trifling bill of costs ; so | that, as 

far as my advice goes, I must leave it entirely to you, simply saying what I should 

50 do if it was here, which | seems to me to be the proper course for you to take there. 

166 Yours very truly, 

(400.) Chicago, December 20, 1890. 

Messrs. BUENHAM, CAXTON & CO., 

Hartford, Conn. 
Dear Sirs : 

Your attention is respectfully invited to the following statement concerning the 

25 bonds | issued by the School District of Kansas City, Mo. : Corporate Name, School 
District of Kansas City, Jackson County, Mo. Amount of Bonds in this Issue, | 

50 $150,000. Denomination, $1,000. Eate of Interest, four per cent. Interest paya- 
ble^ semi-annually (January and July.) Where payable, New York City. Pm-pose 
issued, building school houses. When dated , July 1, 1890. Time to run, twenty 
years (straight). When due, July 1, 1910. Authorized by vote of the people at 
election held April 8, 1890, under sections 8,106-8,107, Art. 3, Chap. 143, Eevised 
Statutes of Missouri, as amended 1889. Eesult of election, votes "for," 13,154; 
"against," 369. Total previous indebtedness, $614,500. Value of school property 
in the school dictrict unincumbered, $1,400,000. Assessed valuation (based upon 
about forty per cent of actual value) of district, $75,000,000. Population, 225,000. 
Rate of taxation, State and County, 13 mills on assessed value ; City, 12 1 mills. 

A strict compliance with the law has been observed in authorizing this issue 
of bonds. They will be registered with the State Auditor. The issue of $75,000 
four-per-cent twenty-year bonds, July 1, 1886, sold for $l,01f. The issue of $100,000 
four-per-cent twenty-year bonds, July 1, 1887, sold for $1,017-10. There was no 
issue in 1SS8. The issue of $200,000 four-per-cent twenty-year bonds, July 1, 1889, 
sold for $1.02|. There has never been a default in the payment of principal or 



122 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



interest. A tax levy has been made by the Board (as authorized by law), for the 
jjurpose of creating a sinking fund for the payment of bonds as they mature, and 
the present amount in said fund is more than sufficient to pay the first tliree issues 
of bonds falling due, to wit : in 1S92, 1S94, 1895. 

Following will be found a tabulated statement of the bonded debt of the 
School District of Kansas City, Mo. There is no floating debt. 

TABULATED STATEMENT, 
Shoioing the Bonded Indebtedness of the School District of Kansas City, Mo., May 1, 1S90. 



When Issued. When Due. 


Where Payable. 


Purpose Issued. 


Denomination. 


Race of Interest. 


Total. 


Dec. 


1, '73 Dec. 


1, '93 


New York 


Renewal 


$1,000 


10 


$ 30,000 


Jan. 


1, "74 ) Jan. 


1, '94 


New York 


Renewal 


500 


10 


10,500 


March 1, 75 1 March 


1, '95 


New York 


Renewal 


5oa 


10 . 


10,000 


July 


1, '75 ! July 


1, '95 


New York 


Renewal 


500 


10 


25,000 


July 


1, '76 


July 


1, '96 


New York 


Renewal 


500 


8 


12,000 


Jan. 


1. '77 


Jan. 


1, '97 


New York 


Renewal 


500 


8 


7,000 


Julv 


1, -80 


July 


1, 1900 


New York 


Renewal 


500 


6 


10,000 


July 


1, '80 


July 


1, 1900 


: New York 


Renewal 


500 


6 


25,000 


July 


1, '81 


July 


1, 1901 


New York 


Renewal 


1,000 


5 


50.000 


July 


1, '85 


July 


1, 1905 


New York 


Building 


500 


5 


60,000 


Julv- 


1, '86 


July 


1, 1906 


New York 


Building 


500 


4 


75,000 


July 


1, '87 


July 


1, 1907 


New York 


Building 


500 


4 


100,000 


July 


1, '89 


July 


1, 1909 


New York 


Building 


1,000 


4 


200.000 












$614, .MO 



We offer $150,000 of the four-per-cent twenty-year School bonds, sukject to 
previous sale, and commend them to your notice as an excellent investment. 

Yours respectfully, 

(401.) 

PERKINS INSTITUTION FOR THE BLIND, 

South Boston, Mass., November 29, 1S90. 
Dear Sir : 
35 Your favor of the 19th inst. is at hand. You will pardon | my long delay in 

answering it, as I was away when it reached here and did not return until this 
50 m*rning. I will first try | to answer your questions in order. 

1. Typewriting is now so cominon among the blind that it is hardly deemed an 
accemplishment. 
75 2. The degree | of accuracy attained is, I think, not less than that of the seeing. 

Seventy words a minute is not an uncommon speed. 
100 3. I know I of a few blind persons who make typewriting a business, and of 

one or two who have done government work. 
25 i. Typewriting is now systematically | taught in many of the schools for the 

bhnd. An all-finger method is the only practical one for us. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 123 

50 Let me thank you for | the many new ideas I have received from your book. 

It seems specially adapted to the needs of blind operators. But every operator 
75 should adopt | a scientific method of fingering from the first, and I wish " Practical 
Typewriting" as large a circulation as the Remington typewriter. 

Very sincerely yovirs, 
200 THOMAS | H. WILSON. 

206 To Mr. Bates Torrey. 

(401^) Cleveland, Ohio, October 17, 1892. 

Messrs. DENMAN, WHEELER & CO., 

Dubuque, Iowa. 

Geiatlemen : 
25 Since the receipt of your letter of the 23d of | August, concerning official copy 

of Professor Chandler's patents, we have been actively engaged in trying to 
50 determine exactly what to do. In looking over our | patents we find we possess 

two documents, the originals of which we herewith enclose. These are both in the 
75 French language, and one is signed | by the Cleveland Electric Company, and the 

other by Professor Chandler. Just what the diffei'ence between these two docu- 
100 ments is we are unable to say, | but presume they are both necessary for your 

purpose, and you are at liberty to use them with due discretion. 
25 It would seem that these | ought to cover the ground entirely, and the originals 

you must be extremely careful not to lose. These papers were carefully prepared 
50 by the proper | authorities, and sent hei-e for signature, and we suppose the 
75 record of transfer was made in France at the time. Fearing this may not be | 

enough, we had a copy of the original assignment by Professor Chandler of the 
■200 Boston Electric Company executed with all the filagree work that was | asked for in 

your letter. 

We send you these by registered package under another cover, and hope they 
25 will reach you safely, and lead to | an immediate consummation of the business. 

We trust that it will not be necessary to have anything sent back here for signature. 
50 Very truly yours, | 



P. S. — If our action in this transaction has not been entirely satisfactory, advise 
272 us and we will seek further to accommodate you. 



124 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING, 

NEW YORK SUPERIOR COURT, Part 2. 



II It II n II II II II 11 II II II II II II H II II II II II II II II II n 

Francis W. Brodie ■ " Before Judge Sanford and 

vs " a Juryi, 

James O'Brien, Sheriff. " New York, May 18, 1876, 

ti II II II It II II II II ti II II II 11 II It II II II II II II II II 11 II 



For Plaintiff, 

SMITH & COOPER, Esqs. 
Appearances: 

For Defendant, 

VANDERPOEL, GREEN & COE, Esqs« 

Mr. Smith opened for plaintiff . 

FRANCIS W. BRODIE, pl'ff., sworn. Direct examination. 
Q., V/hat is yoijr business? A. Furrier. 
Q. How long have you been engaged in business as a furrier? 
A. Since 1865, 
Q, Previous to that time in what business were you? I mean previous 

to 1865? 
A. I Vt^as engaged in th-e lottery business, I was out during the v/ar, 

and speculated a little in Kentucky, 
€>,. What business was your father in. in 1865? 
A. The first part of the year he was in the fur business. 
Ci, Where was his place of business? 
A, At this time, virhen I bought him oTit, it was at 85 "Maiden Lane, 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 125 

Q. (By the Court). By "this time" you mean 1865? 

A. Yes, sir, 

a. Ko you know the fact that the firm Willis, Green & Jones had a 

contract v/ith the defendant in this case to sell ana deliver a certain 

number of carboys of oil? 

(Objected to as immaterial, being res inter alios acta . 
Objection overruled exception taken, ) 

A, Certainly I do. 

Q., Do you remember the date of that? 

A, I cannot remember the date exactly. It v;as in February or March 

of 1372, but upon my v/ord I cannot remember. 

The witness states that he did not notice the word 
"defendant" in the next to the last question, and adds 
that there were two parties instead of one. 

Plaintiff's coLmsel moves to strike out both ques- 
tion and answer as invaaterial. 

0,, I ask you whether you remember that dociiir.ent ,--vvhat it is, and 

whose signature that is, 

(Hands vfitness a paper. Objected to.) 

Cl. Whose signature is that? Do you recognize the signature? 

A. I recognize it, yes sir, 

Q.. Could you sv/-ear to the identity of that piece of writing? 

A. Yes sir, positively. 



i 



126 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

THE NATUEE AND PROPERTIES OF PLEADINGS IN CONFESSION AND AVOIDANCE . 

First, with respect to their division . 
(199) Of pleas in confession and avoidance, some are dis- 
tinguished (in reference to their subject matter) as 
pleas in justification or excuse, others as pleas in 

(a) Com. Dig. discharge (a). The pleas of the former class show 
Pleader, (5 M 12) some justification or excuse of the matter charged 

in the declaration: those of the latter, some dis- 
charge or release of that matter. The effect of 
the former, therefore, is to show that the plaint i 
never had any right of action, because the act char^ 
ed was lawful; the effect of the latter, to show 
that though he had once a right of action, it is dis- 
charged or released by some matter subsequent. Of 
those in justification or excuse, the plea of non 

(b) See this assault demesne (b) is an example; of those in dis- 
plea, supra, 165. charge, a release (c). this division applies to 

£leas only; for replication and other subsequent 

(c) See this pleadings, in confession and avoidance, are not sub- 
plea, supra, p. 55. ject to any such classification. 

As to the form of pleadings in confession and 
avoidance, it will be sufficient to refer the reader 

(d) Supra, pp. to the examples in the first chapter (d), and to ob- 

55, 60. serve that, in common with all pleadings whatever, 

which do not tender issue, they alv/ays conclude with 

(e) See post, a verification (e). 
Sect .VII. Rule VI. 

With respect to the quality of these pleadings 
it is to be observed, that it is of their essence 
(as the name itself imports) to confess the truth of 
the allegation which they propose to answer or avoid. 
It was formerly the practice in many cases to frame 
such pleas with a formal confession or admission in 

terms, using the introductory phrase of true it is 

that_, etc . . and then proceeding to plead in answer 
to the matter thus explicitly ad]-nitted. But this 
method is not required by the rules of pleading, and 
with a view to brevity, it is now generally abandoned 
Thus in the example formerly given of a plea of re- 

(f ) Supra p. 55. lease to an action for breach of covenant(f ), the 
evident tendency of the plea is to admit that the 
defendant did, as alleged in the declaration, execute 
the deed and break the covenant therein contained. 



(200 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



127 



THE aUANTITIES OF YARN SPUN, EXPORTED 
and consumed at home: 


Years 


Yarn Produced 


Exported 


Consumed at Home 

1 


1870 
1871 
1872 
1875 
1874 
1875 
1876 

1 


942 , 460 , 000 
1 , 072 , 850 , 000 
1,040,380,000 
1,077,920,000 
1,120,525,000 
1,088,890,000 
1,151,056,000 


186,078,000 
193,480,000 
211,940,000 
214,687,000 
220,599,000 
215,490,000 
232,150,000 


756,582,000 
879,370,000 
828,440,000 
863,233,000 
899,926,000 
875,400,000 
898,906,000 



In the testing of Iron and Steel during which any state of 
(pull) stress (exceeding the original elastic limit) exists affects 
the result in two somewhat antagonistic ways. It augments extension, 
by giving the metal leisure to flow. This may be called the viscous 
effect. But, on the other hand, it reduces the amount of extension 
which subsequent greater loads will cause, and it 'increases the amount 
of load reciuired for rupture in the way which has just been described. 
This may be called the hardening effect. If the viscous effect existed 
alone, or if the hardening effect were small, the material would show 
to greater advantage as regai'ds elongation, and to less advantage as 
regards ultimate strength, the more slowly the load were applied. 



12S 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 


























ppppp 


RRRRR 


EEEEE 


M M 




EEEEE 


RRRRR 








p p 


R R 


E 


M M M M 




E 


R R 


<^ 





ppppp 


RRRRR 


EEE 


M M M 




EEE 


RRRRR 








p 


R R 


E 


M M M 




E 


R R 








p 


R R 


EEEEE 


M M 




EEEEE 


R R 






l::l::l::l::l::l::^:^ 



2o 0^0 0^0 o2f> 0^0 o2o 0^0 oZ 



/o/o/o/^/o/Q/o/o/o/o/o7 

3/ PROGRAM /Q/ 

/Q/O/O/O/O/O/O/O/Q/Q/0 / 



o Oo/oO 0/000/000/000/000/000 
0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 



/(I 11 t( » It II II It (t n H It II n II i» It H i( II » I1 11 

/t t t t i t t \ 
7 t % t t t t % 

/« X X X « X « 
7 xx$«x?s 






PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



129 



THE "BAR-LOCK." 

(402.) The Bar-Lock is one of the American writing machines that has jjushed 
itself into favor because of its automatic actions and other features of pronounced larac- 
ticability. The name " Bar-Lock" is taken from a device at the printing point designed 
to lock the type-bars at the moment of imprint, Avhich, together with the adjustable ball 
and socket mechanism of the type-bar hanger, insures proper alignment of the letters. 




(403.) The Bar-Lock was the pioneer of writing in sight (see illustration). This 
feature is secured by arranging the type-bars in a double row on a semi-circle in front of 
the paper carriage, so that they will strike on top of the platen. This allows of the 
usual simple method of inserting the paper, which is not rolled up in a cage after the 
hue has been written, but is held out straight by support arms ; therefore, once a letter 
is printed, it remains always in sight. 



130 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(404.) The ink ribbon movement contributes to ^vriting every letter in sight, as it 
carries the ribbon over the printing i)oint upon depression of the key, and immediately 
makes its retreat, exposing to full view the letter just imprinted upon the paper. 

(405.) The downward blow of the type-bar renders the machine a very powerful 
manifolder and also makes the action of the keys very light and easy, combined with a 
short depression. The short swing of the type-bars and the quick escapement of the car- 
riage contribute to speedy action, and the machine is ever responsive to the most skillful 
oi)eration. 

(406.) The keyboard is in duplicate, having two manuals of identical arrangement, 
one, the upper or black-colored keys, for capitals, and the lower or white keys for the 
lower-case letters. The order of characters is that of the universal keyboard (see cut . 
In all essential respects the all-finger procedure, as described in the foregoing pages, will 
apply readily to the Bar-Lock, and it Avould be exceedingly unwise to manipulate the 
machine without method or carelessly. The inquirer should peruse pages 7 to 9 inclusive, 
and the exercises of pages 75 to 78 will be found excellent for acquiring a command of 
the keyboai'd. 

(407.) The proper position of the operator is a matter very often overlooked. If 
reasonable attention were paid to this point there would be a larger number of rapid and 
accurate operators. To write with accuracy and with ease, the keyboard should be two 
inches below the level of the elbow and the machine should be drawn forward so that 
the keyboard projects six inches over the edge of the table. 

(40S.) This machine is constructed Avith a view to reheve the operator of all mental 
and physical strain possible. There is no need to give the old staccato blow on the keys 
from the elbow ; all that is necessary is a light, quick tap with the finger ; keep the arm 
still and operate with the fingers in just the same manner as a five-finger exercise is per- 
formed upon the piano . 

(409.) Practice will give the operator the exact force of blow required to obtain a 
clear imprint upon the paper ; anything more is wasted effort and a detriment to the 
machine. 

(410.) Depress the spate-bar with the thumb, preferably the right. Employ the 
right fourth finger upon the niterrogation, underscore, period and outside of that limit ; 
and the left fourth finger upon Q, A, Z, etc. The figures at the extremes of the manual 
are also attacked by the httle fingers. This instruction applies to ordinary writing, Avhere 
the proportion of figures is not great, and the labor of the weaker fingers would, there- 
fore, be not excessive ; but in tabular work the recommendation would be to write num- 
bers with the stronger fingers, inasmuch as no effort for "touch" writing would be 
warranted. 

(411.) The general application of the other fingers is shown by the diagram of para- 
graph 354, and the text descriptive of the same may be profitably studied, as well as the 
introductory parts of the several machine exhibits. Read also paragraphs 307 and 309 
and practice 308. Paragraph 312 also directs to good procedure. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



131 



(412.) First adjust the margin guide on the scale bar bj- shding it to any desired 
position at the right-hand end of the scale. Take the paper in the left hand, the top 
edge downwards and the side to be Avritten on facing away from the operator ; slide the 
paper down the paper table 12i, Fig. 1, until it rests against the platen, then, with the 
right hand, rotate the bell 34, Fig. 1 ; while so doing, lift up the paper scale 118, Fig. 3, 
Avith the left hand, allowing the scale to drop down upon the paper directly the top 
edge of the paper has passed over the top of the printing platen. While inserting the 
paper allow it to rest against the platen, it will then feed forward perfectly straight ; if 
pushed against the platen it may enter crookedly, in which case it should be pulled to 
either side by the bottom edge, until the upper left hand corner is parallel with the side 
of the sheet. After a little practice, the paper can be brought into position for writing 
on by passing the palm of the right hand across the milled edge of the bell ; this is a very 
rapid operation. 



BAR 
102. 




Fig. 2. 

(4:13.) A rapid method of inserting envelopes or postal cards is to lift the scale with 
the little finger of the left hand and with the thumb and first finger insert the envelope 
at the top of the platen under the feed rolls 136, Fig. 3, rotating the bell toward the 
front of the machine with the right hand. 

(•114.) An advantage of this machine is that if it is desired to address an envelope 
or write a telegram on another sheet of paper while a sheet partially written is in the 



132 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

carriage, there is no need to remove the pai'tially written sheet ; all that is necessary is 
to insert the envelope or telegram on the top (see p. 413), write what is required, remove 
the sheet and turn back to the line where tlie first sheet was left off and go on writing ; 
the paper feed is accurate and the paper will not have shifted its position. 

(415.) Under the paper table 124, Fig. 1, are two arms, 133, Fig. 3; by pulling these 
out to form a triangle, the sheet of paper written upon is supported so that the writing 
remains in sight from the fii'st line written. 

(416.) To obtain clear, sharp writing, it is necessarj^ to have a moderately soft and 
smooth platen. To protect the platen and prevent it becoming dented, use a sheet of 
hard, thick paper at the back of the sheet to be written upon. After the paper has been 
inserted in the carriage, note the number on the scale 118, Fig. 3, where you desire the 
writing to commence, then find the same jiumber on the margin rack, 11, Fig. 2, and 
slide the margin stop, 18, along the bar until its left edge registers at the number wanted. 
This scale is graduated at every alternate tooth, but the margin stop may be set opposite 
any tooth of the rack. 

(417.) The margin stop may be released from mesh with the teeth of the bar on 
^vhich it slides, by pressing together its two little handles, thus readily permitting of its 
being brought to the light of the machine. Should the operator desire to write notes, Q. 
and A., annotations, etc., within the margin, he can do so by pushing the carriage to the 
right with the left hand, while depressing the key marked M. E. (meaning Margin 
Eelease) with the right hand. This operation rocks the margin rack, 11, Fig. 2, out of 
the path of the carriage, although retaining its adjustment, and alloAvs the desired note, 
annotation, etc., to be written. One letter before the original margin adjusted for "is 
reached, the key marked M. R. will rise, thus warning the operator to commence a new 
line if his marginal note is not complete. Thereafter, the original margin will have 
automatically recovered. 

(418.) To receive warning Avhen the written line is about to be completed, note the 
number on the carriage scale, 118, Fig. 3, where you wish the bell to ring (usually five 
letters before the end of the line), then move the bell-trip slide, 38, Fig, 2, to the same 
number on the bell scale, 37, Fig. 2. The bell will then ring Avhen the writing appears 
at that number and enable the operator to determine whether to finish the v.'ord before 
the end of the line, or write a hyphen and complete it on the next line. 

(419.) The keyboard locking stud, 25, Fig. 2, can be set to give a second bell alarm 
at any point after the first ringing, and is adjusted in the same way as the bell-trip slide, 
provided the thumb-screw, 266, Fig. 2, is first screwed down as far as it will go, care being 
taken that the hell-trip, 35, Fig. 3, is not in contact with the stud, 25, Fig. 2, while the 
screiv, 266, Fig. 2, is being tightened. The stud, 2", is readily moved to anj^ point of the 
bell scale, by placing the finger on its milled portion, and, while bearing down on it, 
sliding it along. These devices can be set to ring five or more letters or words apart, as 
desired, being limited only by the length of the bell scale. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWBITING. 



133 



(420.) If the screw, 266, is loosened as far as it will go, the stud will act to lock the 
keyboard at any point of the writing for which it may have been set, and this setting is 
made in the same way as for a second bell alarm. When adjustments are made for one 
bell ringing and the keyboai-d lock, care should he exercised in setting the hell-trip slide^ 
38, first and tJie locking stud, 25, afterwards. If hoth 38 and 25 are pushed along 
together the keyhoard will he locked until the hell-trip slide 38 is moved to the right. 
When it is desired to have the keyboard lock at five letters after the bell alarm, the stud, 
25, should be moved close up to the bell-trip slide, 38. The office of this keyboard lock 
is to guard against printing one letter upon another at the end of a line, when the bell 
warning has not been heeded. When it is desired to write one or more letters or words 
after the keyboard has thus become locked, the release lever, 45, Fig. 3, on the left of the 
carriage, should be pushed to the right of the machine with the forefinger of the left hand, 
thus allowing the carriage to pass the lock until the bell rings, and then the carriage can 
be returned to the point opposite the indicator, 69, Fig. 1, where the letters or words are 
to be added, and the writing continued. 




Fig. 3. 




Fig. 4. 



(421.) When the line of writing is completed, the line space-lever, 71, Fig. 1, on the 
left of the carriage, is pushed to the right with the tips of the fingers of the left hand, 
until the carriage stops against the margin block. In thus retui-ning the carriage, the 
paper feeds automatically one, two or three spaces, as determined by the setting of the 
gauge, T7, Fig. 1. If one, two or three-line spaces are wanted, this gauge is turned 
between the thumb and forefinger until 1, 2 or 3 is uppermost. When it is desired to 
bring the carriage to the I'ight, without spacing for a new line, simply pull the bell until 
the proper point opposite the indicator is reached. 



13J- PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(423.) When it is desired to release the carriage from the control of the escapement 
to bring the carriage quickly to the left, push the lever, -±5, Fig. 1, to the right, with the 
forefinger of the left hand. The carriage will then follow the finger freely to the left, and 
when the spot is reached where it is desired the carriage should stop, place another finger 
of the left hand against the lower portion of the hne space-lever and it will stop there. 

(423.) The platen, in this machine, may be turned backward by means of the bell, 
34, Fig. 1, without any other operation, inasmuch as the line-space pawl is normally out 
of mesh with the ratchet, 116, Fig. 4. The platen can be freed from restraint of its 
detent, to allow the flimsy paper being drawn without tearing or creasing, by slightly 
pressing on the gauge, 77, Fig. 1, while withdrawing the paper. 

(424.) The paper feed on the Bar-Lock is accurate, either with single or manifold 
sheets. When a sheet has been fully written, it can be turned back and any of the pre- 
ceding lines written over without in any way blurring the writing. This perfection is 
obtained by the use of rubber driving bands, and the arrangement of the same, so that 
the sheet of paper written upon is held by the driving bands for one-half of the circum- 
ference of the printing platen. The paper is hold rigidly until within one-half inch of 
the bottom, and then the sheet is automatically discharged from the carriage. The rollers 
on Avhich the driving bands revolve are of anti-friction composition and do not require 
oiling. 

(425.) Remove the platen, slip off the bands, 136, Fig. 3, put the new band on the 
large under roller first, and hold it there with the forefinger of the left hand while slipping 
the band onto the two front rollers ; after the bands are in position replace the platen. 
See (431) for instructions how to remove platen. 

(426.) To write on ruled lines in insurance, accountants' and other documents, 
filling in dates, etc., push in the stud 117a on the gauge 77, Fig. 1, with the forefinger of 
the left hand. This operation releases the platen from the control of the ratchet detent 
and enables the operator to bring the ruled line to be written on immediately opposite 
the edge of the steel plate under the ink ribbon, insaring an accurate registry of the 
writing on the line. When it is desired to restore the platen under control of its detent, 
the gauge, 77, Fig. 1, is touched lightly with the forefinger of the left hand. 

(427.) The foregoing device enables the operator, likewise, to re-insert a written 
sheet, and correct it, or add to the writing at any point. Pull the paper on either side 
until the pointer in the center of the lock-plate, 69, Fig. 1, points to center of the i and 
the bottom of the letters are level with the steel plate under the ink ribbon. It also 
allows of fractions being made in proper form, thus : f or Vi. The first fraction is made 
by writing the upper figure and the underscore, then turning the platen until the proper 
separation is reached and printing the lower figure. All three characters must be printed 
with one hand while the space key is held depressed with the other hand. The second 
fraction is made by writing the upper figure and diagonal line, then turning the platen 
until the proper separation is reached and writing the lower figure. 

(428.) Columns of figures are written one underneath another by a clever manipu- 
lation of the carriage and pointer ; the constant visibility of the writing makes columning 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



135 



a comparatively easy matter. When a column of one character is required, fasten down 
the spacer (with a weight), use one hand for writing, and the other for line spacing. 
This operation may be repeated for more columns of a like character. 




Fig. 5. 



(i29.) The ribbons for the Bar-Lock are wound upon spools which fit the machhie, 
and these spools are instantly detachable when the supply of ink needs replenishing. 
No attention need be paid to the ribbon after it has once been adjusted, as the reverse 
motion is secured by a device giving automatic action. Detailed directions for applying 
the spools can be found in the Book of Instructions accompanying the typewriter. Suffice 
it to say that the operation takes longer to describe than to perform. Wlien fully under- 
stood a new ribbon can be substituted for an old one in half a minute. Always take off 
the full spool first, and exercise care that the spool is inserted so that the latch is on the 
outside, and the ribbon reels off from the top. 



136 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



(430.) When manifolding follow the usual method, but do not strike too hard on 
the keys, and remember that no alteration of the paper feed is required, whether for one 
or thirty sheets. 

(431.) To remove the platen, 110a, Fig. 1, from the carriage, first raise the scale, 
lis, and let it stand upright. Place the right thumb against the bell, 34, and left thumb 
against the ratchet, IIG, Fig. 1, pull the latches, 113, Fig. 1, toward the front of the 
machine, and with the thumbs push the platen toward the back of the machine. To 
replace the platen or substitute another, put the platen on the carriage in place to be 
cauo-ht by the latches, 113, carefully seeing that the bell hammer, 36, is placed ivithin the 
bell, and then push the platen toward the front of the machine. The latches will 
automatically latch the platen in place, then let down the scale bar. Platens are 
furnished in three grades, hard, medium hard and soft. Hard platens must be used for 
manifolding, medium hard for general work and manifolding two or three copies, and 
soft platens should be used for writing on single sheets only. The platens for this 
machine are accurately interchangeable. 




Side View op No 4 Bar-Lock 

(432.) The type should be kept clean by brushing them with the brush furnished 
with the machine, rubbing the type with an up and down movement, not sideways. If 
a letter is clogged with ink do not pick it out with a pin, but lay the brush on the lock- 
plate, 69, Fig. 1, with the bristles upwards, and depress the key several times ; this will 
clean the letter. 

(433.) The machine should be carefully dusted every day and the parts kept nice 
and bright. The rod on which the carriage runs should be wiped dry with a clean piece 
of cloth, and then oiled by touching the rod on several places with the Bar-Lock oiler, 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. I37 

after which the carriage should be ran backward and forward a few times to properly 
distribute tlie oil. 

(431.) Once a month put a drop of oil on the bearing of the truck wheel behind 
hook 81, Fig. 3. This wiieel must revolve freely or the paper carriage will be sluggish on 
its movements. Remove the printing platen, 110a, Fig. 1, move the carriage until the 
spacing dogs, SS and 53, Fig. 2, can be seen between the opening on the carriage frame, 
put one drop of oil upon the face of each. Before replacing the platen put a drop of oil 
on the bearings for the platen. 

(i35.) The round wheel or barrel, 3, Fig. 2, contains the spring that suppUes the 
motive power for the carriage. On the left of the spring barrel, 3, is the tensioning 
screw, 201, Fig. 2. When it is desired to increase the tension of the spring give the 
screw, 201, a turn or so to the right, and when there is too much tension give the screw 
a turn or so to the left. 




Side View of No. 5 Bar-Lock. 

(436.) To remove the carriage bring it to the right as far as it will go ; disengage 
the knob, 85, Fig. 2, from its seat, ?:&, Fig. 3, on the carriage, and hook it under the nut, 
170, as shown in Fig. 2; then draw out the screws, 260, Fig. 1, at each end of the rod, 
T9, move the carriage over to the extreme right, remove the platen and carefully lift out 
the carriage. To replace the carriage simply reverse ihese operations, observing that the 
hook, 81, Fig. 3, on the front of the carriage goes underneath the rod, SO, Fig. 2. 

(437.) The tension of the keys can be adjusted by means of the thumbscrew, 167, 
Fig. 2, at the rear of the carriage, by turning it to the right for more, and to the left for 
less, tension. By this means the machine can be made to turn as lightly or as hard as 
may be desired. 



138 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



(438.) The type-bars should play smoothly between the pins of the lock-plate, 69, 
and neither side touch more than the other. When a type-bar has become loose at the 
joint from long service, the wear may be compensated for by slightly turning to the right 
the adjusting screw, 240, Fig. 2, on the particular type-bar bracket, with the flat wrench 
accompanying the machine. 

(439.) There are two styles of Bar-Lock — the No. 4, which accommodates paper nine 
inches wide and writes a line eight inches long, and the No. 5, which admits paper 
sixteen inches wide and writes a line fifteen and a half inches long. 




■T-r*"^""^"" 



Operator Sitting in Correct Position for Rapid Writing. 

(440.) The Bar-Lock Modern Copyholder will be found very useful and practical. 
From the illustration it will be seen that the copy is directly in front of the operator, yet 
not hiding the view of the writing. The line guide moves automatically by means of a 
dog and rack movement, from line to line of the copy. The distance of the movement 
can be regulated to suit the Avidth of line upon the copy. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



139 



(441.) By means of a very clever but exceedii:gly simple attachment, the Bar-Lock 
paper carriage will jump upon the depression of the margin key any desired distance; 
this reduces the time and labor of columning by one-half as compared with the old 
maimer of writing columns of figures. 

(442.) By inserting under the paper scale bar a small piece of red carbon paper, 
any word or words it is desired to emphasize can be illuminated in color. The carbon 
jiaper being below the ink ribbon, the impression upon the paper is given from the 
carbon paper and not from the ribbon. After the requisite words have been written, 
the carbon paper is removed and the writing proceeded with in the usual manner. This 
is done without loss of time. 

(443.) The ability to feed paper into the paper carriage from the top of the platen 
enables a correction to be made upon a sheet of paper though it may be affixed, at the 
top to several other sheets ; this is often an advantage in a lawyer's office. 

(444.) All adjustments of the machine are permanent, and must not be disturbed 
except for serious reason. Special directions concerning the correction of disorders that 
rarely occur may be found in the machine manual above mentioned. Keep the type- 
writer clean and properly oiled ; have a wise conception of the bearing of every part ; 
use it well, and the reward will be handsome Avriting, and a long period of usefulness. 

(445.) To pack the machine for transport screw the nuts, 169, Fig. 1, so that the 
ends of the U-shaped rod on which they are screwed come up through the tops of the 
nuts. This raises the rod and locks the keyboard. Then give the nut, 170, Fig. 1, two 
turns to the left, push the hooks into the holes at each end of the carriage as far as 
they will go, and tighten the nut again to prevent the hooks from vibrating away 
from the carnage. 




Bar-Lock Copy Holder. 



140 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING, 




The above is a reproduction of a prize design picture of the "Santa Maria," executed 
entirely on the Bar-Lock, without the help of pen or pencil, by Miss F. Stacy.— Eeprinted 
from the " Phonographic World." 



PRACTICAL TYPE WHITING. 141 

Speed of Typewriting machines. 

The matter of speed in a t^ewriting machine is a subject 
of the most interesting character, and one where much exagger- 
ation can be indulged in among interested parties, to the del- 
usion of the purchaser. 

Speed obtained by one individual in writing the same word 
of two or more letters over and over, or repeating a sentence 
containing short words, is one thing, and speed obtained by the 
ordinary operator in practical use is another, and the differ- 
ence is very marked. 

To find the amount of work an operator can do, he should 
copy new matter for perhaps a quarter of an hour at an ordina- 
ry rate of working, and the number of lines or folios written, 
will be a safe estimate of the capabilities of the instrument 
and operator combined. The great mistake into which purchas- 
ers are often led, is caused by the " one minute standard '• of 
speed ordinarily adopted. 

Manufacturers have shown the wonders of a minute, and the 
impression has remained in the listener's mind, that the rate 
was continuous. 



142 



FEACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



iv#vj| \j I ^1 wl vil wi fcjIwivil.wlMl \i«wlvil^lw1wl.wfi-\il,\/l,v 1 -Wl_ y[_ w l ^ wlwl _ \/| w,i< wi w l w A/ 
>l' W I " I " I « I " I " I " r " I ^ PTT TTT iJrr^l'W IX I R 1 R \ n y ft \ A |"Tl 1 tT I R \ n \' ft \' K I K \ W t ft In I H n 

*o**o o^Hf o o^^o 0^*0 o^f^o o.)H(-o o->H<-o o*-!<-o o**o o-}H(-o o-X-o* 

^ijJLiJL!J.iJ.!J.iJ.iJ.!i.!J.!J.ii.!i.!J-!J.!J.!J.!i.!i-9(. 

^HH«§@@o ^ o ^ o ^@@@>^HH«5@@o ^ o ^ o ^^«g)t@Hf y o ^ o ^ o(3l(g@HH(-4(@ai@9 o ^ o ^ o@@@^HH«' 

■iCXXKXXKXXKXtttttttttt:: :tt=°@l^!^@o=7y: : :tttttttttt-)MH<-iH(-^HHHHf* 

^HHfO*O»O-X-O*O*O*O*O*O*O-)fO*O-)fO*0*O*O*O*O-X-O*O*O*O*O*O*O*O*O-JHH(- 

■jHt-l ololololololololololojotolololololololoiojololololo I'N-K- 

^H«p):@:@:@:@:@:@:@:@:@:@:@:@:@:@:@:@*@:@:@:@>:@:@:@:@:<?«Ht- 

4f^(.'|-'|> o o 1 1 o o.tt o o 1 1 o *t t o oft ° of o ott o oft ® of t o "tt o of + o oft^Ht- 

.^(^O I' o •» o " o " o " o '« o " o " o " o " o " o " o •• o •• o " o " o " o " o »» o " o •' O-JHfr 
**? *^5 *-^ *^ *■? *-?*-7 *■?<■) *-5 *■)*•) *"5 *■? ^-^ *") *"5 *•) *"5 *•) *"5** 

**o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o/o** 
■jj-X-txtxtxtxtxtxtxtxtxtxtxtxtxtxtxt-JHt- 

»»-X-X"X-X-X-X"X-»-)HH(-X-0-X-0-X-0-X- X X X X X X J ( X X »-)HH«- 
■iHt'? 9 ? 9 9 9 ff P 9 9 ! ! T-t •!■ ! ! V 9 «"? 9 9 9 9 9 9** 
^HH«-V=ti'=tV=t?=tV=t@t@t=Vt=Vt=1Pt=:ft=V**» Ijl 

■)HHf-o/o/o/o/o/o/o/0/0/o/o/0/o/o/0/o/o/o/0/0^0^HHf ^' 

•>HBH«-t$t$t^t|t$tit|t|t|t$t$ttt|t$t$t$t$t$t$t$t$t|t$t$t^HHHt 



k 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 143 



THE CALIGRAPH. 

The Caligraph principally mentioned in this exhihit is the No. 3 Special with the 
"universal keyboard," and below is a diagram showing the lower-case portion of that 
aiTangement of letters. 





u 
If 


LEFT 

FIN( 


HAND 
:>ERS. 

2 1 




RIGHT HAND 
FINGERS. 








4 


3 


1 2 




3 




4 




' 




5 


w 


w 


e 


r 


t \ 


1 ' " 


i 


o 


P 


\.^' 


& 




V 


5 


d 


f 


g 


h j 


k 


1 


i 


V 


1 


> ) 


V 


X 


c 


V 


b 


\\ n m 


? 


1 




\ 



DIAGRAM --of— LOWER MANUAL. 



(44-7.) The above manual is supposably divided into right and left hand territory by 
a line tending between the letters TGB and YHN. The figures at the top indicate that 
all the fingers are to be used, and the slanting rows of letters beneath give an indication 
of the duty of each finger. 

(448.) The letters upon each side of the imaginary division are the special province 
of the index fingers, and may serve as guide-keys. By dropping the index fingers* upon 
T and Y, and then shifting to R and U, allowing the other fingers to fall naturally upon 
the keys beneath them, the scope of the method will be revealed, and hand position 
established. Because there are more keys in each bank than there are fingers, ad- 
vantage is taken of the superior dexterity of the first and second fingers to make it 
obligatory for them to do double duty. 

* Blind operators upon a more compact kej'board get iheir bearings by dropping the fourth finger upon 
P and Q, and working inward toward T and Y. A finger motion or writing by touch cannot be accomplished 
upon a keyboard that is too compact. For example, the piano is operated entirely by touch ; from the center 
of one key to center of next is 1 inch, on the Caligraph No. 2 from center of one key to next is seven-eighth of 
inch, on No. 3 a trifle less. Now, if you will measure from center of one finger to next, when in position for 
operating, you will discover that they will be about the same distance apart as keys, and if keyboard is too 
compact as well as not comparatively level, it will require a band motion to strike the next key, and we 



144 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(449.) By this plan, which is entirely practical, the index fingers have optionally 
two rows of letters to manipulate, namely, YHN or UJM for the right hand, and TGB 
or EFV for the left. But this imposes no hardship, as the first fingers are strong and 
capable of stretching wider intervals than are the others. The second fingers likewise 
have the option of striking UJM or IK ? with the right hand, and EFV or EDO with the 
left, as shown by the diagram. 

(450.) The circumstances governing such optional finger action are : when the 
index fingers fall first upon T, G or B or Y, H or N, at the beginning of a word, the next 
outside letters receive the next finger ; when UJM or EFV begin woi'ds they generally 
take the index fingers. This is neither complicated in theory nor in practice. The re- 
maining fingers operate according to the dii-ections of the diagram, namely, EDO and 
IK ? — second fingers ; WSX and OL, — third ; QAZ — fourth of the left hand ; and P ; — 
third of the right hand. The fourth finger of the right hand may be reseiwed for a use 
to be explained in the next paragraph. 

(451.) The space-bars of the Caligraph are two in number and located at the sides 
of the keyboard. Both space-keys should be employed, as it serves to time the opera- 
tion of the machine in an even manner, and by using the fourth finger the hand should 
not be removed from the keyboard, a turn of the wrist sideways being all that is neces- 
sary. This is the advantage of side space-keys, a front space-key requiring an awkward 
turn of the hand when spacing is done with the thumb, taking the hand from the proper 
writing position ; and if s^Daced with the first finger, a whole arm motion is required, tak- 
ing the hand entirely from the keyboard and being much slower than the hand motion 
required by a side space-key. Such use of the right fourth finger takes it from the key- 
board, and makes the finger procedure of the right division of the manual differ slightly 
from that of the left ; but the difference relates mainly to the letter P, which, being of 
low average recurrence, cuts no great figure in writing. 

(452.) The capital letters assembled in the upper banks are manipulated in like 
manner to the lower case, while the figures and other characters are attacked by the 
fingers most convenient to use. 

(453.) For accustoming all the fingers to the respective keys, as well as to train the 
right and left little fingers to space-bar duty, may be practiced, only being careful 
to remember that upon the Caligraph letter P is attacked by the third finger and the 
spacer with the fourth. The object also is to promote an acquaintance with the letter 
relations of the manual, which should be memorized, and to teach the proper style of 
finger action, called touch. 

think that it is easier to locate Ijeys by a finger motion alone than by hand and flager motion. For speed 
a Iceyboard should be separated, as in rapid motion the hand is apt to travel farther than when writing- slow. 
A man will take longer steps when runoing than when walking, and with greater ease, and if he were obliged 
to take the short steps, he would soon stumble. This is equally true in motion of the liand, and explains 
why we so often see letters piled up by machine with compact keyboards, as in rapid work they get to stum- 
bling, and the machine will not respond to the uneven motion. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 145 

(454.) Practice these letter combinations after the fashion of five-finger exercises in 
piano ]3laying, until the keyboard is memorized and the touch is satisfactoiy. Write 
no capitals yet. 

(455.) Good touch is important. As a matter of style on the part of the operator it 
is particularly so, and as a means to evenness of impression it is essential. Strike the 
keys with "staccato " movement, yet forcibly enough to secure a legible imprint. Ee- 
lease the key quickly (as though it were hot), so that the next type will have a chance 
to rise to the paper without conflict with its neighbor. For the same reason never strike 
two keys at once. There will be no difficulty in making the first and second fingers do 
this, but the third and fourtli will need training a little. Discipline the whole hand so 
that the fingers will operate uniformly, and the result will be an even impression. 

(456.) Write slowly at first, speed being of secondary consideration to accuracy. 
The latter must be cultivated, but speed Avill develop of itself. By careful attention to 
method, accuracy will be assured. 

(457.) The operator is now and always earnestly admonished to care for his 
machine. Dust and clean often. Keep the weaiing parts bright, the bearings slightly 
oiled ; but apply oil sparingly, and wipe off all outside and superfluous oil after running 
the machine a little. Do not allow the types to fill. 

Do not move the paper after writing has begun. Start it straight, and then let the 
regular feed control its movements. Do not disturb it by erasing. When restoring the 
paper after removal for any reason, adjust the longest line to the scale, making the 
graduations coincide Avith the vertical (and thin) letters i t j 1 f , then turn the platen one 
cog, and writing may begin. 

(45S.) EXERCISES AND SENTENCES. 

The remarks in this LESSON with reference to Capitals apply particularly to 
machines having a SHIFT-KEY beneath the left little finger. Such remarks may be 
ignored by the Caligraph student, because they do not apply to a typewriter having all 
its letters, both Capital and Lower Case, displayed upon the keyboard. The upper 
manual being identical with the lower in respect to the order of the letters, it will only 
be necessary to lift the hands to the Capital letters when a Capital is required, and attack 
each letter with its appropriate finger, according to the diagram upon the first page of 
this exhibit. 

(459. ) Eemember that P demands the third finger. Take particular note that Imnd 
position is one of the essential features of this system of fingering. Hand position is 
first obtained by correct action of the index fingers, and maintained by stiict adherence 
to the fingering of words as given. When writing, hold both hands over the keys, alert 
for duty ; not drop a hand in the lap, if it happens to be idle a moment. 



146 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

(460.) Do not crowd the paper ; let it feed easily. Listen to the bell, and understand 
its warning. Never let the ribbon run entirely out. 

(461.) Avoid the habit of lifting the carriage often. Cultivate an exact finger 
method from the beginning, and exactness will beget confidence in its results. With few 
or no errors there will be little erasing, and that is a forward step. Fill up each line, 
planning to have the right margin as even as possible. Be careful to divide syllables 
properly by the hyphen ; above all do not separate them when a single letter will remain 
at the end of the line, or at the beginning of the next, like a-gain, might-y, a-part, etc. 

(462.) EXERCISE FOR THE RIGHT THIRD FINGER AND SPACER (4th finger). 

pro- per- pre- putty pomp plum plump pulp pump perceive pure 

poet pile pike pretend post limp jump pick hop trip hump asp equip 

up phaeton phalanx phase paraphonic j^illory peri- pink pious pipkin poly 
pneumatic poison polar polka pound pulse pyloric part* upon* 

(463.) FOR PRACTICE, WHEN LONG WORDS CAN BE WRITTEN READILY. 

A practical professional painter purchases his purest procurable pigments, perhaps, 
to prevent personal painstaking, preferring previously prepared paihts. The particular 
and penetrating public praise Pierce's Prepared and Paste Paints, probably preferring 
permanency to parvitude of price. Property possessors preserve proper proportions 
in painting either palace pretentious or poor people's premises, by perusing pointers 
printed in Pierce's paint pamphlets. Promenading Portland's pavements purposely 
pure paint perusing, public preference positively points to Pierce's Prepared Paints. 
The following models of business letters are given for copying practice : 

UNITED STATES OF AMEEIOA. 



: Supreme Judicial Court, 

• Appeal in Equity. March Term, 1894. 

CALIGRAPH. : Respondent being duly sworn 
: testified as follows : 



PEOPLE 

vs. 



Counsel for Appellant. Will you state briefly where the first Caligraph was made ? 
A. Li New York, in a small shop on West Thirty-first street. In 1882 the 
American Writing Machine Company, which is the company that manufactures 
the machine, took larger quarters at Corry, Pa. The present commodious quar- 
ters at Hartford, Conn., have been occupied since 1884. 

The Court. Are we to understand that the machine upon the table before you is an 
example of the typewriter in question ? 

*The. only words containing- P in the list of 120 said to comprise one-half of ordinary writing. 



i 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. l^Y 

Counsel. It is, your Honor. 

Q. Has this typewriter characteristics which distinguish it very much from others ; 
that is, to the casual observer ? A. Not particularly, yet the application of the 
mechanical ideas involved is worthy of notice, and the results achieved entitle the 
machine to favorable consideration. 

Q. What class of levers is used to operate the Caligraph ? A. The original typewi'iter 
key action was that of the lever of the " Second class" so called, the power (^letter 
key) and fulcrum (bearings) being at the extreme of the bar, and the weight (the 
type) being between ; Avhile in the Caligraph the conditions are changed, the 
power being applied between the fulcrum and the weight (third class lever) 
with the result that the action of the type bars is quicker. 

Q. Will you state clearly why the letters of the keyboard are arranged in so eccen- 
tric a manner ? A. The fii'st typewriter keyboard was arranged to favor some 
mechanical obstacles, as well as to give certain letters of more frequent occurrence 
treatment by the stronger fingers. However, with the caligraph any order of 
letters can obtain, so far as the mechanism of the machine is concerned. The 
regular keyboard is as follows : 







q 






z 






t 


r 




e 


y 


u 


i 


o 


s 


d 




f 


g 


h 


c 


k 


X 


V 




b 


n 


1 


m 


P 



This is the order of the small letters ; the capitals were ranged outside of these, 
their location having a definite relation to the lower case, with four exceptions, 
the same finger being employed for capitals as for small letters. This is the style 
of keyboard most Caligraphs have to-day, though the "universal" keyboard will 
be furnished Avhen desired by those who follow a method of fingering which 
depends for its success upon a relation of position between capitals and lower- 
case. 

Q. Cannot a i-finger method be employed on the original Caligraph ? A. Most 
assuredly, and it is much to be recommended ; only the varying position of the 
upper-case letters (capitals) tends to complicate the all- finger method of " Practi- 
cal TypeAvriting. " 

Q. Have any other arrangements of letters been suggested ? A. A great many ; the 
aim being to impose the most work upon the strong fingers, the work being 
gauged by the average recurrence of the letters in writing. 

Q. What has been found to be the comparative frequency of the letters in ordinary 
composition ? A. According to Brewer's Dictionary of Phrase and Fable the 
comparative recurrence is as follows, on basis of 1,000 W . 



148 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 



E, 


1,000 


T,- 


770 


A, 728 


I,- 


704 


S,- 


680 


0,- 


072 


N,- 


670 


H, 540 


E,- 


528 


D,- 


392 


L,- 


360 


u,- 


296 


C, 280 


M,- 


272 


F,- 


286 


W,- 


190 


Y,- 


181 


G, 168 


P,- 


168 


B,- 


158 


V,- 


^120 


K,- 


■ 88 


T, 55 

Z, 22 


Qr 


50 


X,- 


46 



From the above it is easy to compute the comparative labor of the fingers accord- 
ing to any style of keyboard. At the same time it is obvious that the establish- 
ment and mainteDance of one order of letters, even upon different machines, is 
conducive of advantage to all operators. 

Q. May I ask what moves the carriage ? A. A large spiral spring beneath the ma- 
chine, entirely out of sight. This controls the driving arm at the back, which 
attaches to the carriage. The power of this spring is extended, continually forc- 
ing the carriage to the left. The depression of a key disengages the dog in the 
escapement, allowing the spi-ing to move the loose rack forward, but the dog 
engaging the notch in the fixed rack prevents the carriage moving further. On 
removing the finger the dog returns to loose rack and the carriage moves forward. 
This tension is increased or diminished by turning the spring at its front end below 
the machine. 

Q. Isn't there a key tension also ? A. Yes, the keys present a certain resistance, gov- 
erned somewhat by the weight of the type-bar (trifling) to be lifted, and by the 
engagement of the toothed rack with the "dog" at the back. However, the 
dog-spring primarily regulates the tension of the keys, and this can be adjusted by 
turning its screw to the right or left. The Caligraph leaves the factory with its 
tensions all right. 

Q. What is the handle for at the front of the carriage ? A. The line-spacer lever. 
It is used to throw the platen over, thereby feeding the paper for a new line. The 
carriage should be lifted by the left hand ; the motion is shorter, hence quicker, 
and leaves the right hand free for any duty that may be required and prevents 
the careless operator from turning the paper when he wants only to see the work. 

Q. It is hardly necessary at this stage of the inquiry to ask where the j^aper is inserted. 
A. The paper is fed just back of the platen, laying it upon the metallic paper- 
table and rolling it into the carriage with the fingers. It passes between two 
rubber rollers, snugly held together by springs called the paper-feed springs. 
These latter are regulated by the screws seen at the upper ends of the sirring at 
either side of the paper-- table. 

Note. — The following comparison o£ letters is based on a count ot matter containing 159,500 letters : 

O- 

S,- 

c,- 
p,- 

X,- 

z,- 

This second list was handed to us by the persons who made the count, and was prepared with great care, 
It is intereslinff for this reason alone. 



E,— 1,000 


T, 770 


I, 554 


H. 524 


D, 326 


U, 219 


W, 163 


G, 151 


V, 75 


K, 47 



-010 


A, 608 


N, 555 


-514 


R, 484 


L, 329 


■3U5 


M, 198 


F, 185 


-145 


Y, 145 


B,— 123 


- 13 


J, 11 


Q, 8 


- 4 







PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 149 

"What are other feattires of the carriage ? A. The toothed rack at the back, Avhich 
has been alhided to, and which deserves careful study. The pointer, which 
marks upon the frame scale in front the progress of writing, corresponding in its 
registration to the platen scale observed by lifting the carriage. These scales are 
useful in making corrections ; in fact, to insert an omitted letter, turn the paper 
so that the Avritten hne is close to the scale, and all its vertical letters (like i 1 j t) 
coincide with the scale graduations ; then revolve the platen one notch, move the 
pointer to the place for the missing letter as shoAvn on the front scale, and then 
print. 

But how is the printing accomplished ? A. Each tap of a key throws a type face 
against the platen, and at the same time moves the carriage so as to give place for 
a consecutive character. The force used to depress the key should be short and 
sharp, yet great enough to cause the type to strike the ribbon with a staccato 
movement ; the force used should be uniform. The keys are easily depressed and 
respond uniformly to the touch of the operator. Touch varies with diffei'ent 
operators. A more rapid operator does not mind using a machine that needs a 
slightly greater force to make the imprint. The force of impact is termed the 
Touch, and its quality oftentimes distinguishes good typewriting from poor. 

Well, Avhat reallj'- makes the imprint ? A. The impression is accomplished by the 
intervention of a ribbon saturated with a coloring pigment. This ribbon stretches 
across the type basket, proceeding from a spool at the right to one at the left, or 
vice versa. This action is automatic until a spool is filled, when the motion has 
to be reversed by a rod which in the No. 3 Caligraph is just behind the left spool. 
In the earlier machines it is at the top front of the frame. Besides passing back 
and forth the ribbon has a slightly lateral motion, and so is exhausted of its ink 
in an economical manner. When the ribbon is entirely unwound from a S]30ol 
the experienced opei-ator will detect it by a difference in the action ; but the begin- 
ner should be on his guard, as the ribbon will eventually stop, and the types will 
pound a hole through it. 

What is the bell for at the front ? A. To warn the operator that the end of the line 
is near, and to remind him of the division of a Avord by the hyphen. If the bell is 
disregarded the impressions will pile one upon another, and make an ugly smutch. 
The bell can be set to ring at any desired distance before the end, and for general 
writing should be set five spaces before the end, which gives ample opportunity 
for word arrangement. It can also be set to help out on the margins. 

Yes, how about the margins ? A. Well, to be able to stop Avriting at the desired 
point, say at the right, the margin-stop on the front rail should be readjusted to 
collide with the upright buffer at the end of the rail so that the pointer Avill mark 
the place ending. The other margin is fixed by setting the bell-trip so that it will 
give the necessary warning, and the hne can be ended upon that audible hint. 



150 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

Q. What is the best way to take the paper from the machine ? A. To withdraw the 
paper, or to reverse the motion of the platen roller for any reason, turn the 
rubber paper-feed wheel at the left end of the platen, and the paper will roll back 
easily. 

Q. By the way, how is the Caligraph for manifolding, and what kind of a Mimeograph 
stencil will it make ? A. It is first-class for either purpose. It is so strongly 
built that it will stand the hard action required for manifolding, and its deeply-cut 
type produce excellent Mimeograph work. 

Q. Does the insertion of many sheets impair the alignment ; and if so, how is it reme- 
died ? A. If a very large number of sheets of paper is inserted, the diameter of 
the roller is necessarily increased sufficiently to throw those types whose bars are 
fastened to the front half of the circle too high in line of writing and those on the 
rear half of the circle too low. The most convenient method of overcoming this 
is to loosen the screws at either end of the front track, upon which the front wheel 
of the carriage travels, and by raising slightly the pillars that support the track, 
place luiderneath a thin washer of paper, card-board or metal, taking care that 
equal thicknesses are placed under each pillar, then turn down the screws. This 
elevates the front track, and correspondingly the carriage, sufficient to allow the 
type to come in contact with the roller or platen at the same point as before, when 
the diameter of the roller was less. 

Q. Does the machine ever need oiling, and what is the best way ? A. The machine 
should be oiled regularly every alternate morning, and upon the guide rails solely. 
Two drops on each end of the rails about three inches from the end, the carriage I'un 
back and forth over the rails two or three times or more, distributing the oil the 
full length of the rails and leaving any dirt at the end of the rails, where it 
can readily be wiped off with a cloth. Oil should never be placed on any 
other part of the machine. 

Q. Is the ahgnment perraianent ? A. Yes, or nearly so ; if it is distm'bed it can be cor- 
rected by tightening the adjusting screw which passes from side to side of the 
hanger between the jaws of which the type bar works or plays, tightening as long 
as the bar will fall to its natural position when in rest, the space key, in the mean- 
time, being depressed. 

Q. Is a backing sheet ever necessary upon the platen ? A. No. 

Q. What do you consider the best writing machine on the market ? A. Pardon me if 
I decline to answer that question. It may be a matter of opinion, and it may not. 
Some of us have pronounced views, yet it may not be wise to express them. It is 
doubtful whether any particular good would come from a public answer to the 
question you propound. 

By the Court. The witness may be excused from answering the question. 

COURT ADJOURNED sine die. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 151 



(432.) A TYPEWRITER SYMPOSIUM. 

THE GENESIS OF THE WRITING MACHINE. 

The writing niacliiue was not the invention of one man, but as we see it to-day it 
is the product of many minds. As early as I7li one Henry Mills, of London, England, 
took out a patent which is described as follows : 

' ' An Artificial Machine or Method for the Impressing or Ti'auscribing of Letters, 
Singly or Progressively, one after another, as in Writing, whereby all Writings what- 
soever may be Engrossed in Paper or Parchment, so Neat and Exact as not to be dis- 
tinguished from Print. . . ."' 

There is no record that this device ever went into practical use. Mills was foUowed 
by several inventions of greater or less utility, most of them being apparently an effort 
to produce printing for the blind. 

The first American typewriter Avas that of Charles Thurber, of Worcester, Mass., 
who took out letters patent in 1843, but his contrivance had no practical merit. He 
was followed by Alfred E. Beach, of New York, who made a model of a machine in 
l.'^iT which printed upon a sheet of paper supported on a roller, carried in a sliding 
frame, worked by ratchet and pawl, and having a weight for running the frame. It 
also had letter and line spacing keys, a paper feed device, line signal bell, and a series 
of finger keys connected Avith the printing levers Avhich were arranged in a circle, and 
struck at a common point on the roller. 

From this description it would appear that this machine was in many respects the 
precursor of the typewriter of to-day. Another form of Beach's invention was a ma- 
chine to print raised letters without ink (presumably for the blind), for which a patent 
was granted in 1856. This machine is said to have executed good work, and could be 
operated with some rapidity. 

The typewriter of the present day seems to have been forshadowed in many of its 
essential features by the devices above mentioned, but owing to the absence of a prac- 
tical OLitcome to these inventions it has been the wont to ascribe the present perfection 
of the machine to Christopher Latham Slides, and the master minds that Avith ingenuity 



153 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

and persistency developed his machine and brought it before the pubhc. Mr. Sholes 
was born in Pennsylvania, but was of pure New England stock, and while occupying a 
government position in Milwaukee, in 1867, constructed a typewriter, developing the 
same from an apparatus for paging books. The first crude instrument was made in col- 
laboration with a Mr. Glidden and Mr. Soule, and was called the "Sholes & Glidden 
Typewriter," or the "Milwaukee Machine." 

In February, 1873, Mr. G. W. N. Yost took this contrivance, which was a common 
blacksmith's job, and made a contract Avith the Remington Armory at Ilion, N. Y., to 
construct some models, using the principles of the old machine, though no single piece 
or part of it, and to produce a typewriter that would be a success artistically and me- 
chanically. 

About this time Mr. Sholes was stricken down with an incurable illness, and the 
manufacture of the machine was pushed by the energy and capital of other interested 
parties. During 1874—5 and 6 quite a number of the machines, which printed capital 
letters only, were put forth, but the business had in it nothing of promise. 

It became apparent that the typewriter, to be truly successful, must print lower- 
case as well as capitals, and in 1877 the first model of this style of writing machine was 
produced, being the result of the joint efforts and invention of Messrs. Yost, Byron A. 
Brooks, W. K. Jenne and others. 

The names of Sholes, Glidden, Yost, Brooks and Jenne are most prominent in the 
history of the invention of the typewriter of the presant ; and it is equally the fact that 
valuable ideas descended to them from previous inventors. No one man can claim the 
invention, although those we have named, and some others, are entitled to credit — one 
for a phase of creative genius, another for the clever adaptation of fugitive ideas, and 
still another, perhaps, for energy displayed in bringing forward, in the f ace of difti :ul- 
ties, a machine destined to become such a power in the mechanical, literary and business 
world. 

(^33.) THE TYPEWRITER IN A LAW OFFICE. 

The benefits conferred upon the legal fraternity by the perfection of the type- 
writer and the adoption of it in law offices are almost incalculable. The laborious meth- 
ods in use from time immemorial by the students of Blackstone have been pounded out 
of existence. The merry click of the typewriter keys is now a neccessary accompani- 
ment to the hard thinking of the \a.wjev. In days gone by the writing of a brief was a 
task which the most vigorous counsellor undertook v.dth great reluctance. It meant long 
hours of tedious work and when the "copy" was ready for revision it was such a 
gigantic mass that the duty was relegated to some poorly paid clerk. But now the law- 
yer maps out his general policy in the brief, looks up his authorities and gets them in 
order, and when everything is in readiness for the real labor, behold! — it vanishes into 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. ' 153 

almost a pleasant pastime. A stenographer sits quietly at a table, and his presence is 
forgotten as the lawyer states his proposition and proves each and eveiy one by freely 
quoting from the various decisions bearing on the subject. "When the "copy" comes 
from the stenographer it is so insignificant that the lavryer attacks it with zeal, and it is 
soon in the hands of the printer. 

The typewriter has had a hard battle to fight, however, in the law office, as in every 
other place into which it has forced itself by its persisteat and inherent good qualities. 
When it was first taken into the legal sanctum " on trial" it was only used for papers of 
no special value. It was not considered safe to have typewritten those documents which 
had to stand the test of time, and in a measure this idea was correct ; for the ribbons 
first used were of very inferior quality, and the work produced with them was very liable 
to fade after but a few years. These defects were soon remedied, and when it became 
known that the typewritten matter would stand good for any number of years, the 
machine was gradually given employment in making up leases and mortgages, and it is 
to-day used in many offices for printing such sedate documents as deeds. 

The first typewriters were very noisy little affairs, and it required a sort of edu- 
cation to get used to their incessant chattering. This disagreeable feature has been 
practically done away with. But, were this not so, the typewriter would still maintain 
its position as a necessary part of the equipment of a law office. No lawyer of standing 
in his profession (save some old fogy Avho wears paper collars and writes with a quill) 
could be induced, under an}- consideration, to part with his little assistant. Complain 
as he may of its noise, howl as he Avill at the errors of the amanuensis, grumble as he 
does at its cost, he would look at you almost in fury, and think you insane, should you 
suggest that he go back to the old method. 

No, the typewriter in the law office is a fixture. Though it may be thumped by 
a dozen different operators, Avith varjing degrees of power and unevenness, in the course 
of a single week in its allotted period of usefulness, it never complains ; though its little 
insides are allowed to become dirty and greasy, it never gets grumpy ; though wound up 
and wound down, twisted and turned, from daylight to dark, and dark to daylight, it 
never asks for a vacation ; though often misused, scolded and bruised, it goes merrily 
along day after day, with never a sigh. 

I. S. Dement, Chicago. 

(^34.) THE TYPEWRITER AND TELEGRAPHY. 

The typewriter in the telegi'aph office has long since passed the experimental stage 
and is now an established necessity, especially in press work. 

Great progress has been made of late years in the method of receiving press matter 
by telegraph. At the outset, receiving " news by telegraph " was a slow and tedious 
process, as it was all received, the same as commercial business at that time, on a "paper 



154 ■ PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

mill," or, in other Avords, a register. This is a machine with a naiTow strip of paper 
passing through it, and wound up like a clock. In order to do press work it required 
three men, one to keep the machine wound up and see that the j^aper passed through 
correctly, an operator to read the dots and dashes from the paper, and a third to write 
the matter out. Frequently when the sender was "rushing'' he would get two or three 
bushels of paper ahead of the receiver. 

Next came reading by sound direct from the instruments, the operator taking as 
many copies as needed, up to fifteen, by means of manifold. When additional copies 
were needed it required another operator. Receiving fifteen simultaneous copies at 
a high rate of speed is decidedly hard on the receiver, as he must use great pressure in 
order to get the impression through the fifteenth sheet in readable shape. 

This method of doing press work has held its own for a long term of years, but is 
gradually being relegated to the past. Eighteen hundred words per hour is very good 
work by this method. But the great need of the large daily papers for more press 
matter, and plainer copy in the same space of time, has rapidly brought the typewriter 
to the front. 

As near as I can ascertain, Mr. Eastman, night manager of the Western Union 
Telegraph Co., Portland, Maine, was one of the first, if not the very first, operators in 
the country to ]}ermanently use the typewriter in telegraphy. A little over five years 
ago he introduced the machine Avhich he still uses in receiving press. 

The next to use the typewriter was Mr. Johnson of the Associated Press, Boston, 
some four years ago, and since that time its spread has been very rapid. The Associated 
Press of New York adopted the typewriter about three years ago, and will not now 
employ an operator unless he uses the machine, or will agree to learn immediately. 

The introduction of the " Phillips code " of abbreviations has made an increase of 
more than fifty per cent in the speed attained by the sending operators. This can be 
best illustrated by part of an item which I clip from the Electric Age : "Washington 
28. — T actg comr o Indian affrs reed t flwg telgm ts eve fm Indian agt Dixon at Cham- 
berlain, S. D. :— Trs no tbl to be expected at present fm Inds on Crow Creek resvtn. 
Ty r n mch disturbed bi t recent uprising & thus far no dancg hs b permitted." etc. 

The above contains eighty-four letters. As written out in full by the receiving 
operator, thus : " Washington, 28. The acting commissioner of Indian affairs received 
the following telegram this evening from Indian Agent Dixon at Chamberlain, S. D.:— 
There is no trouble to be expected at present from Indians on Crow Creek reservation. 
They are not much disturbed by the recent uprising and thus far no dancing has been 
permitted."— it contains one hundred and twenty-two letters. 

Frequently such combinations as the following are used: yap for "yesterday 
afternoon;" aut for " adjourned until tomorroAV ; " cbi for "covered by insurance ; 
t f for "the following ; " h b for " has been ; " and hundreds of others. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 155 

One writer maintains that a first-class press operator should be able to receive 
eighty words per minute on the typewriter. Taking into consideration the fact that the 
receiver must hsten to the sound of his instrument, remember instantly the meaning of 
these combinations, and transcribe them in first-class shape ready for the hand of the 
printer, it Avill be seen that he must be able to keep up this speed, and as the matter 
•comes in a steady stream, he has very little or no time for corrections. 

In a very few years the operator who takes press reports without the aid of a 
ty]Dewriter will be as much of a "back number" as is the "paper miU" operator of 
to-day. Harry H. White. 



(i35.) THE TYPEWRITER FOR UTERARY WORKERS. 

TJie typewriter deserves an important place in the literary workshop. There is 
an unmistakable element of drudgery to much pen writing, particularly Avhen it is that 
of the copyist, or when a clog to the forthcoming idea. If "the line labors and the 
words move slow," it matters not what the instrument or manner of writing may be ; 
but when the act of composition is a "fine frenzy," it is a distraction to suffer any 
impediment to the transference of the elusive idea to paper. 

Then it is that some method of quick, and more or less mechanical writing proves 
agreeable. Few Avriters there are Avho can at the first sitting clothe a subject with 
the diction they are willing to regard as final ; undoubtedly the number of famous 
writers can be counted upon the fingers who are able to conceive and execute that 
which will stand as filial "copy." 

After a subject is in any manner jotted down, the typewriter can be made to jier 
form the labor, and make less wearisome a painstaking elaboration of the " gar- 
ment of thought." In the first place it furnishes a means of swift writing, and accom- 
plishes a surprising quantity of work without great fatigue. Its p-oduct is entirely 
legible, and simulates print. For the latter reason it is in such shape that corrections 
can be clearly made, and Avith as much ease and exactness as the editor corrects ' ' Avet 
proof " — in fact, the revision of manuprint is very much like reading proof. 

The clearness Avith which everything stands out (even errors) is an advantage, and 
when all is ready for the second, third — or tenth — draft, swift writing in easy fashion 
comes to the rescue, and the labor is reduced to a minimum. 

The machine Avork can be performed by the author, or it can be turned over to the 
copyist. Quick estimates can also be made of the quantity of matter, for the machine- 
made character of it makes the calculation of one page answer for an average of many. 

The editor likes typeAvritten manuscript, and why shouldn't he ? It is comfortable 
to read, and exhibits the fine points of the composition as vividly as a page of 



156 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

DeVinne. He also knows how much matter he is ""onsidering, and can calculate more 
closely upon filling a given space. 

As to the effect of the writing machine upon the style of the literary worker, the 
number of prominent writers Avho are employing it is evidence that it adds to rather 
than detracts from the quality of their style. With pen writing there is too much con- 
trast between the spirituality of thought and the humdrum of the labor. It would 
seem that an author's style would be vastly improved if the spontaneity of invention 
could be equalled by a rapidity of record. 

Certain it is that the typewriter in point of speed far exceeds the pen, and many 
a fleeting thought can be taken on the wing when experience with the machine has 
made close attention to it unnecessary. 



(436.) THE TYPEWRITER IN THE NEWSPAPER OFFICE. 

The jarime advantage of the typewriter in a newspaper office is that it remedies the 
bane of the typesetter's life — bad or blind copy. On the other hand, typewritten copy 
is the joy of the compositor's heart, because being as legible as printed matter he can 
set fifteen per cent more of it a day, in an office like the Boston Herald or Globe, than 
he can set from the average handwritten manuscript. This would make a difference of 
over five dollars a week in the average wages of the compositors on the metropolitan 
dailies. 

Desk editors and copyholders much prefer typewritten copy, because it is less trying 
to the eyes. This advantage will be apparent to everyone when it is understood that 
the bulk of this work is done at night, when artificial light must be relied upon entirely. 

In the business department of the great daily newspaper the Avriting machine does 
its work in much the same manner, and is equally as valuable as in anj^ commercial 
house ; so little need be said in this connection. 

But in the reporfcorial division it has a labor and time-saving service to perform. The 
men who write up the proceedings of the political meetings, conventions and the like, 
find it considerably to their advantage to have access to a typewriter. The shorthand 
members of the corps have an especial regard for the little machine ; doubtless having 
in mind the former time when weary hours of pen scratching were succeeded by stUl 
more weary— cycles, it would seem, required to transfer the hieroglyphics into legible 
copy. But with the advent of the writing machine the time gained is no less an item to 
them than the labor saved. 

In short, with the typewriter copy can be prepared in much less time, and being so 
clearly presented, the editorial treatment of it proceeds much more quickly. Then 
whatever facihtates the business of the upper regions of a great newspaper office hastens 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 137 

matters in the mechanical departments below ; so that as small an instrument as 
the typewriter can be made to command respect in such a hive of industry, where 
every moment of time gained is money saved. D. J- McGrath. 



(437.) THE TYPEWRITER ON THE RAILWAY. 

One of the enterprising railroads of this country has introduced an innovation in 
the shape of stenographic and typewriting service upon some of its trains. Presented as 
a luxury among the other elegant appointments of the road, it has grown into a practi 
cal feature, and one greatly appreciated by the traveling public. 

We quote from the circular: "The stenographer is an employe of the railroad 
company, and serves passengers without fees or gratuities. Correspondence only is taken 
and despatched. 

" As the time of the stenographer is limited, it being important that all dictations 
be typewritten en route between certain points, and in order that every passenger should 
have an equal chance to benefit by this service, the stenographer records each application, 
and takes up the work of each in the rotation of entry. 

" Twenty minutes are allowed each individual for his dictation at any one time ^ 
though if the stenographer finds that his engagements will permit, a passenger may 
resume his dictation after other applicants have been accommodated." 

The business man making a run between certain points within which this ser- 
vice is granted, can gain a day a least in his correspondence ; and if he be a traveller on a 
long journey, this facility for letter writing must be very welcome. Probably a great 
many at first take advantage of it out of curiosity, or to while away the tedium of car 
i-iding ; but there is no doubt the service has practical advantages that will outweigh all 
others, and make it a permanent feature of our railroading. 



(438.) THE TYPEWRITER IN THE HOTEL. 

The writing machine has also come to be a familiar part of the appointments of 
the hotel corridor, alongside of the news-stand and the telegraph operator, and in such a 
place it '^roves to be naore of a convenience to the traveling public than upon the railroad 
train or in the downtown office. 

The writer must be equipped for any emergency, and therefore an expert in every 
sense of the Avord. He is commonly a shorthand writer (and often a lady), but it is 
noticeable that considerable satisfaction comes from dictation direct upon the machine, 
because of the ready completicn of the work ; though, if the dictator has much to be 
done, and is in a hurry, the shorthand method is preferable. 



158 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

Dictation direct upon the machine calls for a remarkably good operator', for the 
speaker may exhibit provincialisms of language or peculiarities of utterance puzzling to 
the listener in an offhand dictation. Then there is the ever-present contingency and 
need for fast Avriting, and the importance of absolute accuracy. Consequently it will be 
readily understood that uncommon skill is required if the writer would be infallible. 

The varietj^ of work also demands a complete mastery of the machine, as Avell 
as general education and culture in the manipulator. The equipment of the "stand" 
should comprise a varied supply of material, a copying press, duplicating process, binding 
•apparatus, etc., etc.; in short, every thing that might be called for by the patron — whether 
he be a contractor desiring to rough out a specification ; the president of a corporation 
who would draw up a contract ; the representative of a business house wishing to pre- 
pare a list of goods and prices ; or travellers in general anxious to dispatch bothersome 
correspondence. 

Thus has been outlined the requirements of the service, which being in its 
infancy has some faults. It will be noted that the work is hkely to be exacting, and the 
income from such a position is — with few exceptions — not sufficient to compensate the 
best "all-round" operators ; which probably accounts for the variability in the quality 
of the work as observed by one traveling about the country. 

This, however, will be remedied as the movement for better typewriting gains in 
■strength, and the patronage granted warrants the entrance into the business of the finest 
.and best educated writers. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 159 



Business Letters for Dictation Practice. 



(1.) 

Messrs. STETSON & ALLEN, 

C a in b r i d. g e p o r t , Mass. 
Dear Sirs : 

We wired you to-day, "WHERE IS THE CARGO OF SPRUCE 
BOARDS FOR NEW YORK CITY ? ANSWER QUICK." (25) 

You promised us to ship this lumber the first of the month, and our parties have 
been hovmding us for at least four weeks for (50) the same. We must have it in some 
way, or else purchase elsewhere ; in which case we would have to charge you the 
difference in (75) the price, but we hope to hear from you that the schooner is on the 
way. 

We would like to inquire if you have any (100) intention of shipping our order of ash 
for New York City, which you have written us at least a half dozen times would come 
(•25) right along. This is either playing fast and loose with Avords, or else your shipper 
does not know Avhat he is talking about. We should (50) like to know Avhether you 
have any intention of filling this; if not, we shall go ahead and buy stock for your account. 
We have (75) Avaited until our patience is exhausted. 

When Avill you ship us another cargo of the hemlock boards ? Our party having 
order 1506 is (200) in a great rush for his lot. We hope you Avill give him as many 12 x 
10 ft. as possible. 

Remember that Ave wrote (25) you that Ave only got $11.75 for this cargo, and we 
hope you a\u11 put it in to us at this price (50). You have Avritten us several letters since, 
but you have not said anything about this. 

The " Jonathan SaAvyer " cargo is discharging. There is a (75) good deal of narrow 
stock in it, and more coarse stock than Ave have ever seen in any sidings from you. It 
Avill not run nearly (300) as good as the ' ' Bennett " cargo. Was this sawn at the same mill 
as the other ? It does not look that way. 

Yours very truly, (325) 



(2.) 

Office of WILDCAT R. R. CO., 

Chattanooga, Tenn., NoA^ember 21, 1S91„ 
Messrs. VAN DYKE & PORTER, 

29 West Commercial Street, 

Louisville, Kentucky. 
Gentlemen : 

We have considerable (25) heavy work — mostly excavations — and 
would like you to see it and bid on same. Dump carts or No. 2 Avheel scrapes can be 



160 PRAC2ICAL TYPEWRITING. 

used (50) to advantage. The material is clay, with now and then a stratum of gravel or 
loose rock, and probably solid rock will be encountered. 

Bids (75) should read so much per cubic yard for each class of material, and cover 
clay, sand, gravel, loose and solid rock. Earth to be doubled (100) from cut to fill, as the 
Chief Engineer may deem advisable, free haul not to exceed 1,000 feet. 

Kindly favor us Avith a prompt (25) reply. Bids close December 1st. 

Respectfully yours, 



G-eneral Manager. (134) 

(3.) 
Messrs. A. B. & CO., 

HeraldOffice, 

IS' e Av York City. 
Gentlemen : 

In reply to advertisement in to-day's Herald, I would respectfully 
tender you my services (25) for the position you have to fill. I am desirous of obtain- 
ing employment, and Avould not consider present salary so much an object as the (50) 
prospect of a permanent and respectable situation. 

I am a young man twenty-one years of age, and single. I have received a good 
commercial (75) education, and am versed in bookkeeping and accounts generally. I am 
willing to render myself generally useful, and although I have not hitherto filled a (100) 
situation, I doubt not that in a short time I should be able to fulfil any duties assigned 
to me. 

In the event of your (25) considering my application for employment, I hereAvith 
furnish you Avith testimonials as to character, and could, if necessary, provide guaran- 
tees for fidelity. 

Trusting that I (50) may have the pleasure of hearing from you in reply, I remain, 

Yours very respectfully, (165) 



(i.) 
Mr. FRANCIS H. THOMPSON, 

St. Joseph, Mo. 
Dear Sir : 

We are having some demand for electric street-raihvay securities, 
and anything that you can submit of (25) that character Avill have very favorable con- 
sideration. As a motor for street raihvaj^s, electricity seems to be permeating the West, 
and hardly any city of (50) consequence is noAV Avithout its electric street raihvay. 

Most of these plants are paying handsomely, and the income seems to be so steady 
and certain (75) that the public is inspired Avith confidence in the investments Avhich 
these securities afford. We are handling a good deal of such stocks, and already (100) 
the dividends Avhicli have accrued are quite liandsome. 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 161 

We think, in view of your wide acquaintance through®mt the country, you will be 
able to give (25) us some transactions in this direction, and we are certain the same will 
be mutually advantageous. Eaih-oad securities are also in pretty good standing, 
although (50) the putting of several of the Western roads into the hands of receivers has 
given some of the bonds a black eye, and we can (75) only make really good propositions 
just now on the basis of electric securities, farm moi'tgages and raikoad bonds at the 
moment being a ti-ifle unpopular (200). 

The crops in the West promise vvell, hoM^ever, and that means prosperity for the 
farmer, and the ultimate restoring to favor of the Western farm mortgage. Awaiting 
your (25) action with regard to electric securities, and soliciting any further information 
which you may secure as you travel through the West, we ai-e, 

Yours very truly, (250) 

(5.) 
Mr. ARTHUR STACKPOLE, 

Washington, Kansas. 

Dear Sir : 

I regret that the insertion of your advertisement in the May EN- 
LIGHTENED EARTH was not acceptable to you. It was done in a (25) purely com- 
plimentary way, and came about in the following manner : We had had a certain 
l^arty's advertisement set up to occupy the space Avhere your (50) ad. was given, and had 
received his order to insert it in the May EARTH, but as we were not entirely satisfied 
as to his (75) responsibility, we wrote him that it would be necessary for him to remit 
in advance for the advertisement, and held our forms open for him (100) twenty-four 
hours after we should have gone to press. Finally, as his remittance did not come to 
hand, I thought to compliment and please (25) you by running j^our ad. in for one issue. 
The party's remittance came to hand the day after we went to press, but of course 
(50) the advertisement could not be changed. 

I beg to assure you of only the friendliest feeling in every way, and regret that you 
should (75) not have approved of the insertion of the advertisement. 

We may be able to handle some of your new edition at the advanced price, although 
(200) we should much prefer that you had kept the price at what it was originally 
stated, and at which price it has already been considerably (25) advertised. We fear an 
advance of price may somewhat hold its sale. 

Assuring you of our desire to please you in ever}^ particular, and hoping (50) to have 
the pleasure of hearing from you at all times, 

Yours truly, (263) 

(6.) 
Messrs. KIMBALL & GRAY. 

Brunswick, Maine. 

Gentlemen ; 

We send you by this mail a catalogue of our coal furnace, also circulars 

of both furnace and combination heaters. The hot water (25) attachment of the No. 

2i adds SiO to the cost of the heater. 



1G2 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 

The inside Avater surface should be proportioned to the amount of (50) radiating sur- 
face, and, of course, the amount of radiating surface is dependent upon the amount of 
room you desire to heat with water. 

Care must (75) be taken in putting in these combination heaters to have them 
properly adapted to the work they are expected to do. Our plan is usually (100), in heat- 
ing a medijLim size dwelling, to put one radiator in the hall of the first floor, and perhaps 
one in the dining room, with (25) two or three registers in the other I'ooms, which com 
plete the lower story. The second story to be warmed entirely by hot water. 

You must (50) figure in the first floor for radiators, one foot of surface to 30 cubic 
feet, and for the second story, if only for sleeping rooms, (75) oue to 40 or 45. Of 
course,, if you have but few radiators you would not need so much water surface inside, 
and depend more (200) on hot air, in which case we should not attach the coil to the 
heater. 

If you can give us an idea of what you (25) have to do, showing a little floor plan of 
each story and sizes, etc. , we could advise you more deflnitely if you desire it. 

We (50) are having a very large sale of these heaters, and believe them to be the 
coming method for heating dwellings ; and think if you will (75) put in a few in your 
neighborhood, it will prove a beginning of considerable business. 

Thanking you for your inquiry, we remain 

Yery truly yours, (300) 



(7.) 

JONATHAN HOLWAY, Esq., 

Auburn, Maine. 
Dear Sir : 

Your favor of the ISth instant received and noted. 

The $2. 00 bill which you say was not found in my letter when it (25) reached you, 
was enclosed when it left the house. Not then having a $2.00 bill, I was obliged to bor- 
row the money to put (50) in, and for that reason the incident is more distinctly 
recalled. 

However, it was a careless and unbusiness-like thing to send even that sum (75) in 
the manner I did ; and although you are a wealthy house, and I am a person in humble 
circumstances, that does not make it right (100) for me to accept goods from you with- 
out giving an equivalent, or excuse me for having forwarded my first amount in an 
unsafe way. Enclosed (25) please find money order for $2.00. 

Furthermore, I have been somewhat acquainted Math your house for years, and your 
goods give me perfect satisfaction. Perhaps (50) it is about time for you to receive "a 
bonus " from your patrons for the excellence of the goods you manufacture. If I had 
not been (75) a patron of your house for some time, of course I could not in truth write 
all this, and perhaps should not be as desirous (200) of having you keep the enclosed 
money, which in this case I certainly wish you to do. 

Trusting that such an occurrence may not happen (25) again, I am 

Yours respectfully, (230) 



PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING. 163 

(8.) 
Messrs. SHAW & SHEPAhD, 

Lancaster, New Hampshire. 
Gentlemen : 

The attention of the trade generally is respectfully called to the 
improved method employed hy us for the setting of fancy colored or plain glass, (25) for 
any purpose. By our method we obtain a perfect sash, that cannot be broken by any 
ordinary usage, is particularly adapted for panels, (50) windows, etc., is not affected by 
heat or cold, is impervious to dust or moisture ; can be handled without danger of 
bending or distorting in (75) any manner, and is as stiff as a solid light of glass. We are 
not restricted to any design or particular shape. When set in its (100) frame no rods or 
other equivalent are employed, which mar the effect of the design and are objectionable for 
many reasons. This will be highly {'lo) appreciated, particularly in door panels, as 
the rigidity of this setting will withstand the slamming of doors with less danger of 
breaking than a (50) solid plate. 

The metallic face or back of setting can be furnished in any color or finish desired, 
such as zinc, copper, nickel, silver, gold, (75) etc. All colors are durable, being electric 
plate. When desired, the face can be one coloi' and the back of another, to correspond 
with inside and (200) outside finish of the building. Designers can have full sway with 
this setting, as we are not limited in any respect. Our setting being cut (25) from a 
solid sheet of metal, there are no joints, and therefore we can follow any line desired. 
The cost of this setting is but (5(i) little, if any, higher than for lead work ; this in itself 
will, we think, commend its use. Samples will be furnished to responsible parties. 

Yours truly, (275) 

(9.) 
Messrs. MITCHELL & BICKFORD, 

Taunton, Mass. 
Gentlemen : 

I have yours of the 24th instant, and have drawn voucher in your 
favor for $257.73, total receipts (25) for 432 tickets sold being $275.45. 

I, of course, am as sorry and disappointed as you can be that (50) the affair did not 
turn out more satisfactorily, but as far as the advertising is concerned, we certainly did 
everything that could be expected (75) of us. Every particle of the matter you sent was 
delivered to our agents all along the line of the road, with definite instructions to (lOu) 
have it posted or distributed, and over 100 of your bills of different kinds were placed in 
the hands of our bill poster here, who (25) states that they were put up in good shape 
and thoroughly. 

Besides this, we ourselves had 2,000 large hangers printed and sent everywhere (50) 
within the proper territory, and also expended $30.00 in advertisements occupying good 
spacf in all Lewiston and Portland papers. 

As your address is, I (75) presume, continually changing, and it may require a day 
or two to get the customary signatures to voucher, I shall not direct the treasurer to 
(200) send to Lawrence, but hand to me, and I will forward to whatever address you 
may give. 

Kindlv take particular notice of this. 

Yours truly, (225) 



INDEX. 

(Figures denote paragraphs unless page is indicated.) 
REMINGTON EXHIBIT. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

By supeiior ligures 48 

Errors of 176 

For tlie telegraplier 194 

Of punctuation marks (i8 

1,000, at, cent 50d 

ABBREVIATED LONGHAND. 

Standard, and origin of same 132 

A common use of 112 

ACCURACY. 

Desirability of C6 

111 methodic procedure 20 

When copying 1S4 

Of mimeograpli work 177, 179 

Rt'marks about 193 

AFFIXES. 

Fingering of , 40 

Treatment in words 51 

I" abbreviated longhand 133 

At beginning of line. 60 

ALL-FINGER METHOD. 

Standing and capacity Preface 

Full scope of 19 

Leads to mechanical writing 35 

For continuous writing 36, 186 

Remarks 20 

ALIGNMENT. 

Suggestions about 78, 93, 99, 199 

To write above 48 

To align the types 92 

Relation of scale to 3,13,197 

AMANUENSIS. 

Good advice to 173 

Dictation to 67, 183 

Sliould paragraph Ill 

Checking work with 68, 198 

Suggestions to 115,173, 189 

BACKING. 

Of law-forms, etc pp. 55. 56 

Sheets on platen 78 

CAPITALS. 

Ill punctuation 149 

In telegrams, etc 87 

When directing envelopes 84 

Address of letter p. 68, 60 

Words in 154 

How produced ]0 

How fingered 26 

In Touch Writing 35 

CARBON PAPER. 

Durability of 13c 



Writing, permanency of 70 

How preserved 171 

When duplicating contracts 188 

Remarks 206 



See MANIFOLDING. 
CARE OF MACHINE. 

See Expedients and Direclions. 



Cleaning .. 9, 

Oiling 13b^ 

Adjustment 

Tensions 

Cloth cover 13, 

Custom of some concerns 6B, 

Removing back rod 



90 

13 

, 94 

78 

98 

121 

136 

207 



CARRIAGE p. viii. 

To return 5 

See also Diagram, Fig. 1401 p. vii. 

Release-key 3 

How to lift 6 

Tension 98 

Returning in Touch writing 64 

Front carriage-rod 48, 94, 104, 191) 

Lifting a habit 184 

Back rod of , 207 

CHARACTERS. 

Cedilla and acute accent 118 

Chemical formula. 48 

Degrees, minutes and seconds 108 

Feet and inches 108 

Mathematical 157 

Letter? 44 

Combinations of 135 

Letter B 25, 103 

Peculiar combinations of pp ."lO. 66, 68 

The/ ...46, 79, 133 

The period 141 

Section-mark 162 

Long and short accent marks 200 

Lower-case when set for upper 190 

Miscellaneous oOd 

COLON. 

In punctuation 137 

Vertical border, etc 141 

In ornamental work pp. 56-61. 66, 67 

COMMA. 

In punctuation 137 

Spacing after 28, 60, 135 

In ornamental work .pp 66, 67 

Suggestions about 135, 152, 153 

COMPENSATION. 

Of operator furnishing machine 126 

CONTRACTS. 

How to prepare 138 



166 



INDEX. 



CORRECTIONS. 

How to make 00 

By use or scale J 3 

Where to make 155, 193 

To supiily omission 13, 192 

By Biasing' 123 124 

Avoid in body of MS 155 

Of carbon copies 13c, 79 

Of mimeograph work 179 

Omissions, iiow supplied 48, 193 

To insert apostrophe 192 

Bythecaret 60,191 

By reading copy 1S3 

Assisted by proper scale adjustment 197 

Faint letters 135 

Suggestions , , , , . . . 160 

DIAGRAMS. 

" Universal " keyboard 18 

Machine with figured parts p. vii. 

Of all-finger method 19 

Touch-writing exhibit p. 13 

Of abbreviated longhand p. 43 

U. S. land section 109 

Of improved knee-shift p. 50 

Of letter addresses p. 27 

DICTATION. 

Material for 56 

To amanuensis 67 

AVhen checking work 68, 193 

Good method of 183 

DUPLICATES. 

Carbon .... 13c 

For filing 103 

Of typewritten letter 105 

Thin paper for 168 

Htiwtomark 206 

Of contracts 188 

See MANIFOLDING. 

ENVELOPES. 

How to direct 85 

Style of addressing 60, 84 

Envelope holder 85 

Knee-shift when directing 84 



ERASURES. 

How to make 124 

Without marring 132 

In carbon copies 13c 

Tools for 124 

In contracts 188 

FAC-SIMILE MATTER. 

Introductory remarks p. 54 

Law forms pp. 57-59 

Tabular pp. 63-65, 70 

Ornamental writing pp. 66-68 

Backings pp. 55, 56 

Business forms. . . pp. 6U-03 

Explanation of fancy borders 198 

Specimen of letter p. 28 

Samples of letter addresses p. 68 

See also fac-simile of other machine exhibits. 

FIGURING. 

Of " universal " kej'board 18 

Of letters explained 19 

Remarks about prefixes and affixes 40 

Figures written in words 175, 188 



F.NGERS. 

In methodic writing 19 

Stiff, how treated 17 

Action of third 17 

Duty of fourth 19, 2l> 

— of right thumb 19 

Simultaneous action of 102 

Studies for 31 

Fluent action of 30 

Action of index 19 34 

Practice for left little -MX 

—for right little :.;02 



FORMS. 

Remarks about p. 54 

Appeal from Superior Court p. 57 

Arg'ument in equity p. 57 

Assignment of stock p. 02 

Backing, abstract of title p. 

Decision, Circuit Court p. 

Examination of title p. 

Law case p. 

Notice and interrogatories p. 

Bond p. 

Captions, blank p. 

Cover, stenograpliio report p. 

Cross-bill, Superior Court p. 

Decision in Superior Court p. 

Decree in Chancery p. 

Deposition p. 

Extracts from specitications pp. 63, 

Fancy forms pp. 66-68, 

Invoice p. 

Letter 60 

Typewritten letter p. 09 01 

Typewritten will 187 

Notary's certificate p. 59 

Opinion of Court '. p. 58 

Power of attorney p. GO 

Proxy p. 61 

Release p. 01 

Sight draft p. 61 

Subscription list.' p. 00 

Tabular, miscellaneous pp. 03-05, 70 

For contracts 1S8 



GENERAL PROCEDURE. 

When copying 184 

Dictation 183 

Place tor notebook 185 

Continuous writing 36, 186 

When preparing mimeograph stencil 177 

HANDS. 

Position at keyboard 16 

Primary and secondary position 34 

Territory of 18, 19 

Position in Touch Writing 34 

HYPHEN. 

When justifying lines 28 

In punctu.ation 1'47 

With comma. 1 35 

In tabular work. . . 141 

In numerals 40 

When writing all capitals 190 

KEYBOARD. 

"Universal" IS 

Explanation of 10 

To memorize 18 

" Guide-keys " of 34 

Why in-og'ulnrly arranged 65 



INDEX. 



icr 



KNEE-SHIFT. 

An effective 91 

Same improved 196 

Wlien directing envelopes 84 

LETTERS. 

First directions for writing 56 

Further directions ij9, 60 

Textual forms for 60 

Typewritten form p. 69 61 

To denote copy of 206 

Indexing 166 

Paragraphing of Ill 

Press copies of ■ 10.5 

Circular •. 113 

Second pages of 161, 168, ITA 

Registered 105 

Informal 113 

Enclosures of 104, 168 

Carbon duplicates of 103 

Mailing 172 

Style of addressing 00, 84 

Quotation within 174 

Figures in 175 

Errors in 176 

Samples of addresses p. 68 

Examples for dictation practice . . pp. 83-87 

LETTERS (in words). 

Frequent combinations of 

Awkward sequences of 

Letter I 

Letter B 

Sequences in Touch Writing ... 

MANIFOLDING. 

Importance of 

By carbon paper 

To feed carbon when 

Duplicates of MSS 

To correct errors when 

Photo-electro process 

Cyclostyle. . 

Hectograph and Lithograph 

Withoixt ribbon 

Paper for 

Many duplicates 

Of contracts 



24 
41 
44 
163 
35 



103 

13c 
79 

103 
79 
75 
81 
82 
80 

168 



MARGINS. 

To regulate 

To write neiir 

To write equnlly distant from 

In MSS. forp-rmter 

Corrections in 155, 

M-DASH. 

In punctuation 

How made in typewriting 

MEMORY. 

When learning keyboard 

Perversion of 

In tabular work 

Wlien writing 



120 
89 
73 

193 



METHOD. 

Spread of All-finger, see Preface and Intro. 

Full scope of All-finger 

In word development 

When relaxed somewhat 

When adhered to 



148 
148 

IS 
117 

49 
184 



MIMEOGRAPH. 

When preparing stencil 177 

Quick printing by 179 

Figure work of 179 

To print bv 180 

Treatment'of ink 180 

Temperature for printing 181 

Fac-simile signature upon 182 

Preservation of stencils 178 

MANUSCRIPT (MS.). 

For printer 73 

Authors' 103, 204 

How to fasten 72 

Of poem 159 

Of drama 153 

To estimate number of words in 107 

Size printers prefer 110 

Of public address 160 

For publication 69, 72, 204 

Superiority of typewritten 69 

NUMERALS (Lesson IX , p. 16). 

How to begin columns of 49 

To point off 47 

Tabular work p 613-65, 70 

To raise above line 48 

FigureO 163 

In telegrams 114 

Cipher, how made on Rem. No. 2 45 

Fractions 46 

Figure 1, how made on Rem. No 2 44 

Examples for practice 50a-g 

OIL. 

Where and when to 13b 

Elusive squeaks 94 

Upon ribbon movement 95 

Benzine and 96 

How to easily 207 

PARAGRAPHS. 

When to make 60, 111 

In half-space writing 86 

Why figured 128 

When to avoid 173 

PERIOD. 

In punctuation 138 

When omitted 139 

Horizontal border 141 

To make dotted line 80 

Application in fancy writing pp. 53-70 

Instead of asterisk 138 

In tabular work 141 

POSITION. 

At machine 15 

Of fore arm . . 15 

Of hands 16 

Of fingers 16 

For good style 208, 210 

Of notebook 185 

PRACTICE. 

Primary finger 21. 22 

Primary word 23, 24, 213 

For right little finger 202 

For left little finger 201 

Graded 2,-)-32 

Touch 27, 61, 02 

Prefix and affix 39, 40 

Figure 50 a-.g 

Miscellaneous words for 51, 53, 55, 57-53 



108 



INDEX. 



PRACTICE Cont'd. 

On returning carriage G3 

Sentence 28, 30, 32, 38, 43, 53, 54, 59, 6U 

Upper manual 308 

Alphabet 203 

In use of scales 13, 197 

Dictation 83-87 

PREFIXES. 

Fing-ering of 39 

Treatment in words 51 

At end of line 60 

PUNCTUATION. 

Province of .... 134 

Spacing after 28 

Peculiarities of typewriter 135, 139, 146 

Common error of ] 50 

The comma 135, 153, 153 

Semicolon 186 

Colon 137 

Period. 28, 1 38-141 

Capitals 20, 149 

Hyphen 147 

M-dash 148 

When in doubt about 153 

Marks, use in fancy type'^'riting pp. 55-70 

Quotation marks 156 

Caret, how made 60, 191 

Exclamation, made by apostrophe and pe- 
riod. See also 143 

RIBBONS. 

Permanency of 70 

Ink, i-ecipe for 74 

Colored 70, 75, 83 

Several on reels 83 

To prevent curling 71, 100 

To remove stains of 77 

Movement of 7, 95 

Lateral motion of 8 

To economize 8, 88 

Movement, friction of 100 

Hectograph and Lithograph 83 

Reinked 74 

ROLLER (Platen). 

Hardness of 78 

Backing sheet on 78 

Action when addressing envelopes 85 

RUBBER BANDS. 

To renew feed-bands 101 

Insecui-ity of 167 

Miscellaneous use of 99, 100 

SCALE. 

Explanation and use of 11 

In tabular work pp. 55, 56, 64-66, 68,'69 

See form for letter 60 

Scales of typewriting 26 

To adjust 197 

SEMICOLON. 

In punctuation 139 

Spacing after, same as comma 60, 135 

SENTENCES. 

Remarks about 28, 30 

Right division of, in dictation 56, 183 

Of common words 28, 30, 32 



Further 38, 42, 54 

Commercial 53 

With " chain" words 63 

Remembering when writing 184 

SIGNATURE. 

Place of, in letter 60 

In legal documents, etc pp. 57, 59, 61 

Legality of 1-J7 

Typewritten and otherwise 137 

In a copy 206 

In mimeograph work 183 

SPACE-BAR. 

How depressed 16, 19 

If held down ]2.> 

Tension of 98 

Spacing of titles, etc 89, 1 95 

Spacing in law citations and affidavit 

pp. 57, CO, S7 
Spacing in address and postscript of letter'. 60 

See fac-simile matter , . . . . pp. 55-70 

When period is omitted 139 

To make quotation more conspicuous 174 

SPEED. 

At beginning 23 

Suggestions for 183 

STYLE. 

Attitude of operator 208 

Treatment of keyboard 309 

Arrang-eraent of matter 211 

Typographic 213, 213 

Of manipulation 211 

TABULAR WORK. 

To begin ,9, 50 

General style of, pp 63-65, 70 

Red ink ruling of p. 54 

TENSION. 

Finger-key and carriage 98 

And ribbon movement 95 

TELEGRAMS. 

Style of 114 

Sugg'estions about 87 

Numbers in 114 

Press telegrams 194 

TERMS. 

Name for typewritten MSS 69 

Commercial 51 

Legal 57 

Anatomical 58 

The word " typewritist " nole p. 26, 205 

TITLES. 

To write equally distant from margins 89 

See fac-simile matter pp. 55-70 

Second pages of letters 173 

To arrange 195 

TOUCH. 

Significance of term " Touch Writing " 33 

Helps to writing 34 

i. e.. Finger attack 17 

Utility of writing by 36 

Mechanical aids to 34, 63 

Advantag-es of writing by 36, 63 



INDEX. 169 



TOUCH Confd. 

Early practice. .. . 27 

Finger procedure p. 15 

Poiindina: the keys 23, 211 

Imprint of tlie period 13!) 

Writin.":, ease of allainnient 33 

Position of hands 34 

Location of letters 34, 63 

Sentences, etc., for practice 60-63 

Words for practice 38 

See also pp 73-78 



Explanation of 10 

Order of 65 

To clean 9, 97 

Imitation 76 

TYPEWRITING. 

Spread of Preface and Introduction 

Requisites for early procedure 7 

From dictation. . .'. 67 

A system of tj'pev/riter shorthand 116 



Signaturein ,..,. 127 

In teleg-raphy 123 

Speed of Preface 

Reproduction of 75 

Good style of 208-214 

Press copies of 105 

For publication 304 

Outlook of Preface and 106 

UNDERSCORE. 

To make double 104 

Red ink p. 54 

Suggestions about 154 

To make horizontal line 119 

WORDS. 

Development of .23, 24 

"Chain" 63 

Common 27, 29, 31 

To estimate number of in MSS 107 

Containing difficult fingering 41 

To arrange 195 

Miscellaneous. 53, 55 



NOTE— Examination of the indexes of the other machine exhibits is recommended. 



TYPEWRITING FOB THE BLIND. 



ALL-FINGER METHOD. 

For the blind 215, 225 

Compared with seeing operator 237 

See also Remington index. 
BLIND. 

Application of typewriting to 224 

CAPITALS. 

Introduction to 241, 247 

CARBON PAPER, ) 

CARE OF MACHINE, ^Note Remington index. 

CAKRI.\GE, \ 

CHARACTERS. 

The Braille alphabet 220 

Figures, etc 340 

CORRECTIONS, Kt ^ o ■ ► ■ i 
DUPLICATES Note Remmgton uidex. 

ENVELOPES. 

To address 2G1-263 

FACSIMILE MATTER. 

Sample by blind person p. 83 

FINGERS. 

Duty of 337-339 

Note Remington index. 
FINGERING. 

General application. Note Reminglon index. 

Guides to . . . 331, 333 

Strategetic points 233 

Easy progressions 233 

Striking intervals 23a 

HANDS. 

Embossed printing for , 220 

Posilion of 236 

KEYBOARD. 

Arrangement of 235-241 

Note also diagram p, 10. 



LETTERS. 

Location of. 



.237- 



a39 
260 



LETTER WRITING. 

Details of 251 

MANIFOLDING. 

Note Remington index, 

MEMORY. 

Commit changes to 241 

In letter writing 260 

NUMERALS. 

Position of 340 

OILING, 
PAPER, 



•Note Remington index. 



PARAGRAPHS. 

Should begin 

POSITION. 

At machine 

Also note Reminglon index. 

PRACTICE. 

Simple exercises for 

Simple words 

More difficult words 

Further .348, 

Upon upper bank of keys 

Advanced exercises 

SHIFT-KEY^ 

Advantage of knee-shift 

Note also paragraphs 91, 

SPACE-BAR, Note Remington index. 

TABULAR WORK. 

For the blind 

Specimen by blind person. p. 83 



357 
234 



243 
245 
346 
349 
247 
250 

241 
196 



261 



170 



INDEX. 



TERMS. 

Guides 231 

Strategetic points. 233 

TOUCH WRITING. 

Its province 223 

For seeing and blind 337, 268 



TYPEWRITING. 

A bread winning vocation 321' 

Difficult for tlie blind 23S 

Special advantages 223 



HA-MMOND EXHIBIT. 



ALL FINGER METHOD. 

Tills bjolc limited to Universal lieybcard. . . 270 
Genera] application 273-374 

BACKING SHEET. 

Always necessary 285 

When manifolding 295 

GAPITALS. 

How ope I'ated 27-t 

CARBON PAPER. 

Special Hammond 295 

CARE OF MACHINE. 

Oiling, etc 286 

Impression strip , 389 

CARRIAGE. 

Tension cf 287 

When using wide paper 298 

CHARACTERS. 

To insert omitted 294 

Period, etc 300 

Figures 381 

CORRECTIONS. 

By notch in ribbon-shield . . 284 

To insert omitted letter 394 

By erasure 301 

When manifolding 294 

DIAGRAMS. 

Of " Universal " machine. 270 

Of " Universal" keyboard 274 

See also Diagram p. ] 

DUPLICATES. 

General advice 393 

Carbon-paper for 295 

Best results 296 

ERASURES. 

Where made 801 

FACSIMILE. 

Law forms pp. 93-94 

Letters pp. 95,96 

Tabular p. 97 

Fancy p. 98 

FMGERS. 

Left fourth 274, 288 

See also Remington index. 

FINGERING. 

Rules of 272-376 

Exceptions infrequent 276 

Details of 280 

KEYBOARD. 

Diagram of 274 

Division of 373 

MANIFOLDING. 

General instructions 295 

Paper for 296 

Corrections when 294 

Carbon paper for 295 



MARGINS. 

See Book of Directions. 

MIMEOGRAPH. 

General instructions 297 

Type- wheel for 297 

NUMERALS. 

Note allusion to figure shift 281 

OILING. 

General advice 



286 

PAPER. 

Insertion of 292 

To insert wide 293. 298 

Backing sheet 285 

To examine worli 293 

For manifolding 296 

PRACTICE. 

Primar}' 275 

Further; see indexes of Remington and for 

Blind. 
Figured example for 276 

RIBBON. 

-Shield 291 

Spools 284 

RUBBER IMPRESSION-STRIP. 

How managed 289 

To show work 293 

SCALE. 

How to read 284 

SHIFT-KEYS. 

How operated 281 

Easy action 283. 299 

Management of for capitals 274 

Simultaneous action 288 

SPACE-BAR. 

How depressed 273 

Line spacing 290 

TABULAR WORK. 

\yith wide paper 398 

Excellent on Hammond 283 

Fac-simile form p. 97 

TENSION. 

Carriage and hammer 287 

When manifolding 295 

For Mimeograph work 297 

TERMS. 

Type-wheel ...379,383,286 

TITLES. 

How placed 284 

TOUCH, 

Ttie Hammond '278 

Process of 230 

TYPES. 

Action of 279 

Wheel for Mimeograph 297 



INDEX. 



171 



YOST EXHIBIT. 



ALL FINGER METHOD. 

General remarks 3!0 

Ai.IGX.MEXT. 

Not affected by many slioets 346 

CAPITALS. 

How produced 303 

Practice for upper niunual 308 

Advantage of double manual 334 

CARE OF MACHINE. 

Cleaning- 

Friction 

Cleaning back-rail 

Cleaning types 

To remove dirt 



315 

317 

339 

32S 

315 

CARRIAGE. 

Tension of 339 

To adjust 330 

Removal of 347 

CENTER-GUIDE. 

Function of 340 

CHARACTERS. 

Number on kej-board 303 

Figure one 305 

COPYING. 

Press 

With blotters 

Best results obtained 

New pad 

CORRECTIONS. 

When to correct 

After removal of paper 

DIAGRAMS. 

Cuts of machine and keyboard p. 09 

ENVELOPES. 

When directing 

Guide for 

FACSIMILE MATTER. 

Remarks 

General /.pp. 107-110 

Fancy p. 110 

FIN^GERS. 

General treatment 

Touch of 

Duty of little 

FINGERING. 

Correct 

Exceptional 310, 

or lower manual 

Of upper manual 

HANDS. 

Territory of 

IMPRESSION. 

Clear 30r>, 

Gives best results 

INKING ARRANGEMENT. 

The Yost 314, 

How impression should look 

Pad apparently di-y 

When pad works best 

When changing pad 

To adjust pad 

In Mimeograph work 

Blank pad 



KEYBOARD. 

General remarks 302- 

Diagram of p. 99 

Primarj' practice on 

Size of 

Special types 

MANIFOLDING. 

Platen for 

Tiieatment of types 

Center-guide when 

MARGINS. 

To adjust 32G, 

MIMEOGRAPH. 

General advice 

NUMERALS. 

Figure one and cipher 

OILING. 

Kind of oil 

Points for lubrication 

Avoid 

In Mimeograph work 

PAD 

When dry 

When changing 

AVorks best 

To adjust 

PAPER. 

Best for the Y'"ost 

Backing-sheet 

Feeding 334, 

Narrow 

For superior impri.nt 

Wlien using hard platen 

POINTER. 

(ieneral comment 

For locating place 

When correcting errors 

PRACTICE. 

Primar3' 

For upper manual 

Names of cities, etc 

Further 

ROLLER (Platen). 

Hard or soft 

For manifolding 

Preserved by 

Management of 

SCALE. 

Front, use of 

For setting bell 

SENTENCES. 

For practice 

SPACE-BiVR. 

How depressed 

Simple use of ■ 

SPEED. 

Remarks 300, 

STYLE. 

Graceful writing 

TABUL.IHWORK. 

Headings of 

Use of pointer 

Specimen of p. 107 

TENSION. 

Carriage 



307 
303 
339 

310 

338 
340 



327 

327 
328 
338 

319 
321 
330 
333 

333 
810 
325 
325 
332 
310 

337 
336 
;.43 



307 
308 

348 
313 



310 
316 
316 
334 

S30 
336 



305 
330 



334 
313 



885 
31:7 



329 



172 



INDEX. 



TERMS. 

Ceiitei-.g-uide 346 

Pointer 337 

Iiildng--paa 319-333 

THE YOST. 

Features of 314 

Bacldng'-slieet foi' 316 

Poi-tability o£ 349 

Touch of 306 

Inking' apparatus 316 

Best papei- for 333 

Points to oil 337 

TOUCH. 

The Yost 306 

Writing, assisted 303 



TYPES. 

To change 348 

Toclean 331, 338 

Special 389 

Collision of 343 

To untangle 317 

Direct printing of 316 

Noiseof ,..341 

Inldngof 31T 

Superior imprint of 333 

Detaclmble 314 

Avoid oiling 338 

WORDS. 

In sentences 313 



SMITH PREMIER EXHIBIT. 



ALL-FINGER METHOD. 

General advice 353, 393 

ALIGNMENT. 

Not affected 366 

BACKING SHEET. 

To preserve platen 366 

CAPITALS. 

Order of 351 

la titles 3H4 

Practice on upper manual 360 

CARE OF MACHINE. 

Toclean the types 385 

CARRIAGE. 

Lever, how operated 373 

Movement of 375 

Whea regulating raargms 379 

CHARACTERS. 

In margin of manual 357 

Figure one 359 

Combinations 387 

Above alignment 386 

CORRECTIONS. 

To insert omitted letter 369 

Treatment of platen in 370 

Marginal 378 

DIAGRAMS. 

Of machine and keyboard pp.111, 113 

Die TATION. 

Rates for 394 

DUPLICATES. 

Rates foi' 394 

Also see Manifolding. 

ENVELOPES. 

Insertion of 368 

Size admitted 36s 

FACSIMILE MATTER. 

General. pp. 134_138 

Fancy forms n 12« 

FINGERS. ^ 

Duty of fourth 353 

Alternation of 354 

To strengthen little 358 

To operate lever 373 

FINGERING. 

General idea of 352 

HANDS. 

Territory of 3.53 

In re space-bar 355, 356 



KEYBOARD. 

Diagram of 354 

Memorizing 357 

LETTERS. 

For practice 396-401 

LOCKING MECHANISM. 

Adjustment of 

MANIFOLDING. 

Platen for 

MARGINS. 

Regulation of , 378 

Right and left 380 

Back regulator 379 

MIMEOGRAPH. 

Stencils for 

NUMERALS. 

Figure one and cipher 859 

OILING. 

General instructions 391 

PAPER. 

Feeding 364 

Finger 365 

To release 367 

Apron 367, 388 

PRACTICE. 

First 3.58 

Of fourth flng-ers 358 

Further 3(iO 

On upper manual 360 

Advanced 361 

General advice 363 

Letters for 390-401 

RATES. 

For typewriting 393-394 

RIBBON. 

Economical feed 381 

Changing 383' 

To reverse feed 383 

Standard length 383- 

Varieties of 383- 

ROLLER (Platen). 

Management of 370, 39» 

When feeding paper 364 

Preservation of 368 

When inspecting writing 376, 390 

To retui-n 376- 

To remove and restore 377! 



SCALE. 

General allusion to 375, 380 

SENTENCES. 

For practice 361, 395 

SPACE-BAR. 

How depressed 355, 356 

Line spacing- 371 

When making- titles 384 

TABULAR WORK. 

Sample of in lac-siniile p. 127 

TENSION. 

Easy action 355 



INDEX. 173 

To regulate carriage S73 

Key, — advice ST4 

TERMS. 

Rocking- shaft 3T4 

Locking- mechanism 3t0 

THE SMITH PREMIER. 

Features of 3C3 

TOUCH. 

General advice 359, 374 

TYPES. 

Guide keys 35ii, 354 

To clean 3S5 



BAR-LOCK EXHIBIT. 



ALL-FINGER METHOD. 

Application to Bar-Lock 406 

ADJUSTMENT. 

Permanent 444 

ALIGNMENT. 

How secured 403 

BAR-LOCK. 

Pioneer of writing in sig-ht 403 

Special features of 

402, 403, 406, 408, 414, 419, 420, 421, p. 140 

CAPITALS. 

Location of 406 

CARE OF MACHINE. 

General advice 43'2, 434 

CARRIAGE 408, 409, 410 

How operated 421, 422 

Escapement 422 

To remove 436 

Tension 435 

Returnmg of 421 

.Jumping for column work, vapidity of 441 

CHARACTERS. 

Order of 406 

Position of 417 

COLOR. 

Colored writing- 442 

COPY-HOLDER. 

Bar-Lock modern 440 

CORRECTING. 

Different papers without removal 414 

DUPLICATES. 

Capacilj' of machine 405 

ENVELOPES. 

How placed 413 

FAC-SIJIILE. 

Fancy 440 

FEED. 

Accurate 434 

Certain advantages 443 

FIGURES, dates, etc 426 

Columns of 428 

Quick column work 441 

FINGERS. 

Finger procedure 406, 408, 411 

Speedy action 412 

Touch 409 



FINGERING. 

Duty of fourth finger 410 

General application 410, 411 

Feed accurate 424 

Figures, certain advantages 443 

Columns of 4"i8 

Quickly written... 441 

HANDS. 

Proper use of 414 

JUMPING OF CARRIAGE. 

In column work 441 

KEYBOARD. 

Style of 402, 406 

Keyboard lock 420 

Locking stud 402, 419 

HOLDER. 

Cut of 445 

MANIFOLD 419 

When manifolding, etc 430 

Powerful as a 405 

MARGINS 417 

NUMERALS. 

How written 426 

OILING. 

Of carriage 434 

Rollers anti-friction, no oiling necessary... 424 

PAPER. 

How inserted 425 

Wide 439 

Great advantages of this machine 434 

POINTER. 

Of bell scale 419, 420 

POSITION OF OPERATOR. 

Proper position 407 

Practice in position 409, 439 

PLATEN. 

To turn back 423 

To remove 435, 431 

PRACTICE. 

Keyboard 403 

Finger 406, 410, 411 

RIBBON. 

Movement of 404 

To remove 429 

ROUND WHEEL. 

Or barrel 435 



174 



INDEX. 



SPACE-BAR, it space wauled 431 

How depressed 410 

To correct vvnting 

Dates, etc ....436, 427 

Shaip, clear 416 

PICTURE. 

Fancy of Santa Maria Caravel. ...,.,. 140 

STYLES OF 

Writing machines ,..,,.,.,,. 439 

TABULAR WORK. 

Fingering of 410 

Columns, how made ." 426, 427 

TENSION. 

Carriage, release of escapement. 423 

Key .406, 437 



TERMS. 

Origin of name ..,...,...,... 4.3"^ 

Type-bars 438 

TO CORRECT WRITING 42(i, 427 

Dales, etc 426 

TOUCH 

Of BarLoclv 409 

TO TRANSPORT OR PACK 445 

TYPE. 

If space wanted 421 

Keep clean 432 

Type-bars, adjustment of 438 

WARNING. 

Warning bell set for more or iess words. .. . 418 
Type kept clean 432 

WRITING. 

Always in sight. ....................... .403, 415 



CALIGRAPH EXHIBIT. 



ALL-FINGER METHOD. 

Instruction 440, 447, 448, 449 and 4.50, 453 

BUSINESS LETTERS FOR COPYING PRAC- 
TICE 463 

BLIND OPERATOR (note) 448 

CAPITALS 453 

CARE OF MACHINE. 

Types not to fill 457 

CARRIAIjE. 

Avoid habit of lifling ........ 461 

DIAGRAM, 

Keyboard 446 

EXERCISES 

Ami sentences 458 

FEEDING 457 

FINGERS 448, 449 

And fingering 448, 449. 450 

Training of in bar space duty 453 

HAND. 

Position of 459 

KEYBOARD. 

Univer.-al 446 



LETTERS 

Letter P, third finger 451, 

Capitals 

For copying practice 

MANUAL. 

Division of 

OILING 

PAPER. 

Do not move 

Feeding 

Insertion of 

Do not crowd 

PRACTICE. 

Piano five-finger exercise 

SHIFT KEYS 

SPACE BAH. 

Advantages of 

Two in number 

TOUCH. 

Important 

Method 

Slow at first, speed afterwards 

Staccato movement .,..,. 



447 
459 
452 
408 

447 
457 

457 
4. =-,7 
457 
4ij0 

454 
458 

451 

451 

455 
461 
456 

455 



The Gene.sis of the Writin_ 

(compiled) p. 138 432 

Typewriter in tlie Law Office, Isaac S. 

Dement p. 139 433 

The Typewriter and Telegraphy. 

Harry H. White p. 140 434 



A TYPEWRITER SYMPOSIUM. 

Machine The Typewriter for Literary Work- 



.p. 143 435 
The Typewriter in the Newspaper 

Office, D. J. McGr-alh p. 143 430 

The Typewriter on the Railway p. 144 437 

The Typewriter in llio Hotel p. 115 43i 




mmmmm 
THE BOOK-KEEPER I 

WHO POSSESSES A COPY OF p 

Goodwin's Improved Book- Keeping and Business Manual,! 

AND HAS MASTERED ITS CONTENTS, fe 

Is Onalified to fill a Position as Head BooK-Keeper for tie Largest Bnsuess Concern In tie Country. J 

Tn t-Viic K<->/-.l' 'he most striking and valuabi!! features of the various systems of ^ 

HI Llllb UUUt^ book-keeping employed in the following well-known New York houses p 

are clearly and concisely described as well as fully and correctly illustrated ; ^ 



Arnold, Constable & Co. 
Sweetser, Pembrook & Co. 
Hilton, Hughes & Co. 
Austin, Nichols & Co. 
Tefft, Weller & Co. 

The H. B. Claflin Company 



R. H. Macv & Co. ^ 

Lesher.VVliitman&Co. p 



E. S. Jaffrav & Co. 

Calhoun, Robbins & Co. 

Lord & Taylor. Edward Ridley & Sons. 

Francis H. Leggett & Co. James McCreery & Co. M 

Mills & Qibb. Stern Brothers. J 



Frederick Victor & Achelis. ^ 

^ Any book=keeper wlio liopes to obtain a situation in a large wholesale or retail house, or any person M 
p who is in any way connected with such a house, will find this book OF INESTIMABLE VALUE to him. ^ 

^ "Your book covers, in my opinion, every point nccess.nry for.-i thorough knowledtre of book-keeping as il is practised in the largest houses.'* R; 

^ — GKO. W, H. KOCH. he.id book-keeper for Tefft. Weller k Co., importers auU jobbers of dry goods. New York City, March 3. 1888. ^ 

l»t "1 iind that your book contains many important points never brought out before in a work of its kind. I consider it invaluable to the ^ 

fraternity of bOji;-keepcrs in general, anri m particul.ir to those who are connected with tile OITices of large mercaiuile houses'" — W. H. ^ 

I book- ^ 



" I find that your book 
fraternity <<{ ho-jk-keepcrs 
KUSSHLL. he.-ul honk-kc 



lever lirnught out befoi 
in i^eneml, anrl in particular to those who" are conned 
;pcr for The H. B. Claflin Company, importers and jobb( 



jTHE YOUNG MAN L'pinTr'atTin 



i 1 llt^ IV/IJl-NVJ JTirVl-.! keepinl'in"a""busin"ess'°coneTeri' 

M *— — —- =— ^-^-""^^^^^^^^^ for three dollars he can se( 

m KEEPING AND BUSINESS MANUAL," frnm wliich he can obtain. 

^ sistance of a teacher, a sufficient knowlcdsc of book-keeping to enable him t 

|p largest business concern in the country I ^ 

M m^^^ MANY HUNDREDS OF PURCHASERS— wiio had no previous knowledge of book-keeping-have secured excel- B 

m 9^7 'ent situations directly and solely through the knowledge of book-keeping acquired from a sludy of this work. m 



1 consider 
(I with the ofTices of large mercaiUilc liouses."— W. H. 
s of dry goods, New York City, March 8. i8S8. 
is and from sixty to six hundred dolla 
put it mildly— throwing away both li 
a copy of " GOODWIN'S IMPROVED BOOft 
thin loo hours' study (guaranteed), without the as- |p 



nd hold 1 



book-keeper for the < 



ctly and solely th 
" T knew nothing about Double Entry Book-keeping before I purchased your book, and had had no office experjen 
tnictions in your book I have been able not only to keep my books, but also to make all my Trial Balances. Bala 
,nd Comparative Statements, etc.. etc."— J. A. DALKYMPLE, of J. A. Dalrymple &. Co.. Haverhill, Mass., Nov. 8 

, there have been sold 41,702 copies of this work, from the purch: 



3 of which 4,077 testi- 



ii Up to Monday, Aug. -„...™, -,-,,-- --^ ^ . -- 

^ moniais have been received. Size of book, 73^x10^^ inches. 293 iiages. Printed in red and black. Richly bound. J^^Do 

m fail 10 Save this Advertisement, as it will not appear again. Those who possess this book and use it— Always Succeed I 

M DO 1^1-^ *K ^ Ort Sent, post-paid, upon receipt of price. Sixteenth Edition now ready. 

^ *^»V'^*-'» ^0»yjy^» Send lor the book or for a 32-page descriptive pamphlet. Address all orders exactly as follows: 

p J, H. GOODWIN, Room 731, 1215 Broadway, NEW YORK. 



THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF PHRENOLOGY. 

Annual Course of Eight Weeks Commences on the First 
Tuesday of September in Each Year. 



To all classes of meyi and woynen the course of lectures given ia the annual sessions of this Institute affords an unsurpassed 
opportunity for the study of human organization, in all its related aspects. Every eflfort, is made to render the instruction practically 
serviceable to the student, and so mit ister to his or her own development and success, whatever may be the vocation pursued. 

Lectures and instructions are given in seven different departments by specialists of wide experience and eminence as teachers 
and writers in their respective fields. No other school in America of like designation commands the facilities or covers the field that it 
embraces, or offers such advantages at so low a cost to the studeut. 

The curriculum embraces General Anthropology, Phrenology, Physiology, Physiognomy, Psychology, Hygiene, Elocution and 
subordinate topics. 

The American Institute of Phrencilogy, incorporated by the Legislature of the State of New York in IStiG, was the result of a third 
of a century of hard work, earnest study and application of phrenology to real life. The public had become by these means so much 
interested in the principles and uses of the best mental philosophy the world had Feen, that it was prepared to welcome the Institute 
as a needed school for scientiflo culture, and to appreciate the labors of its experienced teachers. Those who wish to enjoy the great 
benefit of its unequaled collection of busts, casts, skulls and portraits of the greatest, the best and the worst characters of history, are 
cordially welcomed to a place in the Institute, and to the facilities offered them for entering the field of phrenology well equipped for 
making it a successful and profitable life work. 

Phrenology is the cutting e^ge of talent. It is to the investigation of mind and character what the microscope and the tele- 
scope are for the investigation of external nature, viz., a revelation. The ability to read human nature is of special value to profes 
sional people as well as to business men. He who can read human character best is the best siilesman, the best business negotiator, 
and the best lawyer or clergyman. Phrenology teaches how to read strangers, how to understand them in spite of all their efforts to 
play false and conceal their real dispositions. There is no field of effort where man is brought in contact with man in which Phre. 
nology is not a source of power superior to any other mode of culture or experience. 

The register is always open for the enrollment of students. Full particulars will be furnished by special circular, with regard 
to the courseof instruction, etc., on application to the President, Prof. Nelson Sizer, or to 

FOWLER & WELLS COMPANY, No. 27 East 21st Street, New York. 



"BAR=LOCK" 

The Modern Writing Machine. Every letter written 
in sight of the operator. 

Does most of the work, in writing AUTOMATICALLY, and yields, in the time thus saved, 
additional work. 

It acts as if it studied the convenience of the operator at every turn, and thereby lightens 
his labor and renders him capable of doing more. 

It has a knack of keeping well and is always ready, at critical or other times. 

These are some of the reasons why it is so different from all other writing machines. 

The catalogue tells you more about it. (Free.) 

The Typewriter for Experts. 



ft Colli ffimiter li|, ft 



1 16th St., Lenox and 5th Aves., 



NEW YORK. 



See pages 139 to 139 for description. 



THE HAMMOND TYPEWRITER 

PROiZES 

Its Superiority in Speed, Durability and Perfection of Worl(. 

In awarding the Elliott Cresson Gold Medal to the ' Hammond," the Expert 
Engineers of the Franklin Institute say it's 

"THE BEST TYPEWRITING MACHINE." 

In ordering Seventy-five " Hammonds" for one delivery the United States Govern- 
ment practically 

CONFIRM THEIR JUDGMENT. 

In choosing a machine you would do well to investigate the reasons for the 

Strongest Endorsement Ever Given a Writing Machine. 

THE HAMMOND TYPEWRITER CO., 

^^7 anci -5:^© East 52d. St., 




ITETV •yOH.IK:. 




2,2. ^'°°'-»'°3"S 

^^ re ^ 1^ n • <^ f^ r-' \. J 

g ; tfl-** !^?^13 PI 




IMPROVEMENT THE ORDER OP THE AGE." 

THE SMITH PREMIER TYPEWRITER. 






The Smith Premier Typeivriter lias been adopled to the exclusion of all other writing machines by The 
Associated Press of the State of Neio York, to be used in their telegraphic service to take Despatches direct 
from the Wire. 

All type cleaned in ten seconds without soiling the hands. The use of a " tooth brush " not required. 
Permanent Alignment. More durable than any of its competitors. 

The Smith Premier Typeirriter is used exclusively by the following Stenographic Schools of Syracuse, 
New York : Wells' Commercial College, Y. M. C. A. Building ; Miss Mattie G. Ham, Kirk Building ; Miss E. 
Henley, Everson Building ; Phillips College, Empire Block. 

Over-^00 Smith Premier Typewriters in usein the City of Syracuse, New York, U. S. A. Send for Catalogue. 

THE SMITH PREMIER TYPEWRITER COMPANY, 

SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, U. S. A. 



Get Out of the Rut ! 

PUBLIC and PRIVATE Schools teaching or con- 
templating- the teaching of shorthand, should keep 
in mind that 

ISAAC PITMAN'S 
SHORTHAND 

has been Adopted Exclusively by the 
PUBLIC DAY SCHOOLS 

OF 

NEW YORK CITY. 

PROF. C. C. GAINES, Pres. Eastman Bus. Coll., 
says in his latest catalogue of the New York Bus- 
iness College : — 

"We would recommend ' Isaac Pitman's Complete 
Phonographic Instructor,' wich is fully abreast of 
the times, and contains all the recent additions to 
phonographic literature worth embodying in a 
textbook. The Isaac Pitman is the original system 
and possesses an advantage over the others which 
it is well to take into consideration. As all of 
our students have been exceptionally successful, 
we have concluded for the future to give the Isaac 
Pitman system decided preference." 

fend for 32 page pamphletand specimen pages of above work to 

ISP PITW & SONS, PuDIiSl]e[S,33 Um Spie,N J. 

*»-i' For list of works in this system see another pag'e. 



The best place in the world 
to BUY or HIRE 

TYPEWRITERS. 



A.LL NIAKES. 



Reming'toiis, $40. Caligraplis, S25. 
Hammonds & Yosts, $30. 



SEND FOR CATALOGUE. 



TYPEWRITER EXCHANGE, 

10 Barclay S.treet, New York. 

■WE GUARANTEE TH - TITLE OF EVERY MACHINE 
SOLD BY US. 



THE YOST 



Writing Machine. 




Mr. Yost, who brought out the two other 
typewriters whose use is world-wide, has em- 
bodied in this machine the result of many years' 
experience in typewriter building, and the Yost 
to-day is a marvel of ingenuity and complete- 
ness. 



Its Unique Center-Guide Alignment, 

Its Great Strength' as a Manifolder, 

Its Unlimited Speed, 

Its Beautiful Work resulting from Printing Direct 
from the Face of Steel Type, 

Its Freedom from the Old Troublesome and Expen- 
sive Ribbon, 

Its Interchangeable Carriages, 

And many other New and Novel Features. 



ALTOGETHER THE MOST SATISFACTORY TYPEWRITER FOR ALL USES. 



For Illustrated Catalogue, giving Prices and Particulars, Address 

Yost Writing Machine Company, 

61 CHAMBERS STREET, NEW YORK. 



The following books will be found of interest to those engaged in Business and Commercial life, or to 
those about choosing an occupation. 

^■» 

HO^JV TO KEEP A STORE. 

Embodying- the conclusions of more tlian Tliirty 
Yeai's' Exjierience in Merchandising. Bj' Samuel 
H. Terrj'. 13mo, 406 pages, extra cloth, $1.50. 

This worlv shoald be in the hands of every one 
interested in the selling of any kind of goods at re- 
tail. Full of sug-gestions on subjects that are likely 
to be overlooked. Among the points discussed are : 

The Selection of a Busmess; The Choice of a 
Locality; On Buying a Stock of Goods; Obtaining 
Ci'edit on Purchases; Examination, Marking, and 
Arranging of Goods; Advertising a Business; Em- 
ployment of Clerks; The Art of Selling Goods; Sell- 
ing Goods for Cash; Selling Goods on Credit; Sell- 
ing for Cash and Credit Combined; Replenishing 
Stock; Settling for Purchases; Depreciation of 
Goods; Losses by Fire, Theft, etc; Keeping Ac- 
counts; Expenses; Copartnerships; Influence of So- 
cial Life on Business; Buying Goods at Auction; In- 
vestment of the Profits; Insolvency; Business 
Qaalitications, etc. 

HOW TO BE SUCCESSFUL ON 

XHE ROAD AS A COBIMER- 

CIAL TRAVELER. 

By an Old Drummer. Paper, 20 cents. 

Tills gives many suggestions and presents many 
phases in the study of character and a successful 
business man said of it: "I think it an excellently 
well written book, and I am thoroughly convinced 
that the writer was a successful traveler, to be able 
to give such an exact detail of both salesman and 
buyer." It will be found of interest not only to the 
traveler, but to the merchant at home, not only to 
the merchant but to the people, to every one as 
showing how goods are sold, the methods resorted 
to to create a demand, and secure the supplj'ing of it. 



HOW TO CONDUCT A PUBLIC 
MEETING ; 

Or, the Chairman's Guide for Conducting Meetings, 
public and private, according to the best Pai'liament- 
ary Rules. With Rules of Order, etc. 12mo, 30 pp. 
Paper, 15 cents. 

HOW^ TO READ, 

And hints in choosing the Best Books By Amelia 
V. Petit. 12mo, 220 pp. Cloth, 60 cents. 

In addition to valuable hints this book contains a 
Classified List of Best Works in Biography, Criti- 
cisms, Fine Arts, History, Novels, Poetry, Science, 
Religion, Foreign Languages, etc. 

HOW TO BE WEATHER-WISE. 

A new view of our weather system. By Isaac P. 
Noyes. 12mo, 51 pp. Second edition. Paper, 25 cts. 

THi: INDISPEIVSABLE HAIVD-BOOK. 

How to Write, How to Talk, How to Behave, and 
How to do Business. Complete in one large volume. 
This work — in four parts — embraces just that prac- 
tical matter-of tact information which every one — 
old and young — ought to have. It will aid in attain- 
ing, if it does not insure, "success in life." $3.00. 

Sent hji mail, postpaid, on receipt of price, 

FOWLEE k WELLS 



CHOICE OF PURSUITS; 

or, W^liat to Do and W^hy, 

Describing Seventy-five Trades and Professions, and 
the Temperaments and Talents required for each ; 
with Portraits and Biographies of many successful 
Thinkers and Workers. By Nelson Sizer. $3.00. 

This work, "Choice of Pursuits," fills a place 
attempted by no other. Whoever has to earn a 
living by labor of head or of hand cannot afford to 
do without it. 

The most important step in life is the selecting 
of the pursuit for which one's faculties, tempera- 
ments, and education best adapt him. 'The younp 
man or woman who makes the right selection is 
guaranteed thereby a happy and successful career. 
Manj' people with talents, the exercise of which 
would place them in the front rank of some of the 
higher callings, are living in obscurity, filling some 
menial place, which they dropped into by chance or 
accident, ignorant of the talents with wliich God has 
endowed them. Let every man, woman and youth 
read this book and profit by it, and undertake only 
that which they can do best. 

The author was fully qualified for his task, having 
been engaged in the making of Phrenological Ex- 
aminations in the Office of Fowler & Wells Co. for 
more than 40 years; affording opportunities for 
making the fullest observations and original inves- 
tigations on the human mind and its capacity. 

READY FOR BUSINESS; 

Or, Choosing an Occupation ; a Series of Practical 
Papers for Boys and Young men. By Geo. J. 
Manson. Cloth, 75 cents. 

The author considers the opportunities afforded 
by the various trades and professions, says what is 
to be done in order to acquire a knowledge of them, 
how much education is necessaiy, and how it can 
be obtained, the opportunities for employment 
and the chances for success. It is just what par- 
ents need that they maj' be able to decide intelli- 
gently for their sons as to what shall be their 
life-work, and every j'oung man should read and 
study it careful!}'. The following are some of the 
important subjects considered, "The Electrical 
Engineer, the Architect, Commercial Traveler, Bank- 
er and Broker, House Builder, Boat Builder, a Sea 
Captain, Practical Chemist, Journalist, Druggist, 
etc., and the learned professions. Medicine, Law and 
Diviuitj-." The author does not attempt to indicate 
what is the best line to follow, but rather to show 
what is to be done and how to do it; so that wlien 
a young man has the matter under consideration he 
may know what he has to contend with, or to do in 
order to succeed in that to which he feels he is the 
best adapted after studying himself and the various 
pursuits of life carefuUj-. 

Hoic to Conduct- a Public Meeting ; or. The 
Chairman's Guide for Conducting Meetings, Public 
and Private, according to the best Parliamentary 
Rules, including Rules of Order and a List of Ques- 
tions for debate in Lyceums and Literary Societies. 
15 cents. 
Address, 

CO., Publishers, 27 East 21st St., New York. 



HEALTH EXERCISE FOR TYPEWRITERS . 

Typewriters and Stenographers and all sedentary people should seek some means for systematic 
and healthful exercise, as a means of maintaining- and securing health and strength, and we wish to commend 
to their attention Prof, Dowd's Health Exerciser and his most excellent work on Physical Culture. 



THE HEALTH EXERCISER. 

This is in every way the Best Apparatus for Physical 
Culture ever devised. 




1. It takes up but six inches 
square of floor room. 

2. It is not unsightly. 

3. It is noiseless. 

4. It can not get out of 
order. 

5. Can be adapted instantlj' 
to the use of any one over four 
years of age. 

6. No other apparatus is 
necessary. 

7. The work of the "Exer- 
ciser " is the most fascin- 
ating form of exercise ever 
devised. 

8. Especiallj' adapted to 
bring- about the cure of bil- 
iousness, dyspepsia, constipation, and above all else, 
weak lungs, or even the first stages of consumption. 

9. By its means one can strengthen any part of the 
body at will, and then, having brought up the weak 
parts, can go on with a harmonious develojmient of 
the body. 

The " Exerciser '' can be easily set up in the office 
or at home, and should be used at some time eacli 
day, and most surprising results will follow its use 
by either men or women, and is perhaps more 
needed by the latter than the former. 

If the "Exerciser" be attached to the wmdow- 
casing it can be covered from sight by the curtain 
when not in use. The change from one attachment 
to another is almost instantaneous. There are over 
30 dilTerent movements given for the "Exerciser." 
The weight used can be varied according to the 
strength of the user from Si lbs to 15 or more. 

Price of Exerciser with copy of Phj'sical Culture, 
in paper binding, and an illustrated Chart of Exer- 
cises, plain finish, $6.00 Nickle-Plated, $8.00 

Address all orders to 



PHYSICAL CULTURE, 

SCIENTIFIC AMD PRACXICAL. 

By D. L. Dowd, Professor of Pbvsical Culture. 332 
12mo pages. 80 illustrations. .|1.50. 

Questions constantly being asked : 

Does massage treatment strengthen muscular 
tissue ? 

Are boat racing and horseback riding good exer- 
cises ? 

Are athletic sports conducive to health ? 

How long- a time will it take to reach the limit of 
development? 

Is there a limit to muscular development, and is it 
possible to gain an abnormal development? 

What is meant by being muscle bound ? 

Why are some small men stronger than men 
nearly double their size ? 

Why is a pei-son taller with less weight in the 
morning than in the evening? 

How should a person breathe while racing or 
walking up-stairs or up-hill ? 

Is there any advantage gained by weighting the 
shoes of sprinters or horses ? 

What kind of food is best for us to eat ? 

What form of bathing is best ? 

How can I best reduce or increase my weight? 

Personal Experiences of the Author in Phj'sical 
Training. 

Physical Culture of the Voice. 

Practice of Deep Breathing. 

Facial and Neck Development, 

A Few Hints for the Complexion. 

The Graceful and Ungraceful Figure. 

Specific Exercises for the Development of Every 
Set of Muscles of the Body, Arms and Legs, also 
Exercises for Deepening and Broadening- the Chest, 
and Strengthening the Lungs. 

(These Specific Exercises are each illustrated by a 
full length figure, taken from life, showing the set 
of muscles in contraction, which can be developed 
bj' each of them.) 

Dumb Bell Exercises. 

All who value Health, Strength and Happiness 
should procure and read this work. It will be found 
by far the best work ever written on this subject. 
Sent by mail postpaid, on receipt of price, •$1..50. 



FOWLER I WELLS CO., Publishers, 21 erst 2ist si, new york. 

N. B. — If you state where you saw this advertisement, in writing, we will send you free a sample copy 
of the Phrenological Journal, a monthly magazine, published at $1..50 a year or 15 cents a number. 



THE PHRENOLOGICAL 

JOURNAL AND 
SCIENCE OF HEALTH. 



THIS RBNOWNSD 
AND II,LUSTRATMD 
MAGAZINE HAS 
BMBN PVEI^ISHUD 
FOR MORM 
THAN FIFTY YBARS 



Its scope is the whole field of Human Nature. 



Phrenology as a science and its practical application in the affairs of 
every-day life, is its leading feature. This embraces such topics as the qual- 
ities and attributes of individuals; their distinctive fitness for certain kinds 
of business or professions; the choice of partners in the creation and develop- 
ment of commercial enterprises; the selection of the proper associate in mar- 
riage; the health of the household; the nurture and education of children; 
and deciding for what profession, trade or employment nature has best fitted 
them. 

Every number contains phrenological and biographical articles upon 
noted personages, applying and illustrating the science of human nature as 
revealed by phrenology. This science means what men, women and children 
are and what they are capable of becoming; what the neighbor is; and how 
best in all matters to relate ourselves to the people about us. 

The Phrenological Journal is not intended as a fashion plate or in 
any sense to show forth the style or cut of garments, except as related to 



health and propriety; it deals chiefly with the living Ego inside the clothing 
which will be regnant long after the mere fashion of a garment is forgotten. 
Neither does it undertake to set before its readers exclusively the literature 
of pleasure, anecdote or travel, but always and ever dealing seriously with 
the great problems of human life in its uninterrupted flow from generation to 
generation; and with the hopes, the fears and the struggles of men and 
women in their constant relations with the affairs of the world. 

IT IS THE MAGAZINE FOR THE HOME. 

Fathers, mothers, sons and daughters can in no other journal find such 
wise, useful and practical information to guide and instruct them in their 
manifold duties and interests. 

Ministers, lawyers, teachers and business men will also derive invaluable 
assistance from it in their respective lines of labor. 

All people desiring for themselves and for their children improvement and 
advancement from year to year will discover in this magazine food for their 
minds, advice for their bodies, and disclosures of qualities, abilities and capac- 
ities which, if digested, followed and accepted, will give them a new and better 
understanding of themselves, a surer interpretation of the laws of life, health 
and character, and will more certainly enable them to attain permanent and 
satisfactory success in life. 

The Journal also fully treats of and discusses such special subjects as 
physiognomy, physiology, pyschology, anthropology, hygiene, hypnotism, 
cheirosophy, graphology and cognate branches. 

VEARI^Y SUBSCRIPTION PRICB $1.50 POSTPAID. 

WITH THB CALENDAR OP JEWMI^S, $2.25 



FOWLER & WELLS CO, 

27 EAST 21st STREET, NEW YORK 



$125.00 



Water Color Painting. 

The subscribers of THE PHRENOLOQICAL JOURNAL AND SCFENCE OF 
HEALTH will be delighted with our new offer. 

We have placed on the market, at considerable cost, a superb work ot 
Art entitled THE CALENDAR OF JEWELS, composed of a water color paint^ 
ing and a daily calendar pad. 

The painting is on extra heavy bristol board 12x17 inches, suitable for 
framing or adapted to the easel or table without framing 

_ The scene of the painting is laid in the clouds. In the center of the 
picture is an ideal child's face and head of greatest loveliness and charm • and 
around him are grouped eleven cherubs delightfully differing from each other 
yet each of exquisite face and expression. The eleven cherubs and child 
represent the twelve months of the year ; and the latter is supposed to be 
receiving from the former, prophecies of all that is to happen during the year 
It can be imagined what scope of form, change of feature, difference in 
expression and play of color this design gave the artist: but the picture must 
be seen and studied day by day for all its beauties to be discovered and 
appreciated. It enchains the attention and lingers in memory ; and one is 
ever desirous of returning and looking at it again, so beautiful and entrancin<^ 
IF It. Nearly every mother will find a face to remind her of her child- and 
every father will be touched and ennobled by this beautiful vision of' child 
and cherub, of earth and heaven. 

The daily Calendar in pad form, which accompanies the picture and can 
be attached thereto or not as desired, is composed of extracts from the 
writings of the best authors, referring to jewels or their symbolism, and thus 
forms a treasure house of most beautiful thoughts most beautifully expressed. 

To obtain this grand work of art we require from each and every sub- 
scriber 75 cents in addition to the regular yearly subscription price of the 
Journal of $1.50, making a total of $2.25. 

This inducement is only extended to present yearly subscribers on renew= 
mg or to new yearly subscribers to this magazine. 

_ Special offer is made to all who desire to canvass for this Tournal 

m connection with this Art Work. 

A sample copy of the Calendar will be sent, boxed, postpaid, on receipt of 

^i.oo, to those desiring it for canvassing purposes 

The regular price of the Calendar of Jewels is $^.50, postpaid 

tor further description of this magnificent calendar see publishers' 

department in current issues of The Phrenological Journal and Science 

OF Health. 

Fowler & Wells Co. 

27 EAST 2ist STREET = = NEW YORK 



TH K 



Human t Nature 



LIBRARY. 



Each 7iumber is complete in itself and usually 
devoted to a single subject. 



No. 1. Selk-Reliance ; or, Self-Esteem as aa Element in 
Human Character, Its Uses and Culture. Illustrated. Nelson 
:Si2er. 10c. 

No. 3, Phrenology • Its Principles, Proofs, etc. Prof. J. F. 
Tracey. 30 Illustrations. 10c. 

No. 3. Physical Factors in Character ; or, The Influence 
of Temperament. H. S. Drayton, M.D. Illustrated. lUc. 

No. 4. The Choice of Occupation ; or. My Right Place in 
Xife, and How to Find it. Nelson Sizer. 10c. 

No. 5. The Servant Question Hints on the Choosing and 
Management of Servants. H. S. Drayton. jQc. 

Nn. 6. Inventivs Genius ; or, Constructiveness the Basis of 
Civinzation and Progress. Prof. Nelson Siser. 10c. 

No. T. Integrity or Conscientiousness; Its Nature and Its 
Influence. H. S. Drayton. 10c. 

No S. Who Should IVUrry ; Right Selection in Marriage. 
The How and the Why. What temperaments and mental cliar- 
actei-istics should unite in wedlock. lUust. Nelson Sizer. 10c. 

Prof. Nelson 

No. 10. The Will : Its Nature and Education. J. W. ShuU 
and H. S. Drayton, M.D. 10c. 



No. Vi Addrkpses delivered at the close of the annual session 
of the American Institute of Pbrenology, ISifO. 10c. 

No. 14. Facultv and Brain Organissi. Bernard Hollander. 
To prove that separate Psychological Functions require separate 
Physiological Organisms. 10c. 



No. 16. Self-Study Essential to Mental Improvement and 
Development and to Personal Success. Dr. H. S. Drayton. 10c. 

No. 17. The Uses op Mental Science and papers read at the 
close of the class of 1890 in the Am. lustitute of Phrenology. 10c 

No. 18. Getting Married and Keeping Married — How to do 
it. By Oue Wbo Has Done Both. 10c. 

No. 19. Cbaracter Reading from Photographs ; How to Do 
It. Fully Illustrated. By Nelson Sizer. 10c. 

No. 3 1. The Perceptive Faculties. Their Use and Training; 
show ing how to .^ee things. By Nelson Sizer. 10c. 

No. 21. Addres.-ies delivered before the American Institute 
of Phrenology, 18'Jl, and other papers. 10c. 



Subscription JPWce, 30c. for four Nos., or 
10c, each hy mail, j^ostpaid. Address 



fOWLER & WELLS CO., Pablishers, 

27 East 21st St., Hew York. 



JUST fUBLflSHBU ! 

DIARY OF THE GRAND 
ARMY OF THE REPUBLIC 

M Eandbooli of Military loformation. 

The Various Army Organizations in the 
United States; Facts about t/ie American 
Civil and European Wars ; Tiie Armies of 
t/ie World; CItronological History of tite 
Rebellion, etc., etc. 

A convenient, compact book of reference for all, 
and indispensable for those who are interested ia 
military matters; packed full of desirable military 
information. 

Over 100 pages 4 x &J inches, and about f of an 
inch in thickness, paper cover, 25 cents postpaid. 

This work thoroughly and exhaustively supplies 
a long- felt want, having in ready reference and 
pocket form information now scattered through a 
host of volumes ;ind military reports. It is especially 
opportune now, when all matters connected with our 
Rebellion are experiencing such marked revival. 

FOWLER & WELLS CO., Publishers, 

27 East 21st St., New York. 
JU!ST PUBIiI!!«HED! 

HF SUCH 18 THE KINGDOM T^'^^r^^. 

\J melin. Illustrated. It is not always that pub- 
lishers have the pleasure in speaking of a 
volume that we experience in referring to tliis book 
fit poems. The work covers a wide field of human 
love, hope, sympathy and sorrow, and yet mirthful, 
descriptive and dramatic poems are also to be found 
therein. The volume will be a rare exhibition of book- 
making art in the six essentials of beauty, paper,type, 
binding, coverand design We doubt ifa moreattract- 
ive book will issue lliis year from any house. We have 
given the exquisite thoughts of the author a fitting 
printed form and dress. A grand Christmas gift. 

Those of large heart and thougthful mind, who 
look upon the problems of life without fear, and yet 
with hope in the goodness and justice of Infinite 
Power, will find here, without the fixed form of 
church creed, or set expression of ecclesiastical belief, 
yet clear and radiant, sincere, modest and chastened 
lines of calmness and wisdom, such beautiful ex- 
pressions of confidence and rest and trust in Him in 
the midst of all human perplexities as must appeal 
to them with irresi.stible force and effect. 

Tliis work is printed on Holland paper, uncut 
edges, wide margins, large type, illustrated, extra 
fine cloth binding, with very artistic colored and 
elaborate cover design. Price, |1..50 postpaid. 

FOWLER & WELLS CO., Publishers, 

27 East 2 1 st St., New York. 



ISAAC PITMA N'S SHORT HAND BOOKS. 

The Isaac FitmaQ system, the Fir^t Invented, and tbe Most Improvkd. is now the leading system, it has been adopted exclusively 
by the Public Day Schools of New York City. 



PHONOGRAPHIC INSTRUCTION BOOKS. 

Isaac Fitnian^s Complete Phonographic In- 
structor; A new and complete exposition of Isaac 
Ktman's System. CrOntaining iostniction fn both the Corre- 
sponding and Repog ting Styles The fjeneral plan of the •'In- 
structor " makes it qually acceptable for self-tuition and for 
class-use. A chapter entitled ■' Practical Hints in Legal Work," 
from the pen of Mr. W. L. Mason, Principal of the Metropolitan 
School of Isaac Pitman Shorthand, 9.5 Fifth Avenue, New York, 
is a prominent feature of the book. The most complete and per- 
fect shorthand text-book that has ever been issued. Elegantly 
bound in cloth, gdt lettered. 2:i0 pages. SI. 50. 

The Phonoffra/jhic Teacher ; A guide to a Prac- 
tical Acqiiaiutance wi.h the \rz of Phonography or Phonetic 
Shorthand, containing a Series of Progressive Lessons. One 
million nine htmdred and fifty thousand. 20c. 

Meif to the " Phonographic Teactier." Of great value 
to the Private student. 20c. 

Progressive Studies in Phonography ; A sim- 
ple and extended exposition of the Art of Phonetic Shorthand. 
35e.; Cloth, 60e. 

The " Fono" Headline Shorthand Copy Books, 

Nos. 1, 3, and 3, contain ng beautifully engraved graduated 

copies, in conjunction with the study of the "Phonographic 

Teacher.'* 10c. each. 
^sop's Fables ; in tlie Learner's style of Shorthand. 

soc. 
A Compend of Phonography ; containing the 

Alphabet, Grammalogues, and principal Eules for Writing. 5c. 

Easy Jtfadlngs ; in the Learner's style of Short- 
hand, with Key at the end of the book. 20c. 

A Manual of Phonographi/ ; containing a com- 
plete exposition of the system, with numerous shorthand ex- 
amples interspersed with the text, and exercises in reading. 
800ta thousanti. 40. ; Cloth, BOc. 

Rey to tlie Exercises in tlie " Manual." 30c. 

" Teacher and Manual" in one volume, 
ro(tn, gilt. 80c. 

The Phonographic Reader; a course of Reading 
exerci'^es in Phonography, with a Key in ordinary type. 20c. 

The Phonographic Reporter, or Re/>orter's 
Companiott ; an adaptation of Piionography to 
Verbatim Reporting. 60c. ; Cloth, 75c. 

Reporting JEcoercises ; a companion to the " Phono- 
graphic Reporter. 20c. 

Key to llie " Reporting Exercises," in which all the 
Exerci-es are presented in Shorthand, in Reporting Style. 35c.; 
Cloth, 50c. 

The Grammalogues and Contractions of "Pho- 
nographic Reporter ;'* for use in classes. 5c. 

A Phonogratthic and Pronouncing Diction- 
ary of theEug-lish Language ; containing the Short- 
hand forms for 55.000 Words and5,000 Proper Names. Sixth edi- 
tion. Cloth Binding, $1.50 "^ roan, gilt, $1.75. 

Business Correspondence in Shorthand, No. 1. 

Actual business letters. The work is Keyed in ordinary type, 
and tbe matter counted off into sections for speed-testing in 
either shorthand or typewriting. Of value to writers of any 
system. 30c. 

Business Correspondence in Shorthand, No. 2. 

40 pages. 30c. 

The Shorthand Cotnmercial Letter Writer; a 

Guide to Commercial Correspondence. 35c. ; Cloth, 50c. 

Kev to the '• Shorthand Commercial Letter 

iVriter." 20c.; Cloth, 35c. 
The Shorthand Commercial Letter Writer 

and Keg, in one vol. Cloth, 60c. 
The Reporter's Assistant, and Learner's Guide to 

a Knowledge of Phonography. 35c. ; Cloth. 50c. 
Technical Reporting ; Phonographic Abbreviations 
for words met with in reporting Legal, Scientific, and other 
Technical Subjects. 400.; Cloth, 50o. 

Phonography in the Office; a complete Short- 
hand Clerk's Guide. 40c. ; Cloth, 50c. 

Phonographic Phrase Book ; containing above 
two thousand useful phrases in Phonography, with a Key. 
Sfic. ; Cl'Uh, .=.00. 

Questions on the "Manual of Phonography." 10c. 



The Phonographic Railway Phrase Book, 20c. 
The Phonographic Legal Phrase Book. 20c. 

SHORTHAND READING BOOKS. 

The Journal of Education., Boston, remarks: "The Isaac Pitman- 
system is the only one having a Shorthand literature of its own,, 
from which students quickly and easily learn the best * forms.' " 
{Printed in Phonography from engraved metal characters ) 
In the Corresponding Style. 
Extracts, No. 1; containing "Ten Pounds," etc. 

20 c. 

Extracts, No. 2 ; containing ' ' That which Money 

caimot Buy," ''The Deaf Musician," ' 

Extracts, No. 3 ; containing 



20(5. 

'Being and Seeming," 



TJie Book of Psalms. 35c.; Cloth, 50c. 

The Narrative of the Pilgrim,' s Progress. 40c. ; 

Cloth, 60c. 

Self-Culture, By Prof. Blackie. 35o. ; Cloth, 50c. 
Tales and Sketches, by Washington Irving, with 

printed Key. 36c.; Cloth, oOc. 

Gulliver's Voyage to Liliput, by Dean Swift; 

Correspinding Style. 35c. , Cloth, 50c. 

Select Poetry. 20c. 

Gleanings from Popular Authors, with a key 

at the foot of each page. 40c. ; Cloth, 50c. 

T7ie Vicar of Wakefield, illustrated. 50c.; Cloth, 

60c. 

The Shorthand Birthday Book of Poetical 

Selections. Contains selections from Horace to 
poets of the present day. Cloth, 75c. 

In the Reporting Style. 
Selections, No. 1 ; containing "Character of Wash- 
ington," " Calvin, Galileo and Shakespeare," etc., With key. 
20c. 

Selections, No. 2; "The Civilizing Influence of 

Music," etc. 20c. 

Selections, No. 3 ; " Prof. Max Muller on National 

Education." Sue. 

Leaves from the Note-Book of Thomas Allen 
Reed; with printed Key and Portrait. Two Vol- 
umes. Each complete in itself. Each volume 50c.; Cloth, eOc. 

The Reporter's Reader ; a series of Reading Books 
in the Reporting Style, with a Key at the foot of each page. 15- 
centseach. 

The Bible in Shorthand, containing the Old and 
New Testaments (Sif in. by 6^ in.). Cloth, beveled boards, red 
edges, $3 ; Roan, gilt edges, $3.50 ; Morocco, gilt edges. $4.50. 

The Legend of Sleepy Holloir, by Washington 
Irving; with printed Key at the foot of each page. 20c. 

Renresentntive British Orations, with Intro- 
ductions by Charles Kendall AdamSj with Key at the foot of each. 
pag4. 3 vols. Each 60c. ; Cloth. 75c. 

The New Testatnenf. Size of page 6J in. by 4 in. 
Roan red edges, $1.50; Morocco, gilt edges, $3. 

Tlie Book of Common Prayer. Roan, red edges, 

$1.50 ; Morocco, gilt edges, $2. 

The Autobiographi/ of Betijamin Franklin^ 

35c.; Cloth, 60c. 

Thankful Blossom, by Bret Harte. 35c.; Cloth, 50c. 
A Christmas Carol, by Charles Dickens. 85., 

Cloth, 50c. 

The Pickivick Papers, by Charles Dickens. In 

two vols.. Cloth, $1 each. 

Tom Brown's Schooldays, 288 pages. 60c.; Cloth, 

Samlet. 35c.; Cloth, 50c. 

The Merchant Of Venice. 35c.; Cloth, 50c. 

Selections From American Authors, containing 

selections from Mark Twain. Bret Harte, etc 35c.; Cloth, 50c. 

ITandbook For Shorthand Teachers; contain- 
ing Instructions to Teachers, Lessons on the Text-books, etc, 
60c.; Cloth, 75c. 

The Phonetic Journal, Subscription per year, 

monthly or weekly, $1.60. 



We supply the Trade and Teachers with these hooks on favorable terms. Will be sent by mail, postpaid, on receipt of prices. 

Address, FOWLEE & WELLS CO., Pulilishers, 27 East 21st St., New York. 



A PRACTICAL PLAN OF INSTRUCTION IN SHORTHAND. 

BY BATES TORREY, 

PRINCIPAL OF SHORTHAND DEPARTMENT, COMER'S COMMERCIAL COLLEGE, BOSTON. 



The author of this "PLAN " has long been a writer and teacher of Shorthand, and his experience has 
developed this PLAN of INSTRUCTION, which presents many claims for excellence. 

WHAT IS IT? 

It is a new departure in shorthand instruction, consisting of a progressive series of detached LESSON- 
PAPERS, neatly printed, with much fac-simile shorthand text, and figured to refer to only sucli portions of a 
diffusive work of authority (the Benn Pitman MANUAL), as conduce to a thorough and rapid comprehension 
of the subject. 

The PLAN treats of Shorthand writing from a " commercial " point of view, and in TWENTY LESSONS 
does this so practically and conclusively that the average pupil becomes a facile writer and a quick reader. 

The Lessons deal with the principles common to the systems which have followed the Isaac Pitman of 
1837, particularly the Benn Pitman modification of it, and the improvements of recent date. The Benn 
Pitman MANUAL (edition 1885) was selected for reference on account of its concise presentation of tlie 
subject, and the clearness and beauty of its illustrative text. The PLAN works to perfection taken in con- 
nection with this book, the influence and tendency being reciprocal. 

WHAT WILL IT DO? 

It teaches USEFUL Shorthand from the very outset ! It in.spires a livelier interest and enthusiasm tiian 
is wont to attend the study. It conduces to quick READING as well as correct writing. Briefl3', it presents 
the principles and practice of phonography in progressive fashion— directs to a proper sequence of effort — 
recommends only logical rules of procedure, and so leads to valuable results in the shortest possible time. 

THE PLAN IS COMMENDED TO TEACHERS. 

Because of the assistance it gives in such details of instruction as the textbooks fail to cover. — Because 
it is as practical as the consoieatious instructor aims to be, bridging the gap between Theory and Practice 
cleverly.— Because of the fac-simile text furnished for reading practice.^Because Word-sig'ns are tavight 
from beginning to end. — Because the rules for outline formation are log-ical. — Because of the prominence 
given to the elucidation of those principles particularly difficult of comprehension.— Because it furnishes a 
convenient medium for teaching BY MAIL. 

^^After formulating a dozen reasons why the PLAN is indispensable to the BEGINNER, ice 
decide not to ivaste space, but simply say that it is valuable because it teaches — PRACTICAL SHORT- 
HAND. The term "Practical" {i. e. useful, bread-winning) embraces every reason that might be advanced 
in its favor. The PLAN was designed to assist in effecting the transition from Theory to Practice as much 
as possible without departing from a reasonable degree of conservatism. It has been tested and found effi- 
cient, and is therefore deserving of a high place among the recently devised schemes of instruction, which 
have revolutionized shorthand study, making knowledge of the art more general — and possible to almost 
everyone. 

Price, PLAN— $1.00, PITMAN MANUAL— $0.80, OR BOTH— $1.60. 
Sent by mail post paid on receipt of price. Furnished to Teachers at reduced prices. 



N. B. — We will send a complete list of works on all Sj'stems of Shorthand Writing and Phonography 
on application, with stamp for postage. 



A.UDRBSS : 

FOWLER Si, WELLS CO., Publishers, 

27 East 21st St., I>Te^yi7- "S'orls:. 






^>r 



^> 



i^ 



'!« 



AT THE HEAD 



jiSfc 



is^ m 



^ TO ^'^'^^ I 

^ 'THERE are good points in many typewriters, but for Ease of Op= ijt 

# eration, Permanency of Alignment, Simplicity of Con= # 

^^ struction. Wearing Qualities and Adjustability for Wear, # 

II the BEST by large odds is the ^ 



f 9 

I Caligraph I 

f i 

i Typewriter i 

i i 

# THERE IS NONE OTHER SO GOOD. # 

?;• ^li? 

ijjfc Descriptive i - — — im ife 

••.o>- ^ ^^ ^|i T»r 

■Ttf Catalogue of >?s i^ ^f 

I t;';!:^".^" ^ /_ m i 

^t? Supplies will be X'^'^'~~^'''==^^^'^i^"S)il J^ ^•'? 

Ji sent on ^^ <^^ ^W^ ^ 

4»r request. ^^""'°^'''''=============--_^ "^^ ^Jp 

II The American Writing Machine Co., I| 

HARTFORD, CONN., U. S. A. 4 

t t 

•|*1i»T^* ?»•*♦•*«? -1♦^ •1♦^ -il^ ■1♦^ •1♦^ -if«- -If'- -i»^ -i»T*»*?»T*^^ 



D 



HONOGRAPHIC WORKS. 



BEJVJV PITIIA^ and JERO^^X: B. Hd^ARD. 



The Mauual of Phonography. 

[325th Thousttud.J tJy bENN ^tman aud Jbkomk B.Howard." 
This work id liesigued lor sWf-iastructiou in the Phonographic 
art, aud 13 tlie piopt-r book fur the beginner. It .coDtains a 
couipiece expo-itiou oi! the sy^t-m from its s^impltst principles 
to the Reportiug St> ie, atrauged ia alternate and opposite peiges 
of explauatiou and phonographic exercises. Every principle is 
<;opiously illustrated wiih mgraved examples for reading, and 
exercises iu ihe o dmary type for willing practice. A lar^e 
number of pages ot ei graved reading matter are included in 

the book. Boards .' 80 

Extracloth 100 

It speaks well for the completeness and satisfactory features 
of Pitman's system of Phonography that, after thirty years, the 
author's * Manual "' appears in a revised edition, with cumpaia- 
tively few cbangew, aijd still recognized as the siandaid text- 
book of shorthand writing. Where the present edition differs 
from the preceding edition isiu points approved by the experi. 
euce of the best reporters and phoneticians. -iJosio^t Adv^-rtiser, 

The Phonographic Header. 

By Bknn PiTMiN nnd Jerome B. Howard. The work is de- 
signed as a companion to the iMnnual, and nffordsthe necessary 
reading practice in the CorrHspomlmg Style Theselections ar« 
taken (by permission) from UlcGuffey's Fifth Reader, which may 
be used as a key. Paper 25 

The Phonographic Second Reader. 

By Benn Pitman and Jerome B. Howard. Containing read- 
ing exercises engraved in Easy Reporting Style, and, like the 
Phonographic Reader, keyed by McGuffey's Fifth Reader. 
Paper 25 

The Reporter's Companion. 

ByBsM.^ Pitman. A Guide to Verbatim Reporting ; for Pro- 
fessional Reporters and thot-e who desireto become such. This 
work takes up the Corresponding Style, and, without a percepti- 
ble break, conducts the student to the briifest Phoutgraphy 
necessary for reporting the most rapid pp^akers. The book is 
arranged i'l e isy, progres ive style, entirely adapted to self- 
instruction. It contaius abundant leadirg matter ftr practice 
in the Reporting Style, with a key, and a Vocabulary of several 
thousand words in the ordinary tyr>e. with their phonographic 
outlines engraved in the Reporting Style. 

Thousands of Reporters ha\e at quired their ability to write 
verbat m with no other instruction than that afforded by this 

4vnd the preceding set of books. Boards 1 00 

Extra cloth 1 25 

Tho Report r's First Reader. 

By Benn Pitman and Jerome B. Howard. Contains engraved 
exercises in the Brief Reporting Style, with a Key annotateil 
with references to the Principles of Abbreviation iuthe Compan- 
ion . Paper 25 

The Phonographic Dictionary. 

By Benn Pitman and Jerome B. Howard. Containing the 
Report ngOutlinesfor upward of 3U.000 words ; embracingevery 
LS^rul vord in the language, and a large number of proper and 
ideographical names, Legal, Scientific and Technical terms, etc., 
fully engraved, with parallel key in the ordinary t}*pe 

Ic i^ believed that this work is ihe first Dictionary of Thonog- 
raphy ever published which will fully meet the wants of the 
student and practical reporter. Extra cloth 2 50 



The Phrase Book. 

By Bknn Pitman. A very valuable book to the practical re- 
porter, containing over 6,000 of the most frequently occurring 
and useful phrases written in the briefest and most legible man- 
ner. Extra cloth 1 00 

The Book of Psalms. 

Beautifully engraved in the Easy Reporting Style. Cloth. 7-5 
Morocco, full gilt 1 25 

Jackanapes. 

A charming story by Mrs. J. H. Ewing, In tae Reporting 
Style Paper a5 

Rip Van Winkle and the Creole Tillage. 

[New.l By Washington laviNa. In Easy Reporting Style. 
Paper 25 

The Battle of Waterloo. 

A compilation and arrangement from Creasy's " Fifteen De- 
cisive Battles."" by Benn Pitman engraved in the Reporting ytyle, 
with three maps, ^'o Key. Paper 25 

The Declaration of Independence. 

In the Reporting Style. An ornamental sheet, 19x22 inches, 
finely printed in colors, with floral border. Mailed, rolled for 
framing 15 

Memoir of Simon Bordley. 

Author of "Cadmus Britannicus," 1787— The Firj-t Script 
System of Shorthand, • tc , etc. By John Westby Gibson, LL.D., 
Past-President of the Shorthand Society, etc., etc. Paper. 25 

Plain Talk. 

By C. F. Spurgeon. In Corresponding Style. Paper. ... 25 

The Phonographic Magazine. 

Edited by Je310M-^ I'. Howard. A twenty-four page monthly, 
each number of whicb containseight pages (S^^sSH in.) of finely 
engraved phonography, mo&tly in the Brief Reporting Style, be- 
side-* original and contributed articles of general phonographic 
interest. The Magazinn is a periodical complement to thi; serie-? 
of text-books, and is the authentic organ of the Benn Pitmun 
System of Phonography. Subscriptions may begin with any 
nmnber. Price, per ann um 1 yO 

Business Letters. No. 1 — Miscellaneous 
Correspondence. 

Written in Brief Reporting Style. By Pitmam and Howard. 
The letters have been selecr,Ha from actual correspondence, and 
beiog free from technicalities, will furnt^^h the best practice 
for student**, the Shorthand Correspondent or Business Amaii- 
uensi-. Paper 25 

It is intended to follow the present miscellaneous collection by 
several others, in some leading branches of business, such as 
railroad, legal, insurance correspondence, etc. 



The above works will be forwarded, postpaid, on receipt of imce. 
art and the trade suppHed at a liberal discount. Address 



Teachers of the 



FOWLER & WELLS CO., Publishers, 



27 EAST 2Ist ST., NEW YORK. 



The Stenographer 



CONTAINS 



AliLi THE HEOaS, 

Represents All Systems of Shorthand. 

The Largest Circulation. 
Discusses Merits of All Typewriters. 

EDITED BY 

Krancis H. Hkmpkrley, 

Author' of '■'Analogical Syllabic Shorthand^ 



THE TYPEWRITING DEPARTMENT 

Is Conducted by 



Its Articles are contributed 
by the Brightest Minds in the 
Profession, 

It gives Ttvo Dollars' Worth 
of Information for One, 



Send Subscriptions to 

THE STENOGRAPHER PUBLISHING CO., 

38 South Sixth Street, Philadelphia. 



Miller Brothers Steel Pens. 

"AMERICAN AND BEST." 



Perfect J^^ 

ens for '^^^^J 

ractical I ^ 

enmanship. J^*— 1^ 



tyles 
pecially 
elected for 
chools. 

FOR SALE BY 

All Stationers, or send lo cents for samples worth 
double the money to 

THE MILLER BROS. CUTLERY CO., 

325 Broadway, New York. 

WEBSTER ' s f.zcr. : 
INTERNA TIONAL 

\ iTalVilJ.'!'^ DICTION AR Y. ! 

[ Standard of nearly all of tbe Sclioolbook3. 
[ Standard of U.S. Government FrintingOffice. 
1 Standard of U. S. Supreme Court. 
I The One Great Standard Antbority, J 

,niles Justice lirewer. 




prints of old editions. 



Instruction in Practical Sliorthand. 

BV B75TES TOF2REY. 

{Author of Practical Tm^eirrifing.) 
^ THE GRAHAM SYSTEM POPULARIZED. -^I 

DisLinctively a teachiuffiuaunal, with improved nomenclature, 
definitions and progressive yt^ps. A book that has b^eii tested 
(before advertising widely) a year in the most successful short- 
hand school in New England, and found to be entirely adequate 
and effective. "Warmly indorsed by teachers and the profession. 
The avant courier of the new school of shorthand instruction. 

The syllabic idea carried to the 1 imit of consistency ; simplified 
word- sign study; fac-simile blackboard work; shorthand pen- 
manship illustrated; inaword. hn»it.ess s/iorthan<t impress d 
in a husine.Hr^lihe manner. Send for descriptive circular 

COMER'S COMMERCIAL COLLEGE, 

6«6 \Va>liini£t«ii M., B"f>t- n 

He "BATES TOBBEy'EHEE-lFT, 

FOR THE 

{^EmU^GTOrl TVPEWJ^ITEt? 



(RE 



ULAR Table), 



A simple device for operatinjr the "Upper-case Shift-key" 

Ijy either the Right or Left Knee, instead of by the fingers. 
EASILY APPLIED AXD QUICKLY DETACHABLE. 

INSURES PERFECT ALL-FIXGKP. A(TION. 

PROMOTES TOUCH TTEITIXU. 
' This Knee-Shift cannot injure the machine, and increases its 
effective worth many-fold. 
Price $3 UO, postpaid. Address 

B-4LXES XORREY, 

66G TTashington St., Boston, Mass. 



SHORTHAND 



ji-iTX) - 



TYPEWRITING 

By DUaALD MoZILLOP, 

Contains a history, and a statement of what 
Shorthand and Typewriting are to-day, with the 
most comprehensive and practical suggestions 
to the learner, the amanuensis, and the reporter 
ever published. It is not a text book, but a 
manual adapted to all systems. Very fully 
illustrated, with a portrait of Isaac Pitman, a 
plate of Phonography and of many Typewriters 
and appliances. Sent by mail, postpaid, on 
receipt of price, 25 cents in paper; in cloth bind- 
ing, 60 cents. Address 

FOWLER I WELLS CO., 



27 EAST 21st ST., 



NEW YORK. 



BIXGI^'S 



AMERICAN GRAPHITE 

STENOGRAPHER 

Have the smoothest, toughest and strongest 
leads of any pencils made. If your stationer 
does not keep them, mention Practical Type- 
ivriting and send 10 cents for samples worth 
double the money. 

Dixon's " STENOGRAPHER" pencils. Nos. 
490 and 491, excel any other pencils made for 
short-hand writing. The leads used in these 
pencils were first submitted to practical short- 
hand writers for the most severe tests. 

The strong and tough leads do not easilj' 
break. Tlie smoothness of the lead prevents 
tiring of the hand. 



MAliirFACTTJKED BY THE 



JosepI; Dixorj <5ruGible ^o. 

Works and Main Offices : 
JORSEV OITV. N. J, 



THE MISSING LINK IN SHORTHAND. 

A TREATISE ON 

LEGIBILITY AND ACQUIREMENT OF SPEED 
IN STENOGRAPHY. 

By SAHUEL C. DUNHAH. 

A WORK OF GREAT VALUE TO ' STENOGRAPHERS AND TYPEWRITER OPERATORS. 



Not a Text-book, but an Aid to the Writer of Any System. A Revelation of the 
Possibilities of the T>pewriter. 



All of the text was produced by the author on a No. 2 Remiugton typewriter, and the shorthand pages (29 in 
all) were written with a pen, the whole then being photo-lithographed and produced in the highest style of the art. 

The cost of producing the book has been much greater than it would have been if printed in the ordinary 
way, but it is believed that the novelty of the enterprise will commend itself to the fraternity and fully justify 
the undertaking. 

The text presents suggestions, based on the practice of the best stenographers, which will enable the student 
of any system founded on the Pitman alphabet to acquire a legible style of writing and at the same time increase 
his speed. It gives a list of conflicting word-forms and phrases, and provides the means of absolute distinction. 
The simple rules relating to phrasing are invaluable to the student, removing, as they do, all hesitation in writ- 
ing, and will be found useful to the old reporter. 

The most striking and valuable feature of the book is 

A GRAND SYMPOSIUM OF AUTOGRAPHIC SHORTHAND 
consisting of original articles relating to stenography and stenographic reporting, speciall}' prepared for this 
work b}' the great masters of the profession at Washington, including every official stenographer in both houses 
of Congress and other reporters of national reputation. The contributions by the Ofiicial Reporters of Debates 
of the Senate are as follows : 

" Extract from Speech of Senator Harris,'''' by D. F. Murphy ; " Mental Processes of Shorthand Reporting" 
by Theo. F. Shuey; " The Regnirenients of a Reporter" by E. V. Murphy; " Phrases used by Senate Reporters" 
by H.f Gensler; " Rate of Speaking in the Senate" by Dan. B. Loyd, and " The Difficulties of Verbativi Re- 
porting," by Milton IV. Blumenberg. 

The Official Reporters of Debates of the House of Representatives have furnished the following : 

'' Suggestions and Cautions," by David Wolfe Brown; "A Composite Shorthand System,'" by John If. 
White ; " The Inventors of the Talking-Machine," by Andrew Devine ; " The House of Representatives," by A. 
C. Welch, and " The Use of the Phrasing Principle," by Fred Irland. 

The Official Stenographers to Committees of the House of Representatives, Mr. Geo. C. I/affertj' and Mr. 
W. J. Kehoe, give interesting articles, entitled, respectively, "The Joys of an Official Reporter to Committees " and 
''Committee Reporting." 

Mr. E. D. Easton, the official stenographer of the Guiteau and Star Route trials, contributes an article on 
"The First Users of the Graphophone," and Mr. Eugene Davis, formerly reporter for the New York Associated 
Press in the United States Senate, furnishes an entertaining sketch entitled " Press Reporting on the floor of the 
United States Senate." 

All of these contributions were \?ritten in shorthand by their respective authors, and have been reproduced by 
photo lithography, exacth' as written. Nothing of the kind has ever before been presented to the shorthand 
public and it is confidently believed that this will be recognized as the most artistic and valuable exhibition of 
shorthand notes ever made vinder one cover. 

There are also given specimens of the reporting notes of two of the most accomplished court reporters in the 
West, namely. Mr. Charles Flowers, of Detroit, Mich., and Mr. Geo. N. Hillman, of St. Paul, Minn., the whole 
being brought to a close with a page of the actual reporting notes of the late Joseph E. Lyons, for eight years the 
official stenographer of the District Court at Minneapolis, Minn., who was probably the most rapid and artistic 
note-taker that ever lived. The page of his notes given in this work is one of the finest specimens of reporting 
notes ever published. 

Now ready for distribution. 

160 pages. Handsomely bound in cloth. Price, $1.00, postpaid. Send money by registered letter or money-order. 

Address SAflUEL C. DUNHAH, 

P. O. Box 313, Washington, D. C. 






FACES. 



Beautiful FACES and 

Benevolent FACES and 

Honest FACES and 

Thoughtful FACES and 

Good FACES and 



Homely FACES. 

Miserly FACES. 

Knavish FACES. 

Blank FACES. 

Bad FACES. 



^LL KI^^DS OF F^CES! 

FOREHEADS— Higli— Low— Broad— Narrow. NOSES— Large 
— Small — Koman — Pug. EYES — Blue — Black — Grey — Hazel — Large 
— Small — Sleepy— Expressive. MOUTHS — Large — Small — Communi- 
cative—Secretive. LIPS— Eed— Pale— Thick— Thin. CHEEKS— 
Plump — Lank — Rosy — Sallow. CHINS — Square — Pound — Protruding 
— Eeceding EARS— Generous— Sfcingy—Musical— Mulish. HAIR 
AND BEARD — Color — Quality and Quantity. All indicate character. 

Temperament, Biiild, Stature, Hands, Feet, Gestures, Walk, Dress, 
Dance, Handwriting, Hand-Skaking, Voice, Laugh, Etc. 

These mean something. 

The Study of the Hiunan Face and how to read its living pages are themes 
possessing' rare and magic charm.s, and are fully discussed in 

NEW PHYSIOGNOMY; or, Signs of Character, 

As manifested in Temperament and External Forms, and especially in the 
Human Face Divine. By SAMUEL E. WELLS. 

A comprehensive, thorough, and practical work, in which all that is known on the subject 
is Systemized, Explained, Illustrated, and Applied. Physiognomy is shown to be no mere 
fanciful speculation, but a consistent and well-considered system of Character reading ; no ab- 
straction, but something to be made useful ; something to be piacticed by everybody and in 
all places, and made an efficient help in that noblest of all studies — Man. It is readily under- 
stood and as readily applied. 

Price, in one large volume, of nearly 800 pages, and more than 1,000 engravings, hand- 
somelv bound in em'bossed muslin, 85 ■. in heavy calf, marbled edges, §8 ; Turkey morocco, 
lull gilt, $10. By mail; postpaid, cii receipc ci price. Address, 

; ^c WLER & WELLS CO., Publishers, 27 East 21st St., New Tcrk, 



Waterman's "Meal" Fountain Pen. 



Patented February 12, 1884. 



i"%«. 1 Veil, witli Cap ou Top ready for Writing. 



t 



m 



• 



ThiB is the simplest as well as the best 
fountain pen made. The pen-holder conaitts 
of lonr pieces of hard rubber : (1 ) th( 
Cap, whico covers and proti-cls th< 
peL in the pocliet; (-2) the Handle 
which contains the ink; (3) th< 
Point-section, which taltes the pen 
and (4) the Feed Bar, which holds 
the pen in its place and carries the 
ini; Irom the reservoir to the pen, 
using the same principle (capillary 
attraction), by a similar construc- 
tion (a split or flssmes), that the pen 
nses in condncting; the ink to the 
paper, and is equally as certain. 

Its three (3) special points of merit 



writes 



1. It Is always ready and 
without shaking. 

3. It is clean in the pocket or in 
use, and can he filled without inking 
the flneers ; and 

8. It Is simple In constractlon and 
has no machinery to be regulated or 
to get out of order. 

It takes the ordinary gold pens 
without iessenine their elasticity or 
shading qualities. 

Tour favorite pen can be selected 
and the character of your hand- 
writing wUl be preserved. 

The act of writing regulates the flow of ink, 
which is as free as from;a dip pen, and much 
more unlfdrm. 

It uses any good ink and holds enough to 
write coutinoously from 10 to 24 hours, accord- 
ing to the size. 

The pens furnished are made by the best and 
moat widely-known manufacturers in the 
world, and are of the best quality of go'A, and 
diamond pointed. 

The manufacturer has devised a new form of 
gold pen which is peculiarly elastic and flei- 
Ibie and which we make especially for these 
holders In three lengths of nibs and four grades 
of points. The shoit (or stub) nibs, with fine 
or medium points, are the best pens ever made 
for shorthand writing. 

Price"* : 
ISTo. 3, $3.50;iV"o. 4, $4jiVo. 5, 15. 

Goid-monnted and engraved Holders $1 extra. 

An extra pen will be given to any subscriber 
who will send ns the full price for a club of 
four (4) Ideal pens. 

With each pen Is given a certificate which 
warrants the nolder for five years, and gnar- 
antees It to give satisfaction or the money will 
be refunded. It also contains a license nnder 
the patent, which protects the user from all 
claims for infringements. 

In ordering send a sample of writing and a 
description of the quality of pen desired; that 
is, whether the pen should be a long, medium, 
or short nib, of coarse, medium or fine point, 
and of hard, medium or soft flexibility. 



'estimonials. 



The following extracts are copied from 
few of the many letters and notices rt- 

ceivid. 



I love It better than any rival.— Bev. Thoi 
K. Beecher, Elmira, New York. 

Waterman's Ideal Fountain Pen Is far ahead 
of any other we have seen.— New York Sun. 

It is truly the " Ideal " pen.— J. H. Hanlea- 
licek. Prop, and Pnb. OodeyU Lady'i Book, 
Philadelphia, Pa. 

I am delighted with your pen, and must 
speak warm words in Us praise.— M. L. Hol- 
brook. Editor Herald qf Health. 

It is the beet fountain pen for shorthand, 
and over fifty of my pupils use It.— J. N. Kim- 
ball, Teacher of shorthand, Packard's Col- 
lege, New Tork. 

I have no fault to And with It. I would ag- 
gesi to Mr. Waterman that he should supply 
the English market with bis pens.- Mr. Henry 
LabODcliere (editor) In London <Bng.) Truth. 

It writes freely, never overflows, aid like 
the Texas pistol is always ready. It is the 
most perfect labor, time and patience saving 
tool a literary man could ask for.— BenJ. 
>'»rthrap, Assistant Editor N. Y. Graphic. 

I have tried various other styles of fountain 
pens and found them all defective and un- 
cleanly. But since I became the owner of a 
Waterman " Ideal " Fountain Pen, I am 
liappy— no dirty fingers, no leaky holders soil- 
ing the pocket. It Is always ready without 
pounding and shaking, and is In every way a 
perfect fountain pen.— Euyene G. Blackford, 
Fish Commissioner, New York State. 

Next to a full purse, your " Ideal " Fountain 
Pen is the most useful thing I know of In 
traveling. For years I have been wearing out 
Stylographic Pens, and the Stylographic Pens 
have been wearing out me. 

Now, Instead of v, riting with a pin point, 1 
am delighted to find vhat I can at any time use 
my own gold pen, and \^erefor« can give force 
and a distinctive charav \er to my handwriting. 
You have made a groat invention, and one 
that has evidently " come to stay." A century 
hence I doubt not that your " Ideal Pen " wlU 
still be fiourishlng, and though " men may 
come and men may go," like Tennyson'i 
" Brook," it will still ^' flow on forever."— 
J. L. Stoddard, the popular lecturer. 



I 



Special Premiufn Offers. 



f We have thoroughly tested these pens, and being convinced of their very grew 

l< superiority, we have made special arrangements for offering the;tii as Premiumi 

^ for subscriptions to The Phrenological Journal on the following very liljcral 

lerms ■ No 3, Pen and Holder, price $3.50, will be given for three subscribers at $1.5° eochi 
or $1 6"; with Chart or Bust Premium. No. 4. price $4.00, for four subscribers. No. S. price 
%ioo "for Sve subscribers. For one subscriber extra a gold-mounted and «ngraved holder »ZU 
be' sent Or we will send the Journal a year as u Premium to *ny person orderioK a peo at 
ibove prices. Descriptive drcul?' sent on amplication. Address al order* t« 

roWLER & WELLS CO., PuWisliers, 37 EastSlst St., New Tork. 



